WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Introduction To Genetic Diseases Or Genetic Disorders

Gene is the fundamental physical and functional unit of heredity which carries information from one generation to the next. A complete set of chromosomal genes, inherited as a unit from one parent, or the entire genotype of a cell or an individual is known as the genome.

A genetic disease or disorder is a disease in whole or in part of the individual’s genome by a change in the DNA sequence away from the normal sequence.

It can be caused by a mutation in one gene only (monogenic disorder), by mutations in multiple genes (multifactorial inheritance disorder),

by a combination of gene mutations and environmental factors, or by damage to chromosomes (changes in the number or structure of entire chromosomes).

Common Genetic Diseases Class 10

Some genetic disorders are inherited from the parents, while other genetic diseases are caused by acquired changes or mutations in a pre-existing gene or group of genes.

Mutations can occur either randomly or due to some environmental exposure to ultraviolet radiations from the sun or can occur if an error is made as DNA copies itself during cell division.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

Genetic disorders that typically involve the inheritance of a particular mutated disease-causing gene include sickle cell disease, cystic fibrosis, etc.

The mutated gene is passed down through a family and each generation of children can inherit the gene that causes the disease.

Rarely, one of these monogenic diseases can occur spontaneously in a child when his/her parents do not have the disease gene or there is no history of the disease in the family.

Acquired mutations are not hereditary and hence, they do not pass from parents to the offspring. Acquired mutations are much more common than inherited mutations.

Most cancers are caused by acquired mutations. This type of mutation is also called sporadic or somatic recessive.

The mutation can be spontaneous and where there is no mutation. Every time a cell divides, it creates an opportunity for mutations to occur.

Thus the number of gene mutations builds up over time which is why we have a higher risk of cancer as we get older.

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Symptoms And Causes Of Some Single-Gene Disorders In Population

Single gene disorders (or monogenic disorders) are the result of a single defective gene that is inherited according to Mendel’s laws (Mendelian disorder).

Inheritance patterns can be autosomal dominant, autosomal recessive, or X-linked single-gene disorders in the population:

previous family history. There are more than 10,000 monogenic disorders that have been identified today.

Mendelian disorders or single gene disorders fall into two main categories or inheritance patterns based on the chromosomal

Location Of The Gene:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 3 Heredity And Common Genetic Diseases Topic B Some Common Genetic Diseases Single gene disorders

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Sex-Linked Inheritance

The gene is located in the sex chromosome. Sex chromosomes may be X or Y chromosomes.

But, as the Y chromosome is more or less genetically inert (functionless or inactive) to the X chromosome, we generally consider sex-linked genes and X-linked genes to be synonymous.

Some X-linked recessive characteristics are- color blindness, hemophilia, etc.

Haemophilia

Haemophilia is a rare disorder in which blood doesn’t clot normally because it lacks sufficient blood-clotting proteins (clotting factors) causing the sufferer to bleed severely even from a slight injury.

Haemophilia Symptoms:

The major signs and symptoms of hemophilia are excessive bleeding and easy bruising.

Children who have mild hemophilia may not have signs unless they have excessive bleeding from a dental procedure, an accident, or surgery,

Bleeding can occur on the body’s surface (external bleeding) or inside the body (internal bleeding)— blood in stool, blood in urine, bruising, nose bleeds, heavy or prolonged periods, etc.

Swollen joints and pain in the joints.

Common Genetic Diseases Class 10

Haemophilia Causes:

A defect in one of the genes that determines how the body makes blood clotting factor VIII or IX causes hemophilia. These genes are located on the X chromosomes.

Chromosomes come in pairs. The two types of hemophilia are factor VIII deficiency (hemophilia A) and factor IX deficiency (hemophilia B, or Christmas disease).

The most common type of hemophilia is called hemophilia A in which the person does not have enough clotting factor VIII (factor eight).

A less common type is hemophilia B in which a person does not have enough clotting factor IX (factor nine). Females have two X chromosomes, while males have one X and one Y chromosome.

Only the X chromosome carries the genes related to clotting factors. Haemophilia usually occurs more in males than in females. About 1 in 5,000 males are born with hemophilia each year.

A male who has a hemophilia gene on his X chromosome will have hemophilia. When a female has a hemophilia gene on only one of her X chromosomes, she does not have symptoms of hemophilia, since at least one of the X- -chromosomes have a factor VIII or IX gene that works to produce normal or near normal levels of factors.

However, some women who carry this gene may have a bleeding tendency. They are called ‘symptomatic carriers’. They are recognized as having mild hemophilia.

In very rare cases, some women have particularly low factor levels causing them to have moderate or severe hemophilia. In such cases, both X chromosomes are affected or one is affected and the other is missing or inactive.

Inheritance Of Haemophilia:

In this example, the mother is a carrier of the hemophilia gene and the father does not have hemophilia There is a 50% chance that each son will have hemophilia.

There is a 50% chance that each daughter will be a carrier of the hemophilia gene.

In this example, the father has hemophilia and the mother does not carry the hemophilia gene:

None of the sons will have hemophilia All daughters will carry the hemophilia gene In this example, the father does not have hemophilia and the mother does not carry the hemophilia gene

None of the children (either daughters or sons) will have hemophilia or carry the gene.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 3 Heredity And Common Genetic Diseases Topic B Some Common Genetic Diseases x=choromosomes with haemophilia gene

A Royal Disease:

Haemophilia is sometimes referred to as “the royal disease,” because it affected the royal families of England, Germany, Russia, and Spain in the 19th and 20th centuries.

Queen Victoria of England, who ruled from 1837-1901, is believed to have been the carrier of hemophilia B, or factor IX deficiency. She passed the trait on to three of her nine children.

Her son Leopold died of a hemorrhage after a fall when he was 30. Her daughters Alice and Beatrice passed it on to several of their children.

Alice’s daughter Alix married Tsar Nicholas of Russia, whose son Alexei had hemophilia.

Their family’s entanglement with Rasputin, the Russian mystic, and their deaths during the Bolshevik Revolution have been chronicled in several books and films.

Common Genetic Diseases Class 10

Haemophilia was carried through various royal family members for three generations after Victoria and then disappeared.

Treatment of hemophilia:

Treatment of hemophilia involves regular injections of clotting factor medicine.

Color Blindness

Though most of us share a common color vision sensory experience, some people have a color vision deficiency, which means that their perception of colors is different from what most of us see.

Color-blind people can see things as clearly as other people but they are unable to fully ‘see’ red, green, or blue light.

Color blindness is the inability or reduced ability to see colors or to perceive obvious differences between two colors under normal lighting.

Color Blindness Symptoms:

Common symptoms of color blindness include difficulty in distinguishing between colors and inability to see shades or tones of the same color,

  1. People with Red-green color blindness are unable to see some shades of red and green,
  2. People with Blue-yellow color blindness are unable to see some shades of blue and yellow,
  3. People with complete color blindness do not see any colors.

Color Blindness Types:

Color blindness can be mild, moderate, or severe. Based on photo pigment defects in the three different kinds of cone cells that respond to blue, green & red light, color blindness can be of three types

Red-green color blindness:

People with this type of color blindness are unable to see some shades of red and green. Reds may appear brownish-yellow, and greens may look beige to some people.

Certain shades of orange, yellow, and green may appear yellow to others. Red may also appear black to some people. Red-green color blindness is sometimes called Daltonism after John Dalton, the famous scientist, who himself was red-green color blind.

Blue-yellow color blindness:

People with this type of color blindness are unable to see some shades of blue and yellow. Blue may appear greener and it may be difficult to distinguish yellow and red from pink. Yellow may appear violet to some people.

Complete color blindness:

People with complete color blindness do not see any colors. Poor vision accompanies complete colour blindness.

Red-green color blindness is the most common form of colour vision deficiency in many parts of the world. It is also much more common in men than in women.

Blue-yellow color blindness affects men and women equally. Complete colour blindness is rare.

Complete color blindness Causes:

Color blindness is a genetic condition caused by a difference in how one or more of the light-sensitive cells found in the retina of the eye respond to certain colors.

Inherited forms of color blindness often are related to deficiencies in certain types of cones or outright absence of cones.

Usually, genes inherited from the parents cause the deficiency or are responsible for faulty photopigments.

Men are much more likely to be colorblind than women because the genes responsible for the most common, inherited colour blindness are on the X chromosome.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Genetic Diseases

Males only have one X chromosome, while females have two X chromosomes. In females, a functional dominant gene for normal vision on only one of the X chromosomes is enough to compensate for the loss on the other.

In X-linked inheritance, the mother carries the mutated gene on one of her X chromosomes and will pass on the mutated gene to 50 percent of her children.

Inheritance of colour blindness:

In X-linked inheritance, the mother carries the mutated gene on one of her X chromosomes and will pass on the mutated gene to 50 percent of her children.

Because females have two X chromosomes, the effect of a mutation on one X chromosome is offset by the normal gene on the other X chromosome.

In this case, the mother will not have the disease, but she can pass on the mutated gene and so is called a carrier.

If a mother is a carrier of an X-linked dis-ease (and the father is not affected), there is a, 1 in 2 chance that a son will have the disease, a 1 in 2 chance that a daughter will be a carrier of the disease, No chance that a daughter will have the disease.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 3 Heredity And Common Genetic Diseases Topic B Some Common Genetic Diseases XY

Complete color blindness Treatment:

In general, treatments include blood transfusions, bone marrow transplants, medications, and supplements, etc.

People who receive blood transfusions receive extra iron that the body can’t easily get rid of and iron can accumulate in tissues, which can be potentially fatal.

The human body has no active mechanism for the excretion of iron.

Excess iron in vital organs, even in mild cases of iron overload, increases the risk for liver disease (cirrhosis, cancer), heart attack or heart failure, diabetes mellitus, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis metabolic syndrome, hypothyroidism, etc.

Hence the treatment of blood transfusion is to be followed with Iron chelation which involves the removal of excess iron from the bloodstream.

Inheritance of thalassemia:

A child who inherits two thalassemia trait genes-one from each parent will have the disease.

A child of two carriers has a 25 percent chance of receiving two trait genes and developing the disease and a 50 per cent chance of being a thalassemia trait carrier.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Genetic Diseases

As illustrated in marriages between two carriers (thalassemia minor) may result in – a 25% chance of thalassemia major children, a 50% chance of thalassemia minor children, and a 25% chance of normal children. Thus two thalassemia carriers should not get married.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 3 Heredity And Common Genetic Diseases Topic B Some Common Genetic Diseases inheritance of thalassemia

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Autosomal Inheritance

The gene is located in any autosome. The mutant allele may be dominant or recessive. Examples of autosomal recessive traits are thalassemia, albinism, etc. Autosomal dominant traits are- Huntington’s disease, polycystic kidney disease, etc.

Thalassemia:

Thalassemia is a blood-related genetic disorder that involves the absence of or errors in genes responsible for production of hemoglobin, a protein present in the red blood cells, that carries oxygen.

The disorder results in large numbers of red blood cells being destroyed, which leads to anemia and fatigue.

Thalassemia Types:

A hemoglobin molecule has sub-units commonly referred to as alpha and beta. Both sub-units are necessary to bind oxygen in the lungs properly and deliver it to tissues in other parts of the body.

A lack of a particular subunit determines the type of thalassemia. There are two main types of thalassemia-

Alpha thalassemia occurs when a gene or genes related to the alpha globin protein are missing or mutated. The severity of alpha thalassemia depends on how many genes are mutated:

One faulty gene:

The patient has no symptoms. This type is known as alpha thalassemia minima.

Two faulty genes:

The patient has mild anemia. It is known as alpha thalassemia minor.

Three faulty genes:

The patient has hemoglobin H disease, a type of chronic anemia. They need regular blood transfusions throughout their life.

Four faulty genes- This causes alpha thalassemia major, the most severe form. It is known to cause hydrops fetalis, a serious condition in which fluid accumulates in various parts of the fetus’ body.

Beta-thalassemia occurs when similar gene defects affect the production of the beta globin protein.

Severity depends on how many genes are mutated:

One faulty gene:

This is called beta thalassemia minor.

Two faulty genes:

There may be moderate or severe symptoms. This is known as beta-thalassemia major. It used to be called Cooley’s anemia.

Symptoms:

Children born with thalassemia major (Cooley’s anemia) are normal at birth, but develop severe anemia during the first year of life,

Other symptoms can include:

fatigue, growth failure, shortness of breath, yellow skin (jaundice), facial bone deformities, abdominal swelling, etc.

Treatment:

In general, treatments include blood transfusions, bone marrow transplants, medications, supplements, etc. People who receive blood transfusions receive extra iron that the body can’t easily get rid of and iron can accumulate in tissues, which can be potentially fatal.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Genetic Diseases

The human body has no active mechanism for the excretion of iron. Excess iron in vital organs, even in mild cases of iron overload, increases the risk for liver disease (cirrhosis, cancer), heart attack or heart failure, diabetes mellitus, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis,

metabolic syndrome, hypothyroidism, etc. Hence the treatment of blood transfusion is to be followed with Iron chelation which involves the removal of excess iron from the bloodstream.

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Genetic Counselling

Thalassemia mutations and various abnormal hemoglobins interact to produce a wide range of disorders of varying degrees of severity.

Hemoglobin disorders are the most common worldwide inherited conditions. They are common in populations of tropical Africa, Asia, and the Mediterranean region and are spreading by migration throughout the world.

A stem cell transplant is the only treatment that can cure thalassemia. But only a small number of people who have severe thalassemias are able to find a good donor match and have the risky as well as expensive procedure.

Genetic counseling, therefore, plays the most important part in thalassemia prevention programs considering the diversity and severity of the problem.

Genetic counseling is defined as the process by which patients or relatives at risk of a disorder that may be hereditary are advised of the consequences of the disorder and the probability of developing and transmitting it and the ways in which this may be prevented.

Common Genetic Diseases Genetic Counselling Involves The Followings:

A correct diagnosis using genetic tests after evaluation of family history and medical records Explanation of the nature of disorder & the treatment available Estimation of genetic risk for parents and family members.

Communication of genetic risks and the options for avoiding them to avoid undue complications in an unbiased manner Support in making the right decision Accessibility for long-term contact and counseling.

Premarital screening for thalassemia and sickle cell should be made mandatory to decrease at-risk marriages.

Mendelian Disorders Class 10 Life Science 

The objective is to make people aware of the consequences of thalassemia on health and socio-economics so that they voluntarily ask for screening, and prevention and change their reproductive plans when a possible risk is found.

If the risk is found before marriage, the options are to remain single, not to marry another carrier or to marry irrespective of carrier status.

If the risk is found after marriage, the options are to separate and find a non-carrier partner, to have a few or no children, selective termination of pregnancy, or to take a chance and have children as usual.

There are therefore challenges involved in genetic counseling because all the available choices involve difficult moral and social problems and in most cases, there appears to be no right answer.

But on the other hand, once people understand the risk, they can not escape from making a choice even if the decision ‘not to choose’ is a choice.

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Fill In The blanks

Question 1. Single gene inheritance is also called Mendelian or_______________ inheritance.
Answer: Monogentic

Question 2. Some_______________ recessive characteristics are- color blindness, hemophilia, etc.
Answer: X-Linked

Question 3. The major signs and symptoms of_______________ are excessive bleeding and easy bruising.
Answer: hemophilia

Question 4. When a female has a hemophilia gene on only one of her X chromosomes, she is a “hemophilia_______________
Answer: Carrier

Question 5. Color blindness is also known as _______________
Answer: Daltonism

Question 6. Examples of autosomal_______________ traits are thalassemia, albinism, etc.
Answer: Recessive

Genetic Diseases Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. Alpha thalassemia occurs when a gene or genes related to the_______________ globin protein are missing or mutated.
Answer: Alpha

Question 8. Thalassemia major is also known as_______________ ane- mia.
Answer: Cooley’s

Question 9._______________ counseling plays the most important part in thalassemia prevention program.
Answer: Genetic

Question 10. Clotting factor IX deficiency results in_______________ .
Answer: Haemophilia

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Write True Or False

Question 1. Single-gene inheritance is also called Mendelian or monogenetic inheritance.
Answer: True

Question 2. Multifactorial inheritance is also called complex or polygenic inheritance.
Answer: True

Question 3. Thalassemia is a rare disorder in which blood doesn’t clot normally.
Answer: False

Question 4. A defect in one of the genes that determine how the body makes blood clotting factor VIII or IX causes hemophilia
Answer: True

Question 5. Color Blindness is a genetic Condition
Answer: True

Question 6. Thalassemia is an autosomal dominant disorder.
Answer: False

Question 7. Most genetic diseases cannot be prevented by genetic counselling.
Answer: False

Question 8. Alpha thalassemia occurs when a gene or genes related to the alpha globin protein are missing or mutated.
Answer: True

Genetic Diseases Class 10 MCQs

Question 9. Marriages between two carriers (thalassemia minor) may result in – a 25% chance of thalassemia minor children.
Answer: True

Question 10. Red-green color blindness affects men and women equally.
Answer: False

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Match The column

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 3 Heredity And Common Genetic Diseases Topic B Some Common Genetic Diseases match the column
Answer: 1-E,2-D,3-A,4-C

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Which genes show sex-linked inheritance?
Answer: The genes present on sex chromosomes (X and Y in humans) show sex-linked inheritance.

Question 2. Name a sex-linked recessive character of a human.
Answer: Colour blindness, hemophilia, etc. are sex-linked recessive characteristics.

Question 3. Name an autosomal dominant trait of humans.
Answer: Huntington’s disease, polycystic kidney disease, etc.

Question 4. Name an autosomal recessive trait of humans.
Answer: Thalassemia, albinism, etc.

Question 5. What is the Holandric gene?
Answer: A gene that occurs only in the Y chromosome is known as a holandric gene.

Question 6. What is the other name for hemophilia B?
Answer: Christmas disease.

Genetic Diseases Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. Why hemophilia is called a royal disease?
Answer: Because it affected the royal families of England, Germany, Russia, and Spain in the 19th and 20th centuries.

Question 8. What are the symptoms of thalassemia minor?
Answer: Mild anemia.

Choose the odd one and write it:

Thalassemia, polycystic kidney disease, color blindness, albinism.

Colorblindness:

It is a sex-linked genetic disorder while the others are autosomal disorders.

Question 10. A pair of related terms is given below. Based on the relationship in the first pair, write the suitable word in the gap of the second pair:
Answer:

factor VIII deficiency: hemophilia A:: factor IX deficiency: hemophilia B.

X- X-linked recessive character: Haemophilia:: Autosomal recessive character: thalassemia.

WBBSE Chapter 3 Some Common Genetic Diseases Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is monogenic inheritance?
Answer:

Monogenic inheritance

Single-gene inheritance is also called Mendelian or monogenetic inheritance. This type of inheritance is caused by changes or mutations that occur in the DNA sequence of a single gene.

Examples- thalassemia, cystic fibrosis, hemophilia, color blindness, etc.

Question 2. What is the cause of hemophilia?
Answer:

The cause of hemophilia

A defect in one of the genes that determines how the body makes blood clotting factor VIII or IX causes hemophilia. These genes are recessive and located on the X chromosomes.

In hemophilia A the person does not have enough clothing factor VIII and in hemophilia B the person does not have enough clotting factor IX. This results in easy bruising and excessive bleeding.

Question 3. What are the types of colour blindness?
Answer:

The types of colour blindness

There are three main kinds of color blindness, based on photopigment defects in the three different kinds of cones that respond to blue, green, and red light. Red-green colour blindness is the most common, followed by blue-yellow colour blindness.

A complete absence of colour vision and total colour blindness is rare.

Question 4. Why more males are color-blind than females?
Answer:

Men are much more likely to be colour blind than women because the genes responsible for the most common, inherited colour blindness are on the X chromosome.

Males only have one X chromosome, while females have two X chromosomes. In females, a functional dominant gene on only one of the X chromosomes is enough to compensate for the loss on the other.

In X-linked inheritance, the mother carries the mutated gene on one of her X chromosomes and will pass on the mutated gene to 50 percent of her children.

Hereditary Diseases Class 10 Life Science

Question 5. What is thalassemia?
Answer:

Thalassemia

Thalassemia is a blood-related autosomal genetic disorder that involves the absence of or errors in genes responsible for the production of hemoglobin, a protein present in red blood cells.

Haemoglobin is the protein in red blood cells that carries oxygen. The disorder results in large numbers of red blood cells being destroyed, which leads to anemia and severe fatigue.

Question 6. What is hydrops fetalis?
Answer:

Hydrops fetalis

Hydrops fetalis usually stems from fetal anemia. It is a condition in the fetus characterized by an accumulation of fluid in at least two fetal compartments. Alpha thalassemia major is known to cause hydrops fetalis.

Hereditary Diseases Class 10 Life Science

Question 7. What is protanopia?
Answer:

Protanopia

Red-green colour blindness is also called protanopia.

Protans have either defective long wavelength cones or these L-cones are missing at all. Protans have difficulties to distinguish between blue and green colors and also between red and green colors.

WBBSE Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. ______________ is a disease created by sexlinked gene.
Answer: Haemophilia

WBBSE Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Which type of chromosome in humans carries the gene responsible for the disease thalassemia?
Answer: Autosome

Question 2. What is the cause of the expression of hemophilia disease only at homozygous conditions?
Answer: A mutation of the F8 gene in a homozygous state causes low clotting factor levels resulting in moderate or severe hemophilia.

The likelihood of encountering such hemophilia is higher in consanguineous (of the same family and related by blood) marriages.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Biodiversity And Conservation

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Introduction To The Concept Of Biodiversity

Living organisms are characterized by diversity. Our earth supports nearly 5 to 10 million species of plants and animals as per IUCN.

Biodiversity (or Biological diversity) is defined as the variability among living organisms from all sources including terrestrial, marine, and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological complexes of which they are part.

It includes genetic diversity, species diversity, and ecosystem diversity which together affect the complex ecological processes operating at different levels.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Biodiversity And Conservation

The term has several interpretations, and there are many ways to index, measure, characterize, and represent its complex organization.

Biodiversity plays an important role in ecosystem services, which maintain and improve human quality of life.

An understanding of biodiversity has, therefore, practical applications for species and ecosystem-level conservation planners, as they make management recommendations to consulting firms, governments, and industry.

Biodiversity is defined and measured as an attribute that has two components richness and evenness.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

Richness:

It signifies the number of groups of genetically or functionally related individuals. In most vegetation surveys, richness is expressed as the number of species and is usually called species richness.

Evenness:

It signifies the Proportions of species or functional groups present on a site. The more equal species are in proportion to each other, the greater the evenness of the site.

A site with low evenness indicates that a few species dominate the site.

Diversity Can Be Used To Describe Variation In Several Forms:

  1. Genetic (species, varieties, etc.)
  2. Life form (grasses, forb, trees, mosses, etc.)
  3. The functional group (deep-rooted, nitrogen-fixing, soil crust, evergreen, etc.)
  4. Biodiversity is the result of 3.5 billion years of evolution.

It has been subjected to periods of extinction.

The latest and most destructive stage of extinction is the Holocene extinction, which has occurred due to the impact of human beings on the environment. On Earth, biodiversity is unevenly distributed.

It varies globally and within regions. The various factors that influence biodiversity include temperature, altitude, precipitation, soil texture, etc.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

For instance, ocean biodiversity is 25 times less than terrestrial biodiversity. Biodiversity also increases its form as it moves from colder poles towards the warmer tropics.

Biodiversity And Conservation Class 10

The United Nations has designated 2011-2020 as the United Nations Decade on Biodiversity.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Levels Of Biodiversity

Biodiversity includes genetic diversity, species diversity, and community or ecosystem diversity.

Genetic diversity:

Genetic diversity may be defined as variation in genes within a particular species. It refers to the heritable variation. Sexual reproduction plays an important role in genetic diversity.

A species having more genetic diversity can adapt better to the change in environmental conditions.

  1. Different genetic information is stored in different species.
  2. For example, E.Coli has 10,000 genes.
  3. Drosophila has 13,000 genes.
  4. Homo Sapiens has 35,000 to 45,000 genes.
  5. The amount of genetic variation is the basis of speciation.

Species diversity:

Species diversity is the variety of different species In a given area.

It Is required to estimate the different species In a given area to know the species diversity.

For example, a forest may have 20 bird species, 50 plant species, and 10 mammal species. Greater varieties of species are found near the equator and lesser at the poles.

Community or ecosystem diversity:

Ecological diversity refers to the sum of the different types of environments of Ecosystems present in a region or the habitat, which is the total of the climate, vegetation, and geography of a region.

An ecosystem is a unit of the biosphere in which there is an interaction between living and non-living factors to maintain a continuous flow of energy.

It is a structural and functional unit of a biosphere. There are several kinds of habitats or ecosystems around the world. The variety of diversity of species in an ecosystem is influenced by the ecosystem itself.

Example of ecosystems:

Grassland, wetland, desert, aquatic ecosystem, etc.

Ecological diversity is the largest scale of biodiversity and within each ecosystem, there is a great deal of both the species and genetic diversity.

A region may have several ecosystems or it may have one. Wide expanses of oceans and deserts are regions of low ecological diversity. A mountain area that has lakes, forests, and grasslands would have higher biodiversity in this sense.

Community or ecosystem Biodiversity can be expressed at several spatial scales:

Alpha(α)Diversity:

It refers to the richness and evenness of individuals within a habitat unit. For example in the A = 7 species, Site B = 5 species, Site C = 7 species.

Alpha Diversity is a local measure. This diversity changes frequently since species undergo frequent changes when the habitat changes.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Alpha

Beta(β)Diversity:

It refers to the expression of diversity between habitats or the rate of replacement of species along a gradient of habitats like an altitudinal gradient or moisture gradient etc.

It is calculated by the following equation:

[3 diversity = (Number of species in habitat 1- Number of species of habitat 1 & 2 in common) + (Number of species in habitat 2 – Number of species of habitat 1 & 2 in common). = (H1-H1 & 2) + (H2- H1 & 2).

For example, C with 10 species differs between them and only 2 species in common.

Biodiversity And Conservation Class 10

Diversity expresses the ratio between local or diversity and regional diversity. Hence, the higher the hetero-genericity in habitats, the higher the dissimilarity between communities.

Gamma (γ) Diversity:

It refers to the landscape diversity or diversity of habitats within a landscape or region. In this example, the Gamma Diversity is 3 habitats with 12 species total diversity.

Naturally, it is a combination of both a and β-diversity. Alternatively, γdiversity is also defined as ‘geographic scale species diversity’.

In addition to the above three, recently molecular diversity has also been added as the newest level of biodiversity.
essential items and economic productivity of a country.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Importance Of Biodiversity

Biodiversity includes the flora and fauna of a particular place. It controls the supply of essential items and the economic Productivity of a country

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation importance uses of biodiverstiy

Sources Of Food Production:

Staple food crops like rice, wheat, barley, potato, and other vegetables, provide Nourishment to the world.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation sources of food products

Sources Of Drugs and Medicines: Plants are the sources of drug molecules like Basak, Tulsi, ashwagandha, ipecac, etc., Which are used in the preparation of different bulk drugs and life-saving molecules.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation tulsi

Ecological Balance:  Plants are useful for maintaining the ecological balance of a particular place sand binders are useful for protecting the seashore, trees growing along the slope of a hill prevent landslides, and mangrove vegetation near the sea shore helps to protect the hinterland from high-speed wind arising in the seas and ocean, etc.

Climate Control:

The rainfall of a particular place is controlled by the vegetation. It also ensures climate control of a place.

House building and furniture building process:

The wood from different timber-yielding plants like teak and sal is used in the making of houses and furniture.

Paper production:

The soft woody tissue of forest trees is used in the preparation of paper pulp for the manufacturing of paper.

Gum production:

The gums and adhesives of industrial importance are produced from the Acacia tree.

Resin production:

Resins are another useful product of gymnospermous wood like Pinus. They may be hard or soft in nature and are used in the paint industry as an organic solvent

Example: turpentine.

Wax production:

It takes place within the bee hive. It is a product produced by a honey bee [Apis indica) consisting of myristyl alcohol and esters of palmitic acid.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Biodiversity Notes

Leather Production:

The animal (cattle) hides which are slaughtered for meat are the potent source of leather, which is processed by the process of tanning using chemicals like tannins obtained from plant sources.

Silk Production:

It is a protein produced by the silkworm in its pupal stage and it consists of two major proteins, sericin, and fibroin.

The color and texture of silk thread depend on the nature of the leaf of the host plant which the silkworm larvae consume.

It may be classified into four major types in India as denoted in the table below:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation ecological balance

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Silk variety

Wool production:

The wool is produced from the hair of sheep. The wool texture & strength depend on the type of sheep, but they are broad of three types short, medium, and long.

The Pashmina wool of Kashmir is world-famous. The first Pashmina goat Noori has been cloned in 2012.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation pashmina noori

Pearl production:

Pearls are produced from the pearl-producing oysters due to the entry of dust particles followed by the deposition of aragonite (CaC03), chitin, and luster around the particle.

They can be produced naturally or can be generated artificially by culturing. Natural pearls are more costly than artificial pearls and they have an irregular shape and more luster.

They vary in color and texture depending upon the variety of the bivalve (oyster) where it is produced.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation pearl shell

Eco tourism:

Biodiversity is a source of economic wealth for many potential areas. Ecotourism, bird watching, wildlife safari, etc are growing outdoor recreational activities.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Biodiversity Hotspots

Certain regions of the world are mega-diversity zones where a very large number of species are found. Norman Myers developed the concept of hotspots to designate these priority areas.

The hotspots are the richest and the most threatened reservoirs of flora and fauna on Earth.

A biodiversity hotspot is a biogeographic region with a significant reservoir of biodiversity that is under threat of destruction by human beings.

The Key Criteria To Determine A Hot Spot Are:

Number of endemic species, ie., the species which are restricted to only these areas, and

The degree of threat is measured in the manner of habitat loss.

The Hotspot status is designated by Conservation International (Cl).

Out of 35 globally identified biodiversity hotspots all over the world, there are only four in India which include

Eastern Himalayas (North Eastern Hilly states),

Indo- Myanmar (Burma) area including Andaman and Nicobar Islands,

Western Ghats and Srilanka and

Sundaland including the islands of the Andaman Sea.

Eastern Himalayas:

The Eastern Himalayas is the region encompassing Bhutan, north Eastern India, and Southern, Central, and Eastern Nepal.

The Eastern Himalayan hotspot has nearly 163 globally threatened species including the one-horned Rhinoceros (Rhinoceros unicornis), the wild Asian water Buffalo and in all 45 mammals, 50 birds, 17 reptiles, 12 amphibians, 3 invertebrates, and 26 plant species.

There are 10,000 plant species and 300 animal species like Golden langur, Himalayan tahr, pygmy hog, snow leopard, black bear, and Gangetic dolphin which are endemic in nature.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation indo burma

Indo-Burma:

The Indo-Burma region is spread out from Eastern Bangladesh to Malaysia and includes North Eastern India, South of the Brahmaputra River, Myanmar, and the Southern part of China’s Yunnan province.

This region is home to several primate species such as monkeys, langurs, gibbons, etc. Almost 1,300 bird species exist in this region including the threatened white-eared night heron and the orange-necked partridge.

There are about 13,500 plant species in this hotspot, with over half of them being endemic.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Biodiversity Notes

Western Ghats and Sri Lanka:

The Western Ghats are a chain of hills that run along the western edge of peninsular India. These regions have moist deciduous forests and rainforests.

Nearly 77% of the amphibians and 62% of the reptile species are found here. Sri Lanka which lies to the South of India, is also a country rich in species diversity.

The western ghats of India contain more than 30% of all plant, fish, herpeto-fauna, birds, and mammal species. Many species are endemic, such as Nilgiri tahr and the lion-tailed macaque.

Sundaland:

Sundaland (also called the Sundaic region) is a biogeographical region of South-eastern Asia that encompasses the Sunda shelf, the part of the Asian continental shelf that was exposed during the last ice age.

This biodiversity hotspot is dominated by two of the largest islands in the world, Borneo and Sumatra.

The islands of Sundaland are home to many Asian mammals including elephants, monkeys, apes, tigers, tapirs, and rhinoceros.

There are at least 117 endemic plant genera in the hotspot, 59 of these are found in Borneo, 17 in Sumatra, and 41 on the Malay Peninsula.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Loss Of Biodiversity

The main cause of the loss of biodiversity can be attributed to the influence of human beings on the world’s ecosystem.

Human beings have deeply altered the environment, and have modified the territory, exploiting the species directly, for example by fishing and hunting, changing the biogeochemical cycles, and transferring species from one area to another of the planet.

The Loss Of Biodiversity May Be Due To Various Reasons Which Are Indicated Below:

Habitat destruction:

The destruction has played a key role in extinctions, especially the destruction of tropical rainforests.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation habitat destruction

Factors Contributing To Habitat Loss Are:

Overpopulation, deforestation, encroachment into forest areas, pollution (air, water, and soil contamination), and global warming or climate change.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation habitatloss

Biodiversity and genetic diversity are codependent and diversity among species requires diversity within a species, and vice versa. If any one type is removed from the system, the cycle can break down, and the community becomes dominated by a single species.

Barriers such as large rivers, seas, oceans, mountains, and deserts encourage diversity by enabling independent evolution on either side of the barrier.

Invasion of species occurs when those barriers are destroyed or damaged. Without barriers, such species occupy new niches, which reduces the diversity substantially.

Hunting and Poaching:

Poaching has traditionally been defined as the illegal hunting, killing, or capturing of wild animals.

It is a severe threat to biodiversity, especially in economically poor South Asian countries since poachers kill animals like elephants, rhinoceros, and lions to illegally sell the horns, ivory, body parts, and skin at a high profit.

Moreover, some people cut the trees for wood and sell them at high rates causing large-scale deforestation.

Over-exploitation:

Over-exploitation occurs when a resource is consumed at an unsustainable rate. This occurs on land in the form of overhunting, excessive logging, poor soil conservation in agriculture, and the illegal wildlife trade.

All these factors are more acute in the relatively less developed countries with relatively high biodiversity resources.

Over-exploitation of a particular species reduces the size of the species’ population to the extent that it becomes on the verge of extinction.

The ever-growing illegal trade of tigers has resulted in the extinction of the big cat from many countries in South Asia.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation fishes

Pollution:

Human activity influences the natural environment producing negative direct or indirect effects that alter the flow of energy, the chemical and physical constitution of the environment, and the abundance of the species.

Pollution may either reduce or eliminate populations of sensitive species. For example, pesticides have a direct link with the decline of falcons.

Lead poisoning also affects wildlife seriously. Eutrophication of water bodies drastically reduces aquatic species diversity.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation thermal power station

Global Warming and Climate Change:

The direct impact of Global warming has been the destruction of the habitat of the polar species.

The melting of ice results in uncontrolled flood, modification of the wetland, and ingress of seawater into the water bodies of the hinterland.

According to a UN report, by 2050, there will be a loss of at least 10 percent of species due to global warming alone.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Biodiversity Notes

The heating of the earth’s surface due to climate change affects biodiversity because it endangers all the species that are adapted to the cold either due to the altitude or the altitude (mountain species).

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation polar bear

Natural Calamities:

Major events of flood, drought, earthquake, and tsunami have resulted in the destruction of several species of plants and animals.

Changes in the salinity of water in the Indian part of the Sundarbans due to supercyclones have resulted in the loss of the Sundari tree.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation earth quake

Exotic Species:

New species entering a geographical region are called exotic or alien species.

The introduction of such alien invasive species may cause the disappearance of native species through competition in a changed biotic interactive environment.

The exotic species of water hyacinth introduced into the rivers & lakes of tropical countries including India has resulted in the modification of the lentic (stagnant water) ecosystem and has, as a result, eliminated many native aquatic species earlier native to the regions.

Similarly, Nile perch, an exotic predatory fish, introduced into Lake Victoria of South Africa has threatened the entire lake ecosystem by eliminating several freshwater native endemic species including the small Cichlid fish species.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation exotic seeds

Human Population Growth:

The geometric rise in human population levels during the twentieth century is the fundamental cause of the loss of biodiversity.

It has led to an unceasing search for more arable land for food production and livestock grazing and for wood for fuel, construction, and energy.

Previously undisturbed areas (which may or may not be suitable for the purposes to which they are constrained) are being transformed into agricultural or pasture land, stripped of wood, or mined for resources to support the energy needs of an ever-growing human population.

Importance Of Biodiversity Class 10

Humans also tend to settle in areas of high biodiversity, which often have relatively rich soils and other attractions for human activities. This leads to great threats to biodiversity, especially since many of these areas have numerous endemic species.

Agriculture:

The dramatic increase in the number of humans during the twentieth century has instigated a concomitant growth in agriculture, and has led to the conversion of wild lands to croplands, massive diversions of water from lakes, rivers, and underground aquifers, and, at the same time, has polluted water and land resources with pesticides, fertilizers, and animal wastes.

The result has been the destruction, disturbance, or disabling of terrestrial ecosystems and polluted, oxygen-depleted, and atrophied water resources.

Extinction of species:

Extinction is a process in which species disappear and new ones evolve to take their place down the long geological history of Earth.

Extinction may be natural, mass, or anthropogenic in nature. Natural extinction occurred in the geological past at a very slow rate. Mass extinction also occurred in the past.

It is the anthropogenic extinction due to human activities that are the most severe threat toward depletion of biodiversity occurring within a short period of time.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Environmental Problems Of The Sundarbans

The Sundarbans constitute one of the largest mangrove ecosystems comprising the deltaic regions of the Hooghly River and its tributaries in West Bengal, India, and the Padma, and Brahmaputra deltaic regions of Bangladesh.

It consists of exotic species like Halophytic mangrove vegetation and the Royal Bengal Tiger, Marshy crocodile, and other animals.

It spans over 10,000 sq km approximately, 60% of which is in Bangladesh and the rest is in India. Because of its unique biodiversity, it is considered a World Heritage site by UNESCO.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation sundarbans

There are about 245 genera of plants reported from Sundarbans by David Prain (1903).

The name itself comes from the Sundari tree (Heritero littoralis), though at present, it is highly endangered in India. The mangrove forest of Sundarbans is tolerant to saline water and shows typical halophytic adaptation.

The forest is famous for Royal Bengal Tigers (Panthera tigris) but apart from that, there are about 150 species of commercially important fishes, 8 amphibia, 35 reptiles, 270 species of birds, and 42 species of mammals.

This ecosystem has been subjected to severe stress and strain, which has made the forest highly vulnerable and if not protected right now, the city of Kolkata will suffer a lot in the future from unprotected storms and cyclones coming from the Bay of Bengal.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation fishing in the lake

The Causes Of This Stress Are As Follows:

Urbanization:

The increasing population pressure has led to the spreading of urban dwellings into the forest. Though the core areas of the forest have been clearly demarcated, there has been increasing in the unauthorized deforestation process.

Thus the mangrove forest ecosystem is now in a captious position. The growing human population with few alternative livelihood opportunities poses a serious threat to the mangrove forests.

Importance Of Biodiversity Class 10

The rapidly expanding shrimp farming is a significant threat to mangrove forests. Due to illegal cutting, encroachment into forest areas, and illegal poaching of wildlife, the mangrove forest is losing biodiversity at an alarming rate.

Further threats are arising due to excessive pollution, global climate change, and sea level rise which are damaging the ecosystem’s biogeochemistry.

Agriculture:

In order to meet the increasing demand for food, the forest areas have been transformed into agricultural land by the locals.

Fresh water crisis:

The area remains at the confluence of perennial rivers and sea but due to the global greenhouse effect, the sea level is rising and it causes filtration of saline water into the internal territory causing serious crises in drinking water.

Habitat destruction:

The destruction of (iv)mangrove forest and the progressing human settlement and agricultural land have resulted in the loss of habitat for the animals, making them endangered and vulnerable. Thus they may get extinct in the future.

Pollution:

The pollution from different domestic dwellings, paint, and other hydrocarbons has resulted in the destruction of aquatic microflora and the destruction of the aquatic food chain.

Modification in the prey-predator balance:

The shrinking of mangrove vegetation has resulted in a reduction in the number of herbivores and as a result, the carnivores are becoming endangered. For example, the number of tigers has gone down deeply. Moreover, they are also getting killed illegally.

Submergence of Islands:

An increased number of islands are getting submerged due to rising water levels as a result of which the habitat is shrinking and it has reduced the biodiversity of the region considerably.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Conservation Of Biodiversity

Currently, the planet is inhabited by several million species in about 100 different phyla. The point of concern is that the modern extinction rate is high, at 100 to 1000 times greater than previous extinction rates calculated over the eras.

Although new species appear, existing species go extinct at a rate 1000 times that of species formation. We are in fact in the midst of a mass extinction, a time when 75% or more of species are lost over a short geological time scale.

The last great mass extinction was 65 million years ago, at the end of the Cretaceous, when the dinosaurs went extinct.

The International Union for the Conservation of Nature (IUCN) estimates that 22% of known mammals, 32% of amphibians, 14% of birds, and 32% of gymnosperms are threatened with extinction.

Thus, humans should be concerned about saving biodiversity for the overall sustenance of life on Earth.

Biodiversity conservation is about saving life on earth in all its forms from excessive rates of extinction, maintenance of genetic variability within species, and keeping the natural ecosystem functioning and healthy.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Concept of Threatened Species

IUCN has recognized the following categories of species based on threat perception in connection with extinction:

Endangered species:

These are in danger of extinction and their survival is unlikely if the causal factors continue to operate. Ex: rhinoceros, tiger, sloth bear, wild ass, etc.

Vulnerable species:

These are likely to move into the endangered category shortly if the causal factors continue to operate.

Rare species:

These are with small populations localized in some specific geographical areas only. These are not at present endangered or vulnerable but are at risk.

Threatened species:

These belong to either of the three categories mentioned, ie. either endangered or vulnerable, or rare.

Importance Of Biodiversity Class 10

Out of danger:

These are now relatively secure and do not face the threat of extinction at the present moment.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation General Modalities Of Conservation

The protection strategy cannot be a very simple one, because the problem is multidimensional.

Some of the major points are discussed below:

Increase of Inter-Governmental cooperation towards the common goal of protecting biodiversity.

Reduction of greenhouse gases for controlling global warming.

Undertaking special programs to protect endangered species which include protection from poaching or undertaking breeding programs.

Protection of the different biodiversity hotspots.

Exotic species that have become pests can be identified taxonomically [e.g., witha  Digital Automated Identification System (DAISY), using a special barcode].

Judicious application of genetic engineering to produce GM crops.

The concept of a green or red data book maintaining the list of endangered species of plants and animals can be very effective in knowing the status of particular species.

General awareness amongst common people can lead to effective implementation of the conservation strategy.

Creation of gene banks in the form of germplasm banks.

Adding financial flavor to the conservation in the form of recreation or a nature park can make the system economically self-sustaining.

Two convenient approaches for the conservation of biological diversity are in situ conservation and ex-site conservation.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation biodiverstiy conservation

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Insitu Conservation

Institute conservation means the conservation of living resources through their maintenance and upkeeping within natural ecosystems and habitats in which their natural ecosystems and habitats in which they occur like a system of protected areas such as national parks, sanctuaries, reserve forests, Biosphere reserves,s, and serval others.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation insitu converasation method

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation insitu conservation methods

Advantages Of In-Situ Conservation:

The flora and fauna live in natural habitats without human interference.

The life cycles of the organisms and their evolution progress in a natural way.

In-situ conservation provides the required green cover and associated benefits to the environment.

This is less expensive and easy to manage.

The interests of indigenous people are protected.

Risks Associated With In-Situ Conservation:

vents in the survival and reproduction of species.

Environmental uncertainty due to random & unpredictable changes in weather, food supply, the population of predators, etc.

Natural catastrophes like floods, fires, or droughts may occur at random intervals.

Genetic uncertainty or random changes in genetic makeup due to genetic drift or inbreeding alters the survival and reproductive probabilities of individuals.

Methods Of Conservation Of Biodiversity Class 10

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Ex-situ Conservation

The ex-situ conservation of plants and animals includes the conservation of plants and animals outside their normal habitat by perpetuating sample populations in Zoological Gardens, Botanical Gardens, and Cryopreservation.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation ex situ conservation methods

Advantages of ex-situ conservation:

It is extremely useful for the declining population of species.

Threatened species are bred in captivity and then released in their natural habitats.

Ex-situ centers offer the possibility of observing wild animals intimately, which is otherwise impossible.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Joint Forest Management (JFM)

It is the official and popular term in India describing the partnerships in forest movement involving both the state forest departments and local communities.

The policies and objectives of the Joint Forest Movement are detailed in the Indian comprehensive National Forest Policy of 1988 and the Joint Forest Movement Guidelines of 1990 of the Government of India.

Origin and development:

Joint Forest Management originated in West Bengal accidentally at the Arabari Forest Range in West Midnapore, near Midnapore town in 1971.

The major hardwood of Arabari is the sal tree, a commercially profitable forest crop.

Ajit Kumar Banerjee, a silviculturist, working for the Forest Department as the Divisional Forest Officer, was conducting trials that were constantly being disturbed by grazing and illegal harvesting done by the local population.

At that time there were no initiatives for sharing of forest resources between the Government and the locals, with the Government considering many of the locals as “thieves”.

The forest official, against the suggestions of his coworkers, sought out representatives of eleven local villages and negotiated the terms of a contract with an ad hoc Forest Protection Committee.

The initial program involved 612 families managing 12.7 square kilometers of forests classified as “degraded”. 25% of profits from the forests were shared with the villagers.

The experiment was successful and was expanded to other parts of the state in 1987. JFM is still in force at Arabari.

A few years later, Joint Forest Management was employed in the state of Haryana to prevent soil erosion and deforestation.

In 1977, villagers were persuaded that instead of grazing on erosion-prone hills, building small dams would help agricultural output in areas currently under cultivation. The program led to the reforestation of many hills in the state.

After the initial success in West Bengal and Haryana, the JFM schemes received national importance in the legislation of 1988 and were thrust into the Guidelines of 1990.

As of 2005, 27 states of the Indian Union had various JFM schemes with over 63,000 Forest Protection Committee’s involvement in the joint management of over 140,000 km2 of forested land.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation forest range office arabari range

Objectives:

Conservation of forests in a sustainable manner by the government along with the participation of the local community.

In return for their services to the forest, the communities get the benefit of various forest products like fruits, rubber, gum, medicines, etc.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Peoples Biodiversity Register (PBR)

The Biodiversity Board prepares the Biodiversity Registers for the local communities. Biodiversity registers are prepared with the help of the local people and hence referred to as the People’s Biodiversity Register (PBR).

Objectives:

Preparation of a Biodiversity Register is an attempt to realize biodiversity first at the Local Government level and then at the level of the states and the whole country.

Identification of biological resources and documentation are the prerequisites for the Register preparation, which can lead to new discoveries and development of new commercial products, patenting of such products, equitable distribution of benefits, if any, and through this, paving the way for a new economic order in the country through biodiversity conservation.

Utility of PBR:

PBR is not simply a register with names of species and their distribution in a given area.

It is a comprehensive database recording people’s traditional knowledge and insight into the status, uses, history, ongoing changes, and forces driving these changes on the biological diversity resources of their localities.

This provides information on the current utilization patterns of biodiversity and its economic benefits to the local communities.

The registers form baseline data for future management strategies required for the sustainable utilization of biodiversity in a decentralized manner.

Further, it helps equitable sharing of benefits arising out of the commercial utilization of biodiversity resources and knowledge of their uses.

The Biodiversity Register offers conservation, protection of IPR, and the traditional knowledge prevailing in rural communities.

Documentation:

People’s Biodiversity Registers (PBR) document folk knowledge of status, uses, history, ongoing changes and forces driving changes in biodiversity resources, gainers and losers in these processes, and people’s perceptions of how these resources should be managed.

A number of PBRs have been prepared in different parts of India beginning in 1995 through initiatives of NGOs and educational institutions working with local communities and village councils.

These attempts have been motivated by a desire to promote decentralized systems of management of natural resources and to create the basis for equitable sharing of benefits of commercial utilization of folk knowledge of uses of biodiversity.

The documents bring together important locality-specific information on biodiversity resources and the ecological processes affecting them.

They lead to the recognition of conservation-oriented local practices such as the protection of sacred groves. They help mobilize local communities to prudently manage local biodiversity resources in ways that would promote social justice.

It is, however, important to recognize that not all folk knowledge may be correct, nor all folk practices wise, and create systems of careful assessment of the material.

Methods Of Conservation Of Biodiversity Class 10

There are many encouraging signs globally, as well as within India, such as the coming force of the Convention on Biological Diversity, forces promoting decentralized democratic systems of governance, and institutions of co-management of natural resources.

which suggests that programs like PBR will have an important role to play in promoting conservation, sustainable use, and equitable sharing of benefits of biodiversity resources in the coming decades.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Conservation Of Some Major Animals Tiger (Panthera Tigris) Conservation

The main protection initiative:

Project Tiger’ by the National Tiger Conservation Authority of the Government of India.

Initiation:

This initiative was started in 1973 by the then Prime Minister Mrs. Indira Gandhi and has, to date, established more than 48 tiger reserves throughout the country.

Objectives:

To ensure the maintenance of a viable population of tigers in India for scientific, economic, aesthetic, cultural, and ecological values.

To preserve, for all times areas of biological importance as a national heritage for the benefit, education, and enjoyment of the people.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation tiger panthera tigris conservation

Measures taken:

Habitat improvement:

In order to protect these animals as much as possible, tiger reserves have been established on reclaimed land, where human development and inhabitation are forbidden.

As a result of this program and its efforts, the population of Bengal Tigers has increased from about 1200 in 1973 to an impressive 2900+ in 2018.

Addressing man-animal conflict & anti-poaching initiative:

Project Tiger has also established the Tiger Protection Force with the aim of catching poachers and stopping the killing.

This initiative has been instrumental in relocating about 200,000 villagers in rural areas so that they are no longer living within the natural habitat of the tigers.

This reduces the risk of tiger attacks on humans (which often leads to the killing of the tiger for the safety of the villagers).

Strengthening infrastructure within tiger reserves including water development.

Rehabilitation of traditional hunting tribes living in & around tiger reserves.

Development of buffer or fringe area landscape.

Providing support to states for staff development and capacity building.

Example:

Sundarban and Buxa Tiger Reserve, West Bengal; Bandipur Tiger Reserve, Karnataka; Kanha Tiger Reserve, Madhya Pradesh; Sariska Tiger Reserve, Rajasthan, etc.

Importance of Tiger Conservation:

Tiger is a symbol of wilderness and the well-being of the ecosystem. By conserving and saving tigers the entire wilderness ecosystem is conserved.

In nature, barring human beings and their domesticates, the rest of the ecosystem is wild. Hence conserving wilderness is important and crucial to maintaining the life support system.

So saving tigers amounts to saving the ecosystem which is crucial for man’s own survival.

Tigers play a pivotal role in the health of the ecosystem. Tigers constitute the top carnivores in the ecosystem and are at the apex of the food chain.

The removal of a top carnivore from an ecosystem can have an impact on the relative abundance of herbivore species within a guild. Along with other major carnivores as leopards, it acts as a control mechanism for herbivores.

The interdependency of living forms in a food chain is obvious as the wild tiger is dependent upon herbivores for its survival and that he maintains its population which in turn prevents the grasslands from being overgrazed.

The herbivores depend upon producers such as grasses, herbs, shrubs, algae, fungi, and large trees for survival and they in turn maintain a balance in vegetation by controlling the extent of vegetation or flora.

Birds survive on herbs, shrubs, and trees for fruits and nectar and in turn act as seed dispersal agents for them to spread the population of the floral elements in an ecosystem.

Thus all life forms including tigers are interlinked with each other in an ecosystem and their survival depends upon how intact the ecosystem is.

Top carnivores, tigers, have an important role ultimately in ecosystems. Thus, the preservation to play in the structuring of communities and of tigers becomes an important consideration.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Indian One-Horned Rhinoceros (Rhinoceros Unicornis) Conservation

Early Facts:

In 1910, all rhino hunting in India became prohibited. In 1984, five rhinos were relocated to Dudhwa National Park—four from the fields outside the Pabitora Wildlife Sanctuary and one from Goalpara.

The Indian rhinoceros was initially difficult to breed in captivity. The first recorded captive birth of a rhinoceros was in Kathmandu in 1826, but another successful birth did not occur for nearly 100 years.

In 1925, a rhino was born in Kolkata. No rhinoceros was successfully bred in Europe until 1956. On September 14, 1956, Rudra was born in Zoo Basel, Switzerland.

The Kaziranga National Park has the highest number of rhinos (2401) in India in 2015. Jaldapara in West Bengal has about the demise of other species of mammals, birds, insects, fish, and plants. Thus they play a vital role in the ecosystem.

When they browse, they keep the areas trimmed, making paths more accessible for smaller mammals. They also enrich the soil and help plants by spreading seeds through their dung.

Methods Of Conservation Of Biodiversity Class 10

Rhino-inhabited areas have about 20 times more grazing lawns than areas without rhinos. This affects not just the rhinos’ diet, but smaller grazing animals like zebra and antelope.

Thus the protection of the rhino population takes into account the protection of all other species interacting with the rhinos and those sharing the same habitat.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Crocodile Conservation

Protection Initiative:

In response to declining crocodilian populations, a crocodile conservation program, the UNDP/FAO Crocodile Breeding and Management Project, was launched in 1975 in cooperation with the Government of India and the State Governments.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation save the rhino visison

Indian Rhino Vision 2020:

Launched in 2005, Indian Rhino Vision 2020 is an ambitious effort to attain a wild population of at least 3000 greater one-horned rhinos spread over seven protected areas in Assam by the year 2020.

Measures taken:

Rhino translocation from overcrowded areas to other protected areas where they can breed,

Patrolling to foil poaching attempts,

Improved breeding techniques and monitoring methods,

Better habitat management.

Examples:

Kaziranga National Park, Manas National Park, Pabitora Wildlife Sanctuary, Assam; Jaldapara & Gorumara National Parks, West Bengal.

Rhinos as umbrella species:

Rhinos are an umbrella species. This means that their survival or demise directly impacts the survival or

A survey of the status of the three species of crocodiles present in India:

Gharial-(Gavialis gangeticus):

Found in rivers of North India, it is considered in danger of extinction due to habitat destruction, incidental catches in fishing nets, and poaching.

Estuarine crocodile (Crocodylus porosus):

Considered formerly common along shores and rivers, it has now become extinct in the States of Kerala, Tamil Nadu, and Andhra Pradesh. Small populations persist in deltaic areas of Odisha, the Sunderbans (West Bengal), and the Andamans.

Mugger (Crocodylus palustris):

Formerly widespread and abundant, it is considered very depleted in numbers and most endangered in comparison to the other two species. They are the most common variety in India and range between 3500-4000 in India in 2019.

Primary Project Aims:

To boost reproductive output by a collection of wild-laid eggs with subsequent incubation and rearing of young until attainment of a size (less vulnerable to predation) suitable for release in the wild.

To locate, establish and manage a series of crocodile rehabilitation centers and sanctuaries in suitable habitats.

To promote captive breeding.

To take up research on egg collection, incubation, hatching, rearing, food conservation, habitat features, behavioral biology, etc.

To involve local people in the project intimately.

Methods Of Conservation Of Biodiversity Class 10

Example:

The greatest achievement has been the re-establishment of viable gharial breeding populations in Chambal and Satkoshia Gorge sanctuaries and the setting up of the Crocodile Breeding and Management Training Institute, Hyderabad.

Crocodile project sites in Odisha:

Bhitarkanika Sanctuary, Ramatirtha Centre, Tikarpara Centre, and Nandankanan Zoo.

Importance of crocodiles:

Though crocodiles are vicious, cold-blooded, and ugly, yet in an ecological perspective, crocodiles are an important group of organisms as they are the keystone species.

Young crocodiles are a food source for countless animals like fish, mammals, birds, snakes, crabs, etc. When they get bigger, the crocodiles in turn regulate the population of other animals.

Being the top predator, it controls the distribution and population of a large number of prey species. This allows an increase in biodiversity.

Crocodiles create habitats through burrowing and nest building. They create aquatic habitats so that plants and animals will have water during the dry seasons.

During the wet seasons, animals that live on land will have a place to survive.

Thus, it is important to conserve crocodiles as their presence would enable other species to survive as well.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation crocodile

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Red Panda (Ailurus fulgens) Conservation

Introduction:

The highly threatened Red Panda is found in four states in India (Sikkim, West Bengal, Meghalaya, and Arunachal Pradesh).

Recent surveys have shown that habitat degradation (due to the need for fuel and shifting agricultural practices), killing by dogs, hunting, and extinction in some areas are the probable causes of its decline.

Research and monitoring need to be carried out as a matter of urgency to assess the population status so that focused conservation efforts can be initiated to secure and improve the present habitat conditions and reduce the immediate threats.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation red panda

The aims of conservation are as follows:

To ascertain the present status of the Red Panda in the Kangchendozonga Landscape and the Western Arunachal landscape through research and updating of distribution map, habitat maps vis-a-vis maps of the human population, and agricultural expansion.

To evaluate the extent of the identified threats and suitable mitigation measures including control of dogs, poaching and trapping (for pets), threat of proposed highway including lobbying, the raising of local awareness, etc.

To ensure effective management interventions for the protection of red pandas in protected areas and community-conserved areas.

Threats To Biodiversity Class 10 Life Science

Including increasing the capacity of forest department staff, reduction in fuelwood extraction, official recognition of conservation areas, workshops for relevant stakeholders, training in community-based tourism activities, red panda re-introduction programs, etc.

Examples:

India has 20 protected areas with known or possible red panda populations in Sikkim, Arunachal Pradesh and West Bengal such as Singalila & Khangchendzonga National Parks in Sikkim and Namdhapa National Park in Arunachal Pradesh.

Ecological Importance of Red Panda Conservation:

Saving red pandas is important because they are an ambassador for clean air and water for approximately 500 million people.

The forests where red panda live are the lungs of South Asia and if these forests are intact and function properly, then we can ensure a healthy life for the people, animals, and plants of South Asia.

The mountain chains of the Eastern Himalayas and parts of south-western China, where red pandas are found, are the origin of South Asia’s three largest rivers, the Brahmaputra, Ganges and Yangtse, which provide water for half of China, northern and northwestern India, Nepal, Tibet Autonomous Region of China, Bhutan, and Myanmar.

According to conservation biologists, red pandas are an indicator of the overall health of their home, the Eastern Himalayan Broadleaf Forest, which is the central link in the Himalayan Hotspot.

Also, protecting the red panda is important to the preservation of the World’s natural heritage and global biodiversity because it is the only species of its kind in the world.

It is unique in its behavior and specialized in its habitat requirements, as well as the fact that they have no close living relatives. They are a living relict of times past.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Asiatic Lion (Panthera Leo Persica) Conservation

Introduction:

Conservation efforts for the Asiatic Lion were made for the first time in the year 1910.

The Nawab of Junagadh imposed a ban on the hunting of lions within the boundaries of his province in 1879. The ban was continued even when India gained independence in 1947.

In the 1960s and 1970s, Gir forest, the home of the last surviving Indian Lions, was converted into a National Park and Sanctuary.

Presently Kuno Project or the Asiatic Lion Reintroduction Project is being undertaken to create viable genetic resources and to avoid the chance of extinction at Gir.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation lion

Under the Kuno project, a wildlife Sanctuary, known as the Kuno Wildlife Sanctuary, is being developed in Madhya Pradesh to create a near-natural habitat for the lions.

The aim behind the establishment of the sanctuary is to relocate the excess population of lions in Gir. The number was around 600 in 2018.

The framework of the project:

Shifting of villages out of the lion reintroduction site and improvement of wild habitat.

Fencing off of the sanctuary.

Eco-development, research, and monitoring.

Example:

Gir National Park, Gujarat; Kuno- Palpur Wildlife Sanctuary, Madhya Pradesh

Importance of lion conservation:

Lions play a key role in the food chain by helping to control the herbivore population. If the herbivore population is not regulated, the increase in competition among them would cause some to go extinct and thus this will reduce biodiversity.

The lions have a reputation for being the ‘chief’ predator of their habitat as they are known to kill even large herbivores such as elephants.

Threats To Biodiversity Class 10 Life Science

Lions prey mainly on herd animals.

Nature comes to play as lions take down the weakest of the herd. This keeps the herd population resilient and healthy. If lions did not exist, there would be a symbiotic relationship between parasites and herd animals.

This way, parasites could increase and spread throughout the herd, resulting in fewer healthy animals.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. _____________ Describes the diversity of life.
Answer: Biodiversity

Question 2. _____________diversity is defined as the variation of genes within a particular species.
Answer: Genetic

Question 3. Sarpagandha is a_____________ plant.
Answer: Medicinal

Question 4. Gums are produced from_____________ tree.
Answer: Acacia

Question 5. Bombyx morifeed on _____________plants.
Answer: Mulberry

Question 6. _____________diversity refers to the expression of diversity between habitats.
Answer: Beta

Question 7. Chemically, aragonite of pearl is_____________ .
Answer: CaCO3

Question 8. Globally_____________ there are biodiversity hotspots.
Answer: 35

Question 9. In India, the lion-tailed macaque is found in_____________.
Answer: Western Ghats

Biodiversity And Conservation Class 10 MCQs

Question 10. Habitat destruction is the major cause of loss of_____________
Answer: Biodiversity

Question 11. In India,_____________ water hyacinth is a plant species.
Answer: Exotic

Question 12. _____________has identified Sundarban as World heritage site.
Answer: UNESCO

Question 13. Conservation in the biosphere is an example of _____________ conservation.
Answer: in-situ

Question 14. For cryopreservation of cells and tissues, liquid_____________ is used.
Answer: Nitrogen

Question 15. JFM, in India, originated at_____________ forest in West Bengal.
Answer: Arabari

Question 16. PBR stands for People’s Biodiversity _____________.
Answer: Register

Question 17. _____________ is conserved in Jaldapara of West Bengal.
Answer: Rhinoceros

Question 18. Crocodile Breeding and Management Training Institute is situated at_____________.
Answer: Hyderabad

Question 19. In India, Red Panda is conserved in Sikkim,_____________, Meghalaya, and Arunachal Pradesh.
Answer: West Bengal

Question 20. _____________forest is the home of Indian lions.
Answer: Gir

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Write True Or False

Question 1. Biodiversity includes species diversity, ecosystem diversity, and evolutionary diversity.
Answer: False

Question 2. Genetic diversity refers to the heritable variations.
Answer: True

Question 3. Ipecac is a medicinal plant.
Answer: True

Question 4. The rainfall of a particular place is controlled by an afforestation program.
Answer: True

Question 5. The more equal species are in proportion to each other, the lesser the evenness of the site.
Answer: False

Question 6. The Pashmina wool of West Bengal is world-famous.
Answer: False

Question 7. Some oysters can produce pearls.
Answer: True

Question 8. There are 14 biodiversity hotspots in India
Answer: False

Question 9. The lion-tailed macaque is an endemic species of Sundaland.
Answer: False

Question 10. Crocodiles is a keystone species in the ecosystem.
Answer: True

Biodiversity And Conservation Class 10 MCQs

Question 11. Germplasm bank is for ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.
Answer: True

Question 12. After West Bengal, JFM was introduced in Haryana.
Answer: True

Question 13. PBR is the attendance register for animals.
Answer: False

Question 14. Buxa Tiger Reserve is situated in Himachal Pradesh.
Answer: False

Question 15. Crocodylus porosus is an estuarine species.
Answer: True

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Match The Column

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation match the following
Answer: 1-E,2-C,3-B,4-A

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation match the following 1
Answer: 1-D,2-A,3-E,4-B

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation match the following 2
Answer: 1-C,2-D,3-A,4-B

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation match the following 4
Answer: 1-D,2-C,3-E,4-B

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is the term used to denote the richness and evenness of individuals within a habitat unit?
Answer: Alpha diversity.

Question 2. Name a type of ecosystem.
Answer: Grassland/ aquatic/ desert ecosystem.

Question 3. What is species diversity?
Answer: It is the variety of different species in a given area.

Question 4. Name two medicinal plants.
Answer: Basak and Tulsi.

Question 5. Name two plants used for furniture building.
Answer: Teak and Sal.

Question 6. Which plant can produce resin?
Answer: Pinus can produce resin.

Question 7. State two important products of Apis.
Answer: Honey and wax.

Question 8. Give the scientific name of pearl oyster.
Answer: Pinctada fucata.

Question 9. How many biodiversity hotspots are there all over the world?
Answer: There are 35 hotspots.

Question 10. How many biodiversity hotspots are there in India?
Answer: There are 4 hotspots.

Biodiversity And Conservation Class 10 MCQs

Question 11. Name an exotic plant species found in Indian water.
Answer: Water hyacinth.

Question 12. Give two examples of natural calamities.
Answer: Flood and drought.

Question 13. Give the scientific name of the Sundari tree.
Answer: Heritera littorals.

Question 14. What type of ecosystem is Sundarban?
Answer: Mangrove ecosystem.

Question 15. Name two places of in-situ conservation of biodiversity.
Answer: National park and sanctuary.

Question 16. Name two places of ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.
Answer: Zoological garden and botanical garden.

Question 17. Write the full form of JFM.
Answer: Joint Forest Management.

Question 18. Where did JFM originate in India?
Answer: At the Arabari forest of West Midnapore, West Bengal.

Question 19. Write the full form of PBR.
Answer: People’s Biodiversity Register.

Question 20. In which year was ‘Project Tiger’ started in India?
Answer: In 1973.

Question 21. Give the scientific name of Gharial.
Answer: Gavialis gangeticus.

Question 22. Give the scientific name of the one-horned rhinoceros.
Answer: Rhinoceros unicornis.

Question 23. Where is the home of Indian lions?
Answer: Gir Forest, Gujarat

Question 24. What do you mean by extractive reserves?
Answer: Extractive reserves are the areas that allow the local people to harvest natural forest products at a rate that does not destroy the ecosystem.

Question 25. Which ecosystem has the highest biodiversity?
Answer: Coral reef biodiversity.

Biodiversity And Conservation Class 10 MCQs

Question 26. Which Indian region is considered the cradle of speciation?
Answer: Eastern Himalayas.

Question 27. What is a latitudinal gradient?
Answer: It is a diversity index used to show the distribution of flora and fauna from the poles to the tropics.

Question 28. What is co-extinction?
Answer: It is the simultaneous extinction of multiple species where one is dependent on another species.

Example: Extinction of a host fish with parasites inside.

Question 29. When is an International Day of Biodiversity celebrated?
Answer: 22nd May of every year.

Question 30. A tropical lake ecosystem site contains 11 varieties of species. What is the alpha diversity scale of the site?
Answer: Alpha (α) diversity of the site is 11.

Question 31. A pair of related terms is given below. Based on the relationship of the first pair, write the suitable word in the gap of the second pair:
Answer:

Reserve forest:

in-situ conservation method::Botanical garden: Ex-situ conservation method

Beta diversity:

Expression of diversity between habitats::Diversity of habitats within a landscape Gamma diversity

Question 32. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out that term and write it.
Answer: Biosphere reserve, in-situ conservation, sanctuary, national park In-situ conservation

Sundaland, Western Ghats & Srilanka, Biodiversity hotspots, Eastern Himalayas Biodiversity Hotspots

Question 33. Name the different levels of biodiversity.
Answer: Genetic diversity, Species diversity, and Community/ecosystem/habitat diversity.

Question 34. Choose the odd one and write it:
Answer: The passenger pigeon, Dodo, snow leopard, woolly mammoth. Snow leopard since it is a vulnerable animal while the other ones are extinct animals.

Gene bank, sanctuary, national park, reserve forest. Gene bank since it is an ex-situ conservation method while the other three are in-situ conservation methods.

Question 35. Which is the most common crocodile species found in India?
Answer: The Mugger crocodile (Crocodylus palustris).

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic D Biodiversity And Conservation Short Answer Type Questions With Answers

Question 1. What is meant by genetic diversity?
Two environments have a total of 13 species: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, l, J, K, L, and M.

Environment#1 contains 10 species: A to J.
Environment#2 contains 6 species: H to M.
Calculate the beta diversity of the two environments.

Answer:

Genetic diversity

Genetic diversity is the total number of genetic characteristics in the genetic makeup of a species, for example, between varieties of crops and breeds of livestock.

It refers to the heritable variation. A species having more genetic diversity can adapt better to the change in environmental conditions. Hence genetic diversity plays an important role in the survival and adaptability of a species.

Any change in the environment natural or human affects genetic diversity. Practices like harvesting, aquaculture, degradation of habitats, and inbreeding alter the sum of available genes affecting the capacity of tolerance.

The loss of genetic diversity is difficult to see or measure but the loss within a species can result in the loss of useful and desirable traits, eg. resistance to parasites.

Reduced diversity also eliminates options to use untapped resources for food production, industry, and medicine.

Calculation of β-diversity:

Number of species in environment # 1:10 (A to J)
Number of species in environment # 2:6 (H to M)
Number of common species in both environments : 3(H to J)

∴β – diversity = (H1- H1 & 2) + (H2 – H1 & 2)
= (10-3)+ (6-3)
= 7 + 3 = 10

That is, 10 species are either only in Environment #1 or only in Environment #2

Question 2. Explain the terms- species richness and species evenness.
Answer:

Richness:

The number of groups of genetically or functionally related individuals in an ecological community is referred to as richness.

In most vegetation surveys, richness is expressed as the number of species and is usually called species richness. It is simply a count of species and does not take into account the relative abundances.

For example, if we have two plots of land, A and B, and plot A has 24 species of plants while plot B has 84 species of plants, then plot B has higher species richness.

Evenness:

It refers to the Proportions of species or functional groups present on a site. The more equal species are in proportion to each other, the greater the evenness of the site.

A site with low evenness indicates that a few species dominate the site. Species evenness ranges from 0 to 1, with zero signifying no evenness and one, complete evenness.

Two habitats having the same number of species have the same species richness. On the other hand, the first may have a high species evenness and the second one a low evenness or vice versa.

In the example above, if the majority of the plants in plot B with 84 different types of species all come from one or two different species, this plot would have low species evenness compared to the plot A.

Threats To Biodiversity Class 10 Life Science

Question 3. How does biodiversity influence ecological balance?
Answer:

Ecological balance is a state of dynamic equilibrium within a community of organisms in which genetic, species and ecosystem diversity remain relatively stable and subject to gradual changes through natural succession.

The diversity of genes and species in ecological communities affects the functioning of the communities.

In agroecosystems, biodiversity performs a variety of ecological services beyond the production of food, including recycling of nutrients, regulation of microclimate & local hydrological processes, suppression of undesirable organisms, and detoxification of noxious chemicals.

More biologically diverse communities appear to be more productive than less diverse communities, and they also appear to be more stable in the face of perturbations.

Species diversity keeps the ecosystem running smoothly. For example, predators keep the population of mice under control, insects pollinate flowers and worms decompose leaf litter.

When a habitat becomes too scarce and the species that live there become vulnerable, the ecosystem falls out of equilibrium, and biodiversity is threatened.

Changes in biotic interactions among species—predation, parasitism, competition, etc., can lead to disproportionate and irreversible alterations of ecosystem processes.

Many changes in ecosystem services are brought about by the removal or introduction of organisms in ecosystems that disrupt biotic interactions.

For example, the ecosystem services provided by the coral reefs are dependent on a single key biotic interaction-the symbiosis with algae.

Biodiversity helps to preserve nature. Losing biodiversity can destroy a farmland’s ability to bounce back from disasters like fires and droughts.

Sand binders help to protect the seashore, trees growing along the slope of the hill prevent landslides, and mangrove vegetation near the seashore helps to protect the hinterland from high winds and storms.

Thus biodiversity and ecological balance are greatly interrelated.

Question 4. State the role of biodiversity in food production.
Answer:

Biodiversity Provides a High Variety Of Food:

crops, livestock, forestry, and fish, which are important food sources for the human species.

A wide range of species provides many thousands of food products, such as fruits, vegetables, nuts, meat, and food additives in the form of food colorings, flavorings, and preservatives, through agriculture and from the harvest of natural populations.

Question 5. What are the characteristics of biodiversity hotspots?
Answer:

To qualify as a biodiversity hotspot, a region must meet two strict criteria:

1. It must have at least 1,500 vascular plants as endemics — which is to say, it must have a high percentage of plant life found nowhere else on the planet.

A hotspot, in other/words, is irreplaceable.

2. It must have 30% or less of its original natural vegetation. In other words, it must have an appreciable threat perception of extinction.

Question 6. What are the biodiversity hotspots of India?
Answer:

India hosts 4 biodiversity hotspots:

  1. The Western Ghats and Srilanka
  2. The eastern Himalayas (northeastern hilly states)
  3. The indo-Burma region and
  4. The Sundaland or the Sundaic region (including the islands of Borneo and Sumatra.)

Question 7. Write the territories of the Sundaland biodiversity hotspot.
Answer:

The territories of the Sundaland biodiversity hotspot

Sundaland (also called Sundaic region) is a biogeographical region of southeastern Asia that includes the Nicobar group of Islands, Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Brunei, and the Philippines.

This biodiversity hotspot is dominated by two of the largest islands in the world, Borneo and Sumatra. More than a million years ago, the islands of Sundaland were connected to mainland Asia.

As sea levels rose during the Pleistocene, this connection periodically disappeared, eventually leading to the current isolation of the islands.

Question 8. Why exotic species are considered a threat to biodiversity?
Answer:

According to the World Conservation Union, invasive alien species are the second most significant threat to biodiversity, after habitat loss.

In their new ecosystems, invasive alien species become predators, competitors, parasites, hybridizers, and diseases of native and domesticated plants and animals and they, cause the disappearance of native species through competition in a changed biotic interactive environment.

Three Common Examples Of Such Interactions Are Mentioned Below:

Water hyacinths clog rivers and lakes and threaten the survival of many aquatic species in several tropical countries including India.

Lantana camara has invaded many forest lands in various parts of India and offered competition to the native species of plants.

Nile perch, an exotic predatory fish introduced into Lake Victoria of South Africa, threatened the entire ecosystem of the lake by eliminating several native species of small Cichlid fish species that were endemic to this freshwater aquatic ecosystem.

Question 9. What is habitat destruction?
Answer:

Habitat destruction

A habitat is an ecological or environmental area where particular species of plants, animals, or other organisms live. Examples of habitats include forests, grasslands, marshes, estuaries, reefs, bays, the sea bed, etc.

This is the living area necessary for an ecosystem to remain healthy. Destruction means to change something so much that it can no longer exist as it once was.

So, when we put the two definitions together we get habitat + destruction = a home to species that have been changed to the point it no longer exist.

Habitat destruction occurs when enough change has happened to an area that can no longer support natural wildlife. This change can be in many forms, including destruction, fragmentation, and degradation.

But no matter how it happens, it reduces or destroys biodiversity. Apart from decreasing the range of certain organism populations, this can also decrease genetic diversity.

Habitat destruction by human activity is mainly to harvest natural resources for industrial production and urbanization.

Other important causes of habitat destruction are agriculture, mining, logging, trawling, etc.

One of the most famous examples of habitat destruction-related issues is the impact upon China’s giant panda, once found across the nation but now it is only found in fragmented and isolated regions in the southwest of the country as a result of widespread deforestation in the 20th century.

Threats To Biodiversity Class 10 Life Science

Question 10. What is in-situ conservation of biodiversity?
Answer:

On-situ conservation of biodiversity

In-situ conservation is on-site conservation or the conservation of genetic resources in natural populations of plant or animal species, such as forest genetic resources in natural populations of tree species.

It is the process of protecting an endangered plant or animal species in its natural habitat, either by protecting or cleaning up the habitat itself or by defending the species from predators.

It is applied to the conservation of agricultural biodiversity in agroforestry by farmers, especially those using unconventional farming practices.

In-situ conservation is being done by declaring the area as a protected area in the form of a National Park, sanctuary, reserve forest, or biosphere reserve.

Question 11. What are the advantages of in-situ conservation?
Answer:

The advantages of in-situ conservation

  1. The flora and fauna live in natural habitats without human interference.
  2. The life cycles of the organisms and their evolution progress in a natural way.
  3. In-situ conservation provides the required green cover and its associated benefits to our environment.
  4. It is less expensive and easy to manage.
  5. The interests of the indigenous people are also protected.

Question 12. What is ex-situ conservation of biodiversity?
Answer:

Ex-situ conservation

Ex-situ conservation is the preservation of components of biological diversity outside their natural habitats.

This involves the conservation of genetic resources, as well as wild and cultivated species, and draws on a diverse body of techniques and facilities.

Such strategies include the establishment of botanical gardens, zoos, conservation strands and genes, pollen seeds, seedlings, tissue culture, DNA banks, and cryopreservation.

Question 13. What are the advantages of ex-situ conservation?
Answer:

The advantages of ex-situ conservation

  1. It is useful for the declining population of species.
  2. Endangered animals on the verge of extinction are successfully bred.
  3. Threatened species are bred in captivity and then released in their natural habitats.
  4. Ex-situ centers offer the possibility of observing wild animals, which is otherwise not possible.
  5. It is extremely useful for conducting research and scientific work on different species.

Question 14. What is ecotourism?
Answer:

Ecotourism

Ecotourism is environmentally responsible travel to natural areas, to enjoy and appreciate nature (and accompanying cultural features, both past and present) that promote conservation.

It should have a low visitor impact and provide for beneficially active socio-economic involvement of local people. Most tourism in natural areas today is not ecotourism and is not, therefore, sustainable.

Ecotourism is distinguished by its emphasis on conservation, education, traveler responsibility, and active community participation.

Several famous ecotourism spots of our country are Sunderban Biosphere Reserve, West Bengal; Bandipur National Park, Karnataka; Chilika Lake, Orissa; Kaziranga National Park, Assam, etc.

Question 15. What are endemic species?
Answer:

Endemic species

A species is endemic if it only occurs within a limited, relatively small area, such as a single island or archipelago, mountain range, or forest.

Among primates, examples include all of the lemur species that are only found on the island of Madagascar. The lemur known as Berthe’s mouse lemur, is found only in the Kirindy forest on the island’s west coast.

Queen Alexandra’s birdwing is another example.

Found only in Papua New Guinea, it is the largest butterfly in the world. Its caterpillars rely on a single plant species for food-one that is seriously threatened by the destruction of the rainforests.

Question 16. Does species diversity follow any pattern?
Answer:

The diversity of species is lowest at the poles and increases towards the equator, with deserts being the obvious exception.

Tropical rainforests and coral reefs are among the planet’s richest and most diverse ecosystems. The areas with the greatest diversity of plant life are the tropical Andes and south-eastern Asia.

The Amazon basin, Madagascar, and parts of southern and central Africa also compare favorably. The same also holds true for animal life as well.

In Amazonas state in Brazil, 95 different species of ants have been found on a single tree as compared to around 50 species of ants found throughout the entire UK.

Colombia, located near the equator, has nearly 1400 species of birds, New York at 41°N has 105 species, and Greenland at 71°N has 56 species only.

The decrease in the species diversity from the equator towards the pole is termed as a latitudinal gradient in biodiversity.

The three hypotheses behind the latitudinal gradient are:

Solar Energy:

The presence of more solar energy contributes to more productivity and in turn, more diversity.

Tropical Environment:

It is more constant, less seasonal, and more predictable which caters to greater species diversity.

Speciation:

The tropical latitudes have remained undisturbed for millions of years allowing more diversification to happen as compared to temperate regions that had frequent glaciations in the past.

Question 17. Name three critically endangered animal species found in biodiversity hotspots of India.
Answer:

Namadhapa flying squirrel, Orange necked Patridge (bird), and Annamite striped rabbit.

Threats To Biodiversity Class 10 Life Science

Question 18. What are the Red Data Book and Green Data Book?
Answer:

Red Data Book and Green Data Book

The world’s most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of biological status is published by IUCN as the Red Data Book.

The IUCN aims to re-evaluate the data of species every five years if possible or at least every ten years.

Species are classified by the IUCN Red Book into nine groups, specified through criteria such as rate of decline, population size, geographic distribution, and distribution fragmentation.

The book in which communities of rare plants grown in protected areas or conservation of biodiversity are listed is termed a Green Data Book.

Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. ____________ is a biosphere reserve located in WestBengal.
Answer: Sunderban

Question 2. The name of one exotic species that affects the local biodiversity is____________.
Answer: Water hyacinth

Threats To Biodiversity Class 10 Life Science

Question 3. ____________ is derived from the root of the Sarpagandha plant which is used as medicine for lowering high blood pressure.
Answer: Rauwolfia serpentina

Question 4. The ex-situ conservation by keeping sample seeds in liquid nitrogen at a temperature of – 196°C is called ____________.
Answer: Cryopreservation.

Write True or False

Question 1. One-horned rhinoceros is conserved at Manas National Park of West Bengal.
Answer: False

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out that term and write it: Embryo, Meristematic tissue, Seed, Cryo preservation
Answer: Cryopreservation.

Question 2. Overall knowledge regarding local biological resources, PBR, Traditional belief regarding local biological resources, and Sustainable use of local biological resources.
Answer: PBR

Question 3. Write the name of the cause of the latest concern regarding the environment of SunderbAnswer: 
Answer: Erosion of forested islands.

Question 3. Name one endangered animal conserved atSingalila National Park.
Answer: Red Panda.

Question 4. In which type of in situ conservation practice, the diversity, culture, and lifestyle of humans is preserved along with microorganisms, wild animals, and wild plants?
Answer: Biosphere reserve.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment And Human Population

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic C Environment And Human Population

Introduction to the concept of population:

The population consists of all the individuals of a species within a given area. At present the world population has reached 7.5 billion.
The three main factors that control population growth are natality (birth rate), mortality (death rate), and survivorship.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment And Human Population

Natality (birth rate):

It is the new young ones produced in a specific period.

Mortality (death rate):

It is the number of deaths per unit of time in an area.

Survivorship:

It is the percentage of individuals living at various ages.

The age distribution determines the relative proportion of individuals of different age groups in a population.

A population has 3 ecological age groups:

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

Pre-reproductive, reproductive, and Post-reproductive.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

The proportions of these three age groups determine whether the population is growing or mature (stable) or diminishing.
The growth rate of the population is the increase in the number of individuals in a population in a specific period. Mathematically,

\(\begin{aligned}
\text { growth rate } & =\frac{\text { No. of birth }(b)-\text { No.of death }(\mathrm{d})}{\text { time interval } \times \text { Average population }} \\
& =\frac{\Delta n}{t \times P} \text { where } \Delta \mathrm{n}=(\mathrm{b}-\mathrm{d}) \text { and } \mathrm{t}=\text { time }
\end{aligned}\)

Fewer than 800 million people populated the earth in the mid-18th. Century.

Today, barely 250 years later, we are more than 7.5 billion and will continue growing until 2050.

The historical growth of the world population is depicted in

The great increase in human numbers resulting from increased survival and exponential population growth is known as population explosion.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic C Environment And Human Population bllions years garph

In the history of human beings, the birth and death rates have always been able to balance each other and maintain a population growth rate that is sustainable.

With growing advances in technology in past years, the growth of the population has boomed and has turned into a population explosion or overpopulation.

Overpopulation is an undesirable condition where the existing human population exceeds the carrying capacity of the earth.

Overpopulation will place great demands on resources and land, leading to widespread environmental issues in addition to impacting global economies and standards of living.

Most developed economies currently consume resources much faster than they can generate.

On the other hand, most developing countries with rapid population growth face the urgent need to improve living standards.

Environment And Human Population Class 10

Thus it is putting tremendous pressure upon natural resources to meet the present needs and destroying resources needed for the future.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic C Environment And Human Population Problems Of An Ever-Increasing Population

The population is an important source of development, yet it is a major source of environmental degradation when it exceeds the threshold limits of the support systems.

Unless the relationship between the multiplying population and the life support system can be stabilized, development programs, however innovative they may be, are not likely to yield desired results.

Population impacts on the environment are primarily through the use of natural resources and production of wastes and are associated with environmental stresses like loss of biodiversity, air and water pollution, and increased pressure on arable land.

Human population issues are extremely important when it comes to our way of life and our future on this planet.

Some notable problems are-

Over-exploitation and depletion of natural resources:

Natural resources are those things that were formed from the biotic and abiotic factors in the atmosphere, and which are used by man for various purposes.

Natural resources are of two types-renewable resources (they can be made again and again according to the use of trees, paper, food crops, etc.) and non-renewable resources (they can’t be made once they are used up, metals, petrol, natural gas, coal, etc.).

Over-exploitation refers to harvesting a natural resource to the point of diminishing returns and destruction.

The term applies to natural resources such as:

wild medicinal plants, grazing pastures, game animals, fish stocks, forests, and water aquifers.

Over-exploitation can lead to resource destruction, including extinction. Due to the large increase in human population and due to the technological revolution, various natural resources are being consumed at an alarming rate.

In order to fulfill the food requirements of a large population, more and more land is being brought under cultivation, and more irrigation facilities are created through the construction of dams.

When harvesting exceeds the reproduction of plant and animal species, that poses a major threat to biodiversity. It results in an enhanced rate of desertification and rapid degradation of agricultural lands.

In order to increase the yield of crops, fertilizers, and pesticides are being used extensively. These chemicals thus enter the food chain at an enhanced rate and create imbalances in the environment.

The major causes behind the depletion of natural resources are over-consumption due to overpopulation, deforestation, extensive mining, technological and industrial development, erosion and pollution, and contamination of resources.

Deforestation and loss of ecosystem:

Deforestation is the destruction or clearing of forested lands, usually for the purposes of expanding agricultural land or for timber harvesting.

When the process is conducted by clear-cutting (removal of most or all of the canopy tree growth, leaving few or no life or
dead trees standing) or when mass forest burning occurs, significant losses of habitat and biodiversity may result, including the erosion of biological community structure and the extinction of species.

Forests are complex ecosystems that affect almost every species on the planet. According to National Geographic, 80% of the world’s plants and animals live in forests and many cannot live elsewhere.

When they are degraded, it can set off a devastating chain of events both locally and around the world.

The adverse environmental impacts associated with large-scale deforestation can include significant changes in ecological, hydrological, and climatic processes at local and regional levels.

Environment And Human Population Class 10

The ecological consequences include habitat loss and habitat fragmentation and adverse changes in local species richness and biodiversity.

Many endangered plants and animals live only in a certain kind of forest habitat. Those species can be lost entirely or can become extinct in the wild very easily.

Shrinking of agricultural land:

Shrinking agricultural fields is one of the biggest challenges for making food available to the world population. Cultivable land continues to shrink.

The decrease is mainly due to the diversion of cultivable land for construction, industries, and other development activities.

The continual plowing of fields, combined with heavy use of fertilizers, has degraded soil across the world with erosion occurring at a pace of up to 100 times greater than the rate of soil formation.

It may not pose an immediate problem for the nation’s food security but its long-term effect could be disastrous with a country needing more and more foodgrains to support its growing population.

A report from the agriculture ministry of India shows that as many as 20 states reported a decrease in cultivable land to the extent of 790,000 hectares in four years from 2007-08 to 2010-11.

Shortage of freshwater:

Though water covers 70% of our planet, however, freshwater the stuff we drink, bathe in, and irrigate our farm fields with is incredibly rare.

Only 3% of the world’s water is freshwater, and two-thirds of that is tucked away in frozen glaciers or otherwise unavailable for our use.

As a result, some 1.1 billion people worldwide lack access to water, and a total of 2.7 billion find water scarce for at least one month of the year.

Inadequate sanitation is also a problem for 2.4 billion people as a consequence they are exposed to diseases, such as cholera and typhoid fever, and other water-borne illnesses.

Two million people, mostly children, die each year from diarrheal diseases alone.

Many of the water systems that keep ecosystems thriving and feed a growing human population have become stressed. Rivers, lakes, and aquifers are drying up or becoming too polluted to use.

More than half the world’s wetlands have disappeared. Agriculture consumes more water than any other source and wastes much of that through inefficiencies.

Climate change is altering patterns of weather and water around the world, causing shortages and droughts in some areas and floods in others.

The causes of global water shortage may be summarised as pollution, overuse due to overpopulation, wastage, climate change, destruction of water catchment areas, etc.

Overpopulation will strain current water resources to their limits, cause an increase In water pollution and lead to an increase In civil and international conflicts over existing water supplies.

At the current consumption rate, this situation will only get worse. By 2025, two-thirds of the world’s population may face water shortages.

Coupled with that, increasingly high demand for water will also affect food production in water-stressed areas. Thus, ecosystems around the world will suffer even more.

Air and water pollution: Air and water are the two most important abiotic components of the environment.

Air pollution can be natural or man-made, but it’s the man-made pollutants that are the most destructive.

Major man-made air pollutants are:

greenhouse gases that contribute to global warming and the destruction of the ozone layer. Carbon dioxide is one of the worst air pollutants; it’s mainly emitted from power plants, cars, planes, and other vehicles and comes from the burning of fossil fuels.

  1. Particulate matters
  2. SOX and NOX
  3. CFCs and other hydrocarbons.

Air pollution has been linked to health problems like asthma and lung disease, as well as the deterioration of the ozone layer (which protects us from harmful UV rays), the warming of the earth which may destroy the habitats of many animals, photochemical smog, fog and add rain.

If water is cloudy, smelly and has garbage floating In It, then It’s easy to know that It’s polluted, but clear and clean-looking water can be polluted as well with toxic chemicals.

Polluted waters are not safe to drink or bathe In and can cause Illness after several years of exposure.

Humans create water pollution by adding chemicals and oils to the water from factories, mining, oil spills from commercial tankers, throwing garbage Into open waters from boats or onshore, and because of untreated sewage and agricultural pollution.

Severe water pollution shall result In:

The abundance of microbes, waterborne diseases, creation of Oxygen deficient aquatic systems, algal bloom, accelerated eutrophication, and Increase of toxic elements In water bodies.

Green House Effect And Global Warming:

The major greenhouse gases are carbon dioxide, methane, chlorofluorocarbons, nitrous oxide, and water vapor.

The rising concentration of these gases due to man-made reasons Is responsible for a noticeable rise In the mean global temperatures.

In the troposphere, greenhouse gases provide an effective thermal Insulation while In the stratosphere many of these gases are responsible for causing ozone depletion.

The Consequences Of Global Warming Are:

climate change, rapid rise In mean sea level, submerging of largescale low-lying areas, unprecedented changes In wind and precipitation patterns, wastage of freshwater reserves, decline In agriculture, and losses of genetic resources on a large scale.

Destruction of wetlands and its consequences:

A wetland Is a land area that Is saturated with water, either permanently or seasonally.

Examples: lakes, ponds, streams, estuaries, lagoons, bogs, swamps, etc.

Keeping pace with population overgrowth, and a rapid rise in infrastructure development, agriculture, industry, and household consumption are major causes of degradation and destruction of wetlands.

The destruction of wetlands is a concern because they are some of the most productive habitats on the planet,

Wetlands are critical to our biodiversity since wetlands act as the biological “kidneys” of the landscape by filtering out any water that would otherwise directly run into a water system.

The loss of wetlands can cause a change in the water chemistry of major water systems that those wetlands would otherwise filter out.

With increasing emissions from cars, fertilizer and pesticide use, and animal grazing there are increasing numbers of pollutants entering our waterways.

These pollutants are changing the natural balance of nutrients in our lotic systems and having long-term consequences on the function and community composition of those systems,

Acting as stormwater management systems, wetlands help reduce the impacts of runoff after a rain storm or snowmelt event. Such runoff typically transports high concentrations of nitrogen and phosphorus and suspended solids from road surfaces to waterways,

Wetlands remove up to 90 percent of nitrates from groundwater through a process called denitrification.

Wetlands also play an important role in sediment management and erosion reduction.

They provide habitats for large-scale biodiversity, rare or threatened species, game fish, and plants for medicines and dyes.

Scarcity of food:

Malthus postulated that food growth proceeds at an arithmetic rate, while population grows at a geometric rate meaning that population grows faster than food and at a certain point population outstrips food growth leading to misery.

Food scarcity is a bigger problem than ever as human population numbers continue to swell, putting additional stress on already fragile food production and distribution systems.

The more people there are, especially in poor countries with limited amounts of land and water, the fewer resources there are to meet basic needs.  If basic needs cannot be met, development stalls, and economies begin to unravel.

In some poor countries, attempts to increase food production and consumption are undermined by rapid population growth; migration from rural to urban areas; unequal land distribution; shrinking landholdings; deepening rural poverty; and widespread land degradation. Lower birth rates, along with better management of land and water resources, are necessary to avert chronic food shortages.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic C Environment And Human Population Environment And Human Health

Because of the permanent interaction between man and his environment, our health, to a considerable extent, is determined by environmental quality. The environment in which we live, work, and relax, is determining our health and well-being.

The relationship between environment and health is extremely complex. Many health problems are directly associated with environmental pollution. A few important examples are discussed below.

Lung diseases:

Lung disease is any problem in the airways or the lung tissues that prevents the lungs from working properly. Two such important lung diseases are Asthma and Bronchitis. Both Asthma and Bronchitis are Airway diseases.

These diseases affect the tubes or airways that carry oxygen and other gases into and out of the lungs. They usually cause a narrowing or blockage of the airways.

Asthma :

Asthma is a common chronic inflammatory breathing problem due to narrowing of the airways characterized by variable and recurring symptoms, reversible airflow obstruction, and bronchospasm leading to narrowing of bronchi, production of extra mucus, and difficulty in breathing.

Symptoms :

Common symptoms include wheezing, coughing, chest tightness, shortness of breath, and breathing difficulty. For some people, asthma is a minor nuisance.

For others, it can be a major problem that interferes with daily activities including sleeping, and may lead to a life-threatening asthma attack.

Primary causes :

The following are the primary causes of asthma :

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic C Environment And Human Population primary causes

1. Environmental factors :

Air pollution, both in and out of the home, can impact the development and triggering of asthma. Environmental factors that trigger asthma include pollution, suspended particulate matter, sulfur dioxide, oxides of nitrogen, ozone, cold temperatures, and high humidity.

The most common causes of asthma attacks are extremely small and lightweight particles transported through the air and inhaled into the lungs. Thus heavy air pollution tends to cause a higher recurrence of asthma.

Smoggy conditions release both ozone and sulfur dioxide causing coughing, shortness of breath, and chest pain. Changes in weather might also stimulate attacks.

Cold air can lead to airway congestion, constricted airways, extra secretion of mucus, and other asthma symptoms.  Humidity might also lead to breathing difficulties for populations in some areas.

2. Allergies:

A strong link exists between allergies and asthma, For some people the environmental triggers are allergens. Allergens are usually natural substances, such as plant pollen and mold spores, animal dander (tiny pieces of animal hair and skin), and fecal material from dust mites and cockroaches.

Environment And Human Population Class 10

Allergens produce an exaggerated response in the immune system in which a specific antibody initiates the inflammatory response. These same allergens may cause little or no reaction in non-allergic people.

Asthma also occurs in people who do not have allergies. In these people, chemical irritants trigger an inflammatory response that is initiated in a different way than in allergen-triggered asthma.

For example, some people are sensitive to certain common chemical irritants, such as perfume, hairspray, cosmetics, and household cleaners.

3. Smoking tobacco:

Tobacco smoke is directly linked to asthma, wheezing, respiratory infections, and overproduction of mucus. It also increases breathlessness in the airways. In addition, the children of parents who smoke have a higher risk of developing asthma.

2. Bronchitis:

Bronchitis is a respiratory disease in which the mucus membrane in the lungs’ bronchial passages gets inflamed.

As the irritated membrane swells and grows thicker, it narrows or shuts off the tiny airways in the lungs, resulting in coughing spells that may be accompanied by phlegm and breathlessness.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic C Environment And Human Population bronchitis

Symptoms :

For either acute or chronic bronchitis, symptoms include:

  1. Cough
  2. Production of mucus (sputum) which can be clear, white, or yellowish-grey in color and rarely may be streaked with blood.
  3. Fatigue
  4. Shortness of breath
  5. Slight fever, headache, and chills
  6. Chest discomfort.

Causes :

Bronchitis may be either acute or chronic. Acute bronchitis, also called a chest cold, is very common without lasting effects, although the cough may linger for weeks. It is usually caused by influenza viruses, the same viruses that cause colds and flu.

Chronic bronchitis, a more serious condition, is a constant irritation or inflammation of the lining of the bronchial tubes. Chronic bronchitis involves a productive cough that lasts for at least three months with recurring bouts occurring for at least two consecutive years.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Environment Notes

Risk factors responsible for chronic bronchitis are :

  1. Cigarette smoking
  2. contaminated air or air pollution
  3. Exposure to irritants on the job
  4. Low resistance.

Chronic bronchitis may result from a series of acute bronchitis episodes, or it may evolve gradually due to heavy cigarette smoking or breathing air contaminated with other environmental pollutants, including workplace (occupational) exposures.

In addition to cigarette smoking, the list of causative substances includes coal dust, oil mist, cement dust, welding fumes, organic dust, engine exhausts, fire smoke, and second-hand cigarette smoke.

There is a variety of components of welded materials and welding methods that may have chronic detrimental effects, including permanent disability to welders.

In the line of duty, firefighters may experience occupational exposure to gases, chemicals, particulate, and other substances with potentially damaging short and long-term effects on the respiratory system.

There are indications that repeated inhalations of smoke during routine firefighting activities can result in chronic bronchitis and abnormal lung function.

Low resistance to chronic bronchitis may result from another acute illness, such as cold or other immune disorders. Older adults, infants, and young children have greater vulnerability to infection.

2. Cancer:

Cancer is a group of more than 200 different diseases characterized by an uncontrolled growth of cells that disrupts body tissues and organs.

Cancerous cells grow and multiply to form tumors that invade local tissues, destroy them and eventually gain access to the circulatory system to scatter throughout the body.

Malignancy refers to the ability of a tumor to ultimately cause death. Metastasis is an outstanding characteristic of malignancy. Metastasis is the tendency of tumor cells to be carried from their site of origin by way of the circulatory system to invade almost every tissue and organ of the body to destroy the host.

Symptoms :

Usually In the beginning, there are no warning signs of cancer. Later, the signs of cancer are related to the location of the tumor.

As cancer progresses, it commonly causes loss of muscle tissue, pale skin, pain, fatigue, loss of appetite, blood in the urine, unexpected weight loss, indigestion, fever, etc.

Types of Cancer:

There are two major types of cancers according to the simplest method of classification:

  1. Carcinoma and Sarcoma.
  2. Carcinomas occur in epithelial tissues, which cover the body (skin) and line the inner cavitary structures of the organs (such as
  3. the respiratory or GI tract etc).

Sarcomas develop in the connective tissues, including fibrous tissues, adipose tissues, muscles, bones, blood vessels, and cartilage.

Causes of Cancer:

There is no single cause of cancer. Cancer development depends on things such as family history (genetics), health, nutrition, personal habits, and the environment.

1. Environmental factors :

External environmental causes of cancer are factors in the environment that increase the risk of cancer such as different pollutions, UV radiation, etc. In addition to lung cancer, other cancers have been linked to environmental toxins (poisons).

For example, pesticides, herbicides, and radioactive substances have the potential to cause cancer. Asbestos, chromium, and coal tar have been linked to lung cancer.

It is difficult to determine, however, what proportion of cancer is due to exposure to these agents, because the length of time between exposure and the appearance of cancer is usually prolonged.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Environment Notes

Smoking and tobacco :

Experts agree that tobacco is the single biggest avoidable cause of cancer in the world. Cigarettes, cigars, and pipe tobacco are made from dried tobacco leaves, and ingredients are added for flavor and to make smoking more pleasant.

The smoke from these products is a complex mixture of chemicals produced by the burning of tobacco and its additives. Tobacco smoke is made up of more than several chemicals, including many known to cause cancer (carcinogens).

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic C Environment And Human Population smoking and tobacco

Poisons in tobacco smoke can damage or change a cell’s DNA. When DNA is damaged, a cell can begin growing out of control and create a cancer tumor.

The number of years a person spends smoking affects his/her cancer risk most strongly. Smoking causes at least 15 different types of cancer.

Apart from lung cancer, it causes cancers of the mouth, pharynx (upper throat), nose and sinuses, larynx (voice box), esophagus, liver, pancreas, stomach, kidney, bowel, ovary, bladder, cervix, and some types of leukemia.

Impact Of Human Population On Environment Class 10

Chewing tobacco is a common type of smokeless tobacco. The risk of certain types of cancer increases if a person chews tobacco. This includes esophageal cancer and various types of oral cancer, including cancers of the mouth, throat, cheek, gums, lips, and tongue.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic C Environment And Human Population Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. We are now adding about _____________ people to the planet every 12 years.
Answer: One billion

Question 2. _____________ resources are of two types- renewable resources and non-renewable resources.
Answer: Natural

Question 3. Sustained_____________ can lead to the destruction of the renewable natural resource.
Answer: Overexploitation

Question 4. Forests are complex that affect almost every species on the _____________planet.
Answer: Ecosystems

Question 5. Environmental pollution, _____________, and smoking tobacco are the primary causes of asthma.
Answer: Allergies

Question 6. Pollution has been linked to health problems like asthma and lung disease, as _____________
Answer: Air

Environment And Human Population Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. Global _____________ and climate change refers to an increase in average global temperatures.
Answer: Warming

Question 8. A wetland is a_____________ area that is saturated with water.
Answer: Land

Question 9. _____________postulated that food growth proceeds at an arithmetic rate while population grows at a geometric rate.
Answer: Malthus

Question 10. 1°_____________ is a respiratory disease in which the mucus membrane in the lung’s bronchial passages becomes inflamed.
Answer: Bronchitis

Question 11. Wetlands act as biological of the_____________ landscape.
Answer: Kidneys

Question 12. _____________diseases affect the tubes that carry gases into and out of the lungs.
Answer: Airway

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic C Environment And Human Population Write True Or False

Question 1. As the century begins, natural resources are increasing, threatening public health and development.
Answer: False

Question 2. Most undeveloped economies currently consume resources much faster than they can regenerate.
Answer: False

Question 3. We are now adding one billion people to the planet every 12 years.
Answer: True

Question 4. Trees, paper, food crops, etc. are renewable natural resources.
Answer: True

Question 5. Sustained over-exploitation can lead to the destruction of the resource.
Answer: True

Question 6. Forestation is the destruction or clearing of forested lands.
Answer: False

Question 7. Forests are complex ecosystems that affect almost every species on the planet.
Answer: True

Question 8. Water covers 90% of our planet, and it is easy to think that it will always be plentiful.
Answer: False

Question 9. Air pollution is always man-made.
Answer: False

Environment And Human Population Class 10 MCQs

Question 10. Carbon dioxide is one of the worst air pollutants.
Answer: True

Question 11. Wetlands act as the biological “heart” of the landscape.
Answer: False

Question 12. Better management of land and water resources is necessary to avert chronic food shortages.
Answer: True

Question 13. Asthma is a common chronic inflammatory disease of the airway passage.
Answer: True

Question 14. There is no single cause of cancer.
Answer: True

Question 15. Smoke, cold air, or obnoxious odor are allergens.
Answer: False

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic C Environment And Human Population Match The Column

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic C Environment And Human Population match the column
Answer: 1-B,2-D,3-E,4-A

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic C Environment And Human Population match the column
Answer: 1-E,2-C,3-A,4-D

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic C Environment And Human Population Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What does the vital index mean?
Answer: \(\text { Vital index }=\frac{\text { Natality }}{\text { Mortality }} \times 100\)

Question 2. What are natural resources?
Answer: Natural resources are those things that were formed from the biotic and abiotic factors in the atmosphere, and which are used by man for various purposes.

Question 3. What is the over-exploitation of natural resources?
Answer: Over-exploitation refers to harvesting a natural resource to the point of diminishing returns and destruction.

Question 4. What is deforestation?
Answer: Deforestation is the destruction or clearing of forested lands, usually to expand agricultural land or for timber harvesting.

Question 5. What percentage of the world’s water is fresh water?
Answer: About 3%

Question 6. What kind of pollution is smog?
Answer: Air pollution

Environment And Human Population Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. Name one important air pollutant.
Answer: Carbon dioxide

Question 8. What is meant by wetland?
Answer: A wetland is a land area that is saturated with water, either permanently or seasonally.

Examples: Lakes, ponds, estuaries, lagoons, etc.

Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out that term and write it: COPD, Airway disease, Asthma, bronchitis Airway disease.

Question 10. Choose the odd one and write it:
Answer: Greenhouse effect, wetland destruction, green revolution, shortage of fresh water.
The green revolution, because the other three are the ill effects of an ever-increasing population.

Question 11. What is passive smoking?
Answer: Passive smoking is the involuntary (but detrimental) inhaling of smoke from other people’s cigarettes or cigars.

Question 12. List out the two most common forms of cancer caused due to cigarette smoking.
Answer: Lung and throat cancer.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic C Environment And Human Population
Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What are the ill effects of the over-exploitation of natural resources?
Answer:

Ill effects of the over-exploitation of natural resources

Over-exploitation refers to harvesting a natural resource to the point of diminishing returns. Sustained over-exploitation can lead to the destruction of the resource.

The term applies to natural resources such as:

wild medicinal plants, conventional energy sources (like coal, petroleum, etc), grazing pastures, game animals, fish stocks, forests, and water aquifers.

Due to the large increase in human population and technological revolution, various natural resources are being consumed at a very rapid rate.

This over-exploitation of natural resources is disturbing the environment in the following ways:

  1. Deforestation
  2. Desertification
  3. Extinction of species and biodiversity
  4. Soil erosion
  5. Oil Depletion and Future Energy Crisis
  6. global warming
  7. Pollution at an alarming rate
  8. Natural calamities
  9. Forced migration
  10. Economy crisis.

Since resources are limited, the consequences of over-exploitation of resources are detrimental to the environment and earth.

Question 2. What Are The Types Of Natural Resources?
Answer:

Natural Resources Are Of Two Types:

renewable resources (they can be made again and again according to the use, e.g.: trees, paper, food crops, etc.) and non-renewable resources (they can’t be made once they are used up, for Example metals, petrol, natural gas, coal, etc.).

Question 3. What is the shrinking of agricultural lands?
Answer:

The shrinking of agricultural land

Shrinking agricultural fields is one of the biggest challenges for making food available to the world population. Cultivable land continues to shrink.

The decrease is mainly due to the diversion of cultivable land for construction, industries, and other developmental activities. It is also shrinking due to depleting groundwater levels and extreme weather conditions.

It may not pose an immediate problem for the nation’s food security but its long-term effect could be disastrous with a country needing more and more food grains to support its growing population.

Environment And Human Population Class 10 MCQs

Question 4. Why is a wetland considered the kidney of the ecosystem?
Answer:

Wetlands are critical to our biodiversity and the protection of wetlands is essential.

Wetlands act as the biological “kidneys” of the landscape by filtering out any water that would otherwise directly run into a water system.

They store, assimilate and transform contaminants like nitrogen and phosphorus lost from the land after a rainstorm or a snowmelt event before they reach the waterways.

Like a giant kidney, wetlands help to dilute and filter materials that could otherwise harm the lakes, rivers, and other waterways.

Wetlands remove up to 90 percent of nitrates from groundwater through denitrification. Microbes living in wetlands absorb and break down nitrogen improving water quality.

Wetlands play an important role in sediment management and erosion reduction. Wetland vegetation traps sediment suspended in water and their roots hold riverbank soil together.

Wetlands also regulate the flow of water from land, soaking up excess flood water and then slowly releasing it to maintain summer flows or recharge groundwater.

Healthy peat wetlands help to combat global warming as they soak up excess carbon.

Question 5. What is asthma?
Answer:

Asthma

Asthma is a common chronic inflammatory breathing problem due to the narrowing of the airways characterized by variable and recurring symptoms, reversible airflow obstruction, and bronchospasm leading to the production of extra mucus and difficulty in breathing. Common symptoms include wheezing, coughing, chest tightness, and shortness of breath.

Asthma is thought to be caused by a combination of genetic, and environmental factors, allergies, and smoking tobacco.

Question 6. What is bronchitis?
Answer:

Bronchitis

Bronchitis is a respiratory disease in which the mucus membrane in the lungs’ bronchial passages becomes inflamed.

As the irritated membrane swells and grows thicker, it narrows or shuts off the tiny airways in the lungs, resulting in coughing spells that may be accompanied by phlegm and breathlessness.

Symptoms include coughing up mucus, wheezing, shortness of breath, chest discomfort, slight fever, chills, and fatigue.

Question 7. How are tobacco smoking and cancer related?
Answer:

Experts agree that tobacco is the single biggest avoidable cause of cancer in the world. Cigarettes, cigars, and pipe tobacco are made from dried tobacco leaves, and ingredients are added for flavor and to make smoking more pleasant.

The smoke from these products is a complex mixture of chemicals produced by the burning of tobacco and its additives. Tobacco smoke is made up of more than thousands of chemicals, including many known to cause cancer (carcinogens).

Some carcinogens present in tobacco smoke are nicotine, hydrogen cyanide, formaldehyde, benzene, nitrosamines, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons, etc.

Poisons in cigarette smoke can weaken the body’s immune system, making it harder to kill cancer cells. Poisons in tobacco smoke can damage or change a cell’s DNA.

When DNA is damaged, a cell can begin growing out of control and create a cancer tumor. Smoking causes at least 15 different types of cancers such as lung, mouth, esophagus, liver, stomach cancer, etc.

Causes Of Overpopulation Class 10

Question 8. What is the Malthusian theory of population?
Answer:

The Malthusian theory of population is a theory of population growth and food supply growth proposed by an English scholar named Thomas Robert Malthus.

Malthusian theory:

Population and food supply:

Malthus theorized that populations grow in geometric progression but food production increases in arithmetic progression. Thus populations grow faster than the supply of food. This leads to a shortage of food.

Population control:

Malthus argued that because there will be a higher population than the availability of food, many people will die from the shortage of food.

Question 9. How does environmental pollution cause cancer?
Answer:

External environmental pollutions increase the risk of cancer. In addition to lung cancer, other cancers have been linked to environmental toxins.

Water pollution:

Contaminated drinking water enhances the risk of cancer. The five most pervasive drinking water contaminants that are linked to cancer are 1, 4- Dioxane, Arsenic, Chromium- 6, disinfection byproducts, and nitrates.

These carcinogens are linked with bladder, lung, skin, stomach, liver, intestinal and ovarian cancers.

Air pollution:

Air pollution triggers defects in DNA repair function, alterations of the immune response, and the growth of new blood vessels that allow tumors to spread.

Several cancers linked to air pollution are lung, breast, liver, bile duct, gall bladder, pancreas cancers, etc. Some of the airborne carcinogens include diesel engine exhaust, solvents, metals, dust, and particulate matter.

Soil pollution:

The inhalation of soil particulate matter and the ingestion of contaminated food can potentially result in serious conditions. Cancer, including leukemia, may be caused by contact with soils contaminated with chemicals like benzene, gasoline, etc.

Exposure to polychlorinated biphenyl is linked to liver cancer. Heavy metals like chromium, lead, and mercury found in soil are carcinogenic.

Question 10. Mention the names of a few lung diseases caused by air pollution.
Answer:

Exposure to air pollution may cause several lung diseases like Asthma, Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary disease (COPD), chronic bronchitis, emphysema, and lung cancer.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Environmental Pollution Introduction To Pollution

Human activities introduce various types of contaminants into the natural environment. The contaminants bring about adverse changes to the biosphere.

This results in environmental pollution.

Pollution is an undesirable change in the physio-chemical and biological characteristics of the biosphere that has adverse effects on living organisms, the environment, living conditions, cultural assets of human beings, raw material resources, or industrial processes.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution

Pollutants:

The foreign substances or energies or naturally occurring materials causing pollution of the environment (i.e., the polluting agents) are called pollutants.

Examples: Particulate matter, oxides of carbon/sulfur/nitrogen, Hydrocarbons, sewage, discarded radioactive wastes, etc.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Introduction To Pollution Types Of Pollution

The common pollution problems that we have to face can be classified in three ways –

According to the component of the environment that is being polluted; for example-

  1. Air pollution,
  2. Water pollution and
  3. Land (soil) pollution.

According to the physical nature of the pollutant; for example-

  1. Gaseous pollution,
  2. Dust pollution,
  3. Noise pollution,
  4. Thermal pollution,
  5. Radioactive pollution etc.

According To Origin:

Pollution can be classified into two broad groups – natural and artificial or anthropogenic (manmade).

1. Natural pollutions are those which originate from natural processes e.g., forest fires, volcanic eruptions, dust storms, natural organic and inorganic decays, the release of microbes, pollens, spores, etc.

2. Artificial or anthropogenic pollution is that whthatriginate due to activities of man; for example industrial pollution, agricultural pollution, automobile pollution, domestic pollution, etc.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

3. The anthropogenic polpollutione isajor problem because they are increasing day by day due to overpopulation.

Among the various man-made pollution problems, the largest ones are air pollution, water pollution, soil pollution, noise pollution, and radioactive pollution because these are very common (i.e., frequently occurring) and they produce deleterious effects on a vast population.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Topic B Environmental Pollution Air Pollution Definition

Any adverse change in the composition of the atmosphere that occurs due to the activities of man or some natural event and endangers human life is called air pollution or atmospheric pollution.

Causes And Effects Of Air Pollution

Causes-

Greenhouse Gases:

1. CO2, CH4/ water vapor, N2O, SF6, and CFC are liberated from different industrial sources and have different grades of global warming potential (GWP) when they are compared wconcerningCO2, which has a GWP of 1.

2. CO2, NO2, SO2, and hydrocarbons from automobile and industrial sources.

3. SPM (Suspended Particulate Matter), which are of two types SPM10  (diameter of μ and SPM2.5μ (diameter of 2.5μ liberated from automobile exhaust, building dust, etc.

They may be fibrous material of plant or animal origin, fly ash particles, oil particles, or fungal spores.

Environmental Pollution Class 10

Effects-

1. Green House Effect:

GHGs absorb shorter UV rays of the sun and also those which are reflected from the Earth’s surface causing elevation of global temperature,

Global Warming:

It results in the melting of ice and snow in the permanent glaciers.

The water level in the ocean rises causing infiltration of saline water, flooding of low-lying areas, extreme reduction in agricultural productivity, and unprecedented changes in the wind and global precipitation pattern,

Effect On Biomes:

Due to the shifting of climatic belts as a consequence of global warming, vegetation would gradually also shift in the same direction to stay in favorable climatic conditions.

Those species which will be unable to do so shall die. Thus there will be losses of genetic resources on a large scale. All important biomes shall be affected.

2. Acid rain: These gases get dissolved in rainwater producing different types of acids like Carbonic acid (H2SO3), Nitrous acid (HNO2) Nitric acid (HN03), Sulphurous acid (H2SO3) or Sulphuric acid (H2SO4), etc.

The acid-laden aerosols come downwards as acid precipitation or acid rain. Acid rain is corrosive affects aquatic ecosystems, causes disbalance to mineral cycles, kills soil microbes by changing their pH, and damages monuments, plants, etc.

Oxides of nitrogen are responsible for the formation of peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN) and peroxybenzoyl nitrate (PBN) which cause acute irritation of eyes and respiratory problems.

NO2 may cause pulmonary edema besides being an important constituent of photochemical smog.

NO is responsible for the depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer.

Sulphar retards photosynthesis and inhibits carbon assimilation. Plants exposed to SO2 for long durations suffer from necrosis and interveinal chlorosis.

SO2 is capable of causing the thickening of the mucous layer of the trachea, bronchial constriction, and hypertrophy of mucous glands.

Hydrocarbons in excess cause necrosis of leaves, chlorosis of floral buds, irritation of mucous membranes, and bronchial constriction. Many hydrocarbons are known to have carcinogenic properties.

3. SPM reduces visibility and prevents the sun rays from entering the atmosphere reducing photosynthetic productivity,

They may also cause lung diseases like chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) and other respiratory distress like apnoea, dyspnoea, or difficulty in breathing.

Environmental Pollution Class 10

It may damage the surfactant in the lining of alveolate and induce respiratory distress syndrome,

SPM is also capable of causing various types of allergies.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Control Of Air Pollution

The atmosphere has several built-in cleaning processes such as dispersion, gravitational settling, flocculation, absorption, rain-washout, etc., to cleanse the atmosphere.

However, control of contaminants at their source level is desirable through effective preventive methods or control technologies.

Source Control:

  1. Some measures that can be adopted in this direction are:
  2. Using unleaded petrol.
  3. Using fuels with low sulfur and ash content.
  4. Encouraging people to use public transport, walk, or use a cycle as opposed to private vehicles.
  5. Ensuring that houses, schools, restaurants, and playgrounds are not located on busy streets.
  6. Planting trees along busy streets as they remove particulates, and carbon dioxide and absorbs noise.
  7. Industries and waste disposal sites should be situated outside the city preferably on the downwind side of the city.
  8. Catalytic converters should be used to help control emissions of carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons.

Control Measures In Industrial Centres:

  1. Emission rates should be restricted to permissible levels by every industry.
  2. Incorporation of air pollution control
  3. Continuous monitoring of the atmosphere for pollutants should be carried out to know the emission levels.

Equipment Used To Control Air Pollution:

  1. Air Pollution can be reduced by adopting the following approaches.
  2. Ensuring sufficient supply of oxygen to the combustion chamber and adequate temperature so that the combustion is complete thereby eliminating much of the smoke consisting of partly burnt ashes and dust.
  3. To use mechanical devices such as scrubbers, cyclones, bag houses, and electrostatic precipitators in manufacturing processes. These methods retain hazardous materials allowing clean smoke to go out through the chimney.
  4. Wet scrubbers can additionally reduce sulfur dioxide emissions.
  5. The air pollutants collected must be carefully disposed of the factory fumes may be dealt with by chemical treatment.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Water pollution Definition

Water pollution is the phenomenon in which water is rendered unsuitable for consumption by man and other animals or habitation of aquatic plants and animals due to the mixing of any poisonous material or pollutant with it.

Causes And Effects Of Water Pollution

Causes-

1. Agricultural Runoff:

It includes pesticides, herbicides, phosphate and nitrate fertilizer, and other mixed organic pollutants including different phosphates and nitrates that are washed down by either rainwater or Irrigation water to nearby low-lying lakes and other water bodies.

2. Sewage disposal:

The sewage water contains some pathogens like Vibrio cholera, Micrococcus, Salmonella type, etc.

3. Industrial discharge and oil contamination

Effects-

The deposition of excess nutrients in the water bodies results in eutrophication causing an increase in BOD (Biochemical Oxygen Demand) and algal bloom.

It also increases COD, which oxidizes different chemical compounds and thereby reduces the DO (dissolved oxygen) killing aquatic life including fish.

The increase in sewage level causes contamination of water by different pathogenic organisms that cause cholera, gastroenteritis, and typhoid. The problem becomes more acute due to poor sanitation.

  1. Leads to an abundance of microbes.
  2. Creates a deficit of oxygen in aquatic systems.
  3. Algal blooms are created
  4. Causes an increase in toxic trace elements.

Reduction of growth:

Pesticides have some direct harmful effects on plants including poor root hair development, shoot yellowing, F, and reduced plant growth.

Effect On Animals:

Reduction in biodiversity:

Pesticides inflict extremely widespread damage to biota.

Reduction In Animal Feed:

Widespread application of pesticides can eliminate food sources that certain types of animals need, causing the animals to relocate, change their diet, or starve.

Food chain effect:

Poisoning from pesticides can travel up the food chain; for example, birds can be harmed when they eat insects and worms that have consumed pesticides.

The killing of earthworms:

The earthworms are killed, which reduces soil fertility. The pesticide also can accumulate in these organisms, which gets into the body of the predators.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Pollution Notes

Killing Of Birds:

In England, the use of pesticides in gardens and farmland has seen a reduction in the number of Common Chaffinches. About 72 million birds are killed by pesticides in the United States each year.

Bald eagles are common examples of non-target organisms that are impacted by pesticide use. Rachel Carson’s landmark book Silent Spring dealt with the loss of bird species due to the bioaccumulation of pesticides in their tissues.

Thinning of eggshell:

DDT-induced eggshell thinning has especially affected European and North American bird populations.

The herbicide paraquat (dipyridylium), when sprayed onto bird eggs, causes growth abnormalities in embryos and reduces the number of chicks that hatch successfully.

Additionally, it causes an increase in the amount of pesticides through the phenomenon called biomagnification.

Biomagnification simply denotes enhancement in the concentration of a particular substance (such as a toxic chemical) in the tissues of tolerant organisms at successively higher levels along the food chain.

By this method, a toxic substance enters the food chain at a very low concentration and as it moves up into the consumers of the higher trophic level, its concentration increases, which might induce lethality in these animals.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic B Environmental Pollution barker

At each level of the food chain, more than half the biomass is lost through excretion, respiration, and decay; but most of the toxic substances (such as DDT) are retained since DDT is metabolized and excreted much more slowly than other nutrients.

Thus DDT accumulates in the bodies (especially in fat) and as a result, becomes highly concentrated in carnivores. This is why the hazard of DDT to nontarget animals is particularly acute for those species living at the top of food chains.

This phenomenon can operate both in terrestrial as well as aquatic ecosystems.

Barker in 1958 showed that the concentration of DDT in the soil below elm trees is 10 ppm, and the earthworm contained 86 ppm of DDT. The Robin bird died after consuming 11-12 such earthworms and the liver of the dead bird showed 744 ppm of DDT, while their brain showed 250 ppm of DDT.

Woodwell (1967) showed 0.002 ppm of DDT in the body of zooplanktons, it increased to 2.07 ppm in the body of needle fishes and 75.5 ppm in the body of fish-eating gulls.

Thus, the adverse effect of DDT is felt in the body of higher consumers by the phenomenon of biomagnification.

Effect On Human Beings:

Similar biomagnification can be observed in the case of heavy metals like mercury causing Minamata disease, and lead causing anemia in mammals.

Humans become more susceptible to cancers, liver and kidney failure, respiratory disorders, birth defects in pregnant women, and Brain damage and heart diseases as a result of mercury, cadmium, lead, cobalt, chromium, and other chemical poisonings.

For instance, diseases like hepatitis and cancer have been attributed to consuming seafood that has Been poisoned by mercury and aromatic hydrocarbons.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Control Of Soil Pollution

  1. Reduction of synthetic pesticides.
  2. Using organic manure.
  3. Use of biofertilizer.
  4. Adoption of biological control.
  5. Use of genetically modified crops that can resist insect pests, like Bt cotton

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Noise Pollution  Definition

An increase of noise i.e., unwanted and loud sound which is displeasing to the ear, in the surroundings is called noise pollution or sound pollution.

Control of Noise Pollution

Control At Receiver’s End:

For people working in noisy installations, ear-protection aids like earplugs, ear-muffs, noise helmets, headphones, etc. must be provided to reduce occupational exposure.

Suppression of Noise at Source:

This is possible if working methods are improved by:

Designing, fabricating, and using quieter machines to replace the noisy ones.

Proper lubrication and better maintenance of machines.

Installing noisy machines in soundproof chambers.

Covering noise-producing machine parts with sound-absorbing materials to check noise production.

Reducing the noise produced by a vibrating machine by vibration damping i.e. making a layer of damping material (rubber, neoprene, cork, or plastic) beneath the machine.

Using silencers to control noise from automobiles, ducts, exhausts, etc., and conveyor systems with ends opening into the atmosphere.

Use glass wool or mineral wool covered with a sheet of perforated metal for mechanical protection.

Acoustic Zoning:

Increased distance between source and receiver by the zoning of noisy industrial areas, bus terminals, railway stations, aerodromes, etc.

Being away from the residential areas would go a long way in minimizing noise pollution. There should be silence zones near residential areas, educational institutions, and above all, hospitals.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Pollution Notes

The permissible noise levels in different types of localities are:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic B Environmental Pollution locality

Sound Insulation at Construction Stages:

  1. Sound travels through the cracks that get left between the door and the wall. To reduce noise, this space (jamb frame gap) should be packed with sound-absorbing material.
  2. Sound insulation can be done by constructing windows with double or triple panes of glass and filling the gaps with sound-absorbing materials.
  3. Acoustical tiles, hair felt, perforated plywood, etc., can be fixed on walls, ceilings, floors, etc., to reduce noise (especially for soundproof recording rooms, etc.)

Planting of Trees:

Planting green trees and shrubs along roads, hospitals, educational institutions, etc., helps in noise reduction to a considerable extent.

Legislative Measures:

Strict legislative measures need to be enforced to curb the menace of noise pollution.

Some of these measures could be:

  1. Minimum use of loudspeakers and amplifiers especially near silence zones.
  2. Banning pressure horns in automobiles.
  3. Framing and implementation of a strict Noise Pollution Act.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The presence of life in the hydrosphere, lithosphere, and atmosphere constitutes the_______________
Answer: Biosphere

Question 2. The contaminating bacteria in the water body is called _______________.
Answer: Coliforms

Question 3. The diameter of ordinary SPM is_______________ .
Answer: 10

Question 4. COPD occurs due to _______________pollution.
Answer: Air

Question 5. Cholera causing virus is_______________ .
Answer: Rotavirus

Question 6. DDT’s full name is _______________.
Answer: Dichloro diphenyl trichloroethane

Question 7. Increased mineralization of the water body is called_______________.
Answer: Eutrophication

Question 8. Typhoid is a_______________ disease.
Answer: Waterborne

Question 9. _______________liberated from the agricultural field is a gas.
Answer: Methane, greenhouse

Question 10. Wetland is also called of_______________ nature.
Answer: Kidney

Question 11. _______________ cultivation along hill slopes prevents soil erosion.
Answer: Terrace

Question 12. The fertility of the soil is retained by crop_______________.
Answer: Rotation

Environmental Pollution Class 10 MCQs

Question 13. The global warming potential of CO2 is _______________.
Answer: One

Question 14. Too much humus in the soil makes it _______________.
Answer: Acidic

Question 15. The full form of PAN is_______________ .
Answer: Peroxy acetyl nitrate

Question 16. 03 layer is present in the _______________.
Answer: Stratosphere

Question 17. _______________ and should be present in the fertilizer.
Answer: Nitrogen, phosphorous; potassium

Question 18. The unit of noise pollution is _______________.
Answer: Decibel

Question 19. Noise pollution is measured by _______________.
Answer: Sound level matter

Question 20. The fungal spores of air are sampled by_______________ sampler.
Answer: Anderson

Question 21. PAN is a_______________ pollutant.
Answer: Secondary

Question 22. CFC was used as a _______________.
Answer: Coolant

Question 23. The limit of noise as per law in West Bengal is up to_______________.
Answer: 90(dB)

Environmental Pollution Class 10 MCQs

Question 24. The coliforms are kept under control by the use of_______________.
Answer: Chlorine

Question 25. _______________denotes enhancement in the concentration of a particular toxic substance along the food chain.
Answer: Biomagnification

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Write True Or False

Question 1. SO2 and NO2 cause acid rain.
Answer: True

Question 2. Arsenic pollution causes Minamata disease.
Answer: False

Question 3. Volcanic eruptions are an example of natural pollution.
Answer: True

Question 4. Pesticides and fertilizers do not act as soil pollutants.
Answer: False

Question 5. Crop rotation should involve a legume crop.
Answer: True

Question 6. Oxides of nitrogen retard the rate of photosynthesis.
Answer: False

Environmental Pollution Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. Water vapor is a greenhouse gas.
Answer: True

Question 8. Overexposure to noise has a masking effect on ordinary sound intensities.
Answer: True

Question 9. Hookworm larvae enter the human body through contaminated water.
Answer: False

Question 10. Bioplastic is produced by fungi.
Answer: False

Question 11. Sewage disposal causes air pollution.
Answer: False

Question 12. Stone cancer is induced by acid rain.
Answer: True

Question 13. Pollen grain may cause allergy.
Answer: False

Question 14. CFC is used as a fuel.
Answer: False

Question 15. Fly ash is liberated from thermal power plants.
Answer: True

Question 16. SO2 is a greenhouse gas.
Answer: False

Question 17. Coliforms are units of soil pollution.
Answer: False

Question 18. Skin cancer is also called melanoma.
Answer: True

Question 19. Tinnitus is caused by air pollution.
Answer: False

Question 20. Eutrophication lowers both BOD and COD.
Answer: False

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Match The Columns

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic B Environmental match the columns
Answer: 1-B,2-D,3-E,4-A

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic B Environmental match the columns 3
Answer: 1-C,2-D,3-E,4-A

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic B Environmental match the columns 2
Answer: 1-D,2-A,3-D,4-E

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Name two gases causing acid rain.
Answer: SO2, NO2.

Question 2. What type of pollution is associated with eutrophication?
Answer: Water.

Question 3. Name the gas having the highest global warming potential.
Answer: SF6¯

Question 4. What is the name given to pollution by algae?
Answer: Algal bloom.

Question 5. What is the name given to the increase in pollutants across the food chain?
Answer: Biomagnification.

Question 6. Name the most powerful anti-pollution act in India.
Answer: Environmental Pollution Act (EPA); 1986.

Question 7. State the level of sound at which pollution is caused.
Answer: 120 dB.

Control Measures Of Pollution Class 10

Question 8. Name two disinfectants used in water pollution.
Answer: Potassium permanganate, Chlorine.

Question 9. Give the full form of CNG.
Answer: Compressed Natural Gas.

Question 10. Which one is the most common indicator organism that represents polluted water?
Answer: E. coli

Question 11. Name the oxide of nitrogen acting as a greenhouse gas.
Answer: Nitrous oxide.

Question 12. Name the gas that brings about the depletion of oxygen from hemoglobin.
Answer: Carbon monoxide.

Question 13. What is the diameter of the respiratory particulate matter?
Answer: 2-5

Question 14. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out that term and write it:
PAH, Hydrocarbon pollutant, PBN, PAN.
Answer: Hydrocarbon pollutant.

Question 15. Give examples of two places that are categorized as silence zones in terms of noise levels.
Answer: Hospitals and educational institutions.

Question 16. A pair of related terms is given below. Based on the relationship in the first pair, write the suitable word in the gap of the second pair:
Answer: Cholera: Vibrio cholerae:: Typhoid: Salmonella typhi

Question 17. Choose the biodegradable pollutants from the list given below:
Answer: Radioactive waste, Sewage, DDT, Agricultural Waste

Question 18. What is the difference between bioaccumulation and biomagnification?
Answer: Bioaccumulation refers to the accumulation of a toxic chemical in the tissue of a particular organism.

Biomagnification refers to the increased concentration of a toxic chemical the higher an animal is on the food chain.

Control Measures Of Pollution Class 10

Question 19. Plants/animals from which of the following groups are most susceptible to biomagnification— primary producer, primary consumer, secondary consumers, or tertiary consumers?
Answer: Tertiary consumers

Question 20. Name two extremely toxic metals.
Answer: Cadmium and Arsenic.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Short Answer Type Questions With Answers

Question 1. Name the major air pollutants.
Answer:

The major air pollutants.

CO2, CO, SOx, NOx, and SPM

Question 2. How is the ozone hole formed?
Answer:

Formation of the ozone hole

The nascent chlorine liberated from industrial sources reacts with oxygen in the stratosphere to produce oxides of chlorine. This results in the prevention of ozone layer formation and thinning of the ozone layer causing ozone hole.

Question 3. What is the positive impact of the greenhouse effect?
Answer:

The positive impact of the greenhouse effect

The greenhouse effect in the world has created a suitable environment for the Earth to sustain life. Without naturally occurring greenhouse gases, the earth’s average temperature would be -18°C instead of the much warmer 15°C.

Thus the greenhouse effect keeps the earth warm enough to sustain life.

Question 4. Give examples (two each) of simple and complex biodegradable pollutants.
Answer:

Simple biodegradable pollutants: Domestic wastes, fecal matter

Complex biodegradable pollutants: Polymeric resins, synthetic persistent pesticides.

Question 5. What is photochemical smog?
Answer:

Photochemical smog

Water vapor, particulates, ozone, various hydrocarbons, and oxides of nitrogen react with each other in the presence of sunlight to create photochemical smog or oxidizing type of pollutants.

Radioactive waste, sewage, DDT, agricultural waste Sewage, and agricultural waste.

Causes And Effects Of Pollution Class 10

Question 6. What is eutrophication?
Answer:

Eutrophication

The addition of excess nutrients to a water body results in the overgrowth of algal forms causing an increase in BOD and killing of aquatic fauna including fish. This overgrowth of algae is known as eutrophication.

This prevents oxygen from getting into the water, making it hypoxic and creating a dead zone where no organisms can survive.

Question 7. What is the non-target effect?
Answer:

Non-target effect

The application of excess pesticide in a plant body results in its accumulation in the soil, which results in the killing of friendly organisms in the soil and a reduction in soil fertility, this is called the non-target effect.

In a paddy field, paddy pests may be the target organism but earthworms, rhizobium, etc are nontarget organisms. Indiscriminate use of pesticides kills target as well as non-target organisms.

Question 8. Explain BOD.
Answer:

BOD

The amount of biodegradable organics present in water is indirectly measured in terms of the requirement of oxygen in the microbial degradation process which is called BOD or Biological Oxygen Demand.

Polluted water contains biodegradable organics such as starch, fat, alcohol, esters, etc. Microbial degradation of these materials occurs through oxidation that lowers the dissolved oxygen level In water.

The higher the concentration of biodegradable organics In water, the less the concentration of dissolved oxygen In It.

Question 9. Mention the effects of acid rain. The damages of acid palpitation are as follows :
Answer:

The effects of acid rain

The corrosive action of the acid content in the rain damages buildings, steel, and stone structures.

Acid precipitation affects aquatic ecosystems, microbial communities, and mineral cycles.

Disturbs the soil chemistry. Low pH causes the release of toxic metals and trace elements which undergo biomagnification In living organisms.

An excessive amount of hydrogen ions adversely affects biological membranes, the electron transport system, and several pH-specific biochemical reactions.

Question 10. Briefly mention the effects of biomagnification. Effects of biomagnification:
Answer:

Impact On Human Health: 

Humans become more susceptible to cancers, liver & kidney failures, respiratory disorders, brain damage, and heart diseases due to mercury, cadmium, lead, cobalt, and other chemical poisoning.

For instance, diseases like hepatitis and cancer happen due to the consumption of seafood that is poisoned by mercury and PAHs.

Effect on reproduction & development of marine creatures:

Seabird eggs are laid with thinner shells than normal and can result in birds crushing their eggs instead of incubating them. Selenium and mercury destroy the reproductive organs of fish.

Disruption Of the Food Chain: 

Many sea creatures depend on the natural food chain for survival.

When chemicals and toxins are carried into soils, rivers, lakes, or oceans and taken up by various organisms, it disrupts the interconnected relationships within the food chain.

This happens when small animals ingest or plants absorb the toxic elements after which they are eaten by bigger animals, consequently affecting the entire natural food chain.

The creatures or plants are intoxicated with chemicals such as mercury, copper, chromium, cobalt, etc may be consumed by humans and top animals in the food chain leading to susceptibility to diseases, reproductive disorders, and even death.

Causes And Effects Of Pollution Class 10

Destruction Of Coral Reefs: 

Coral reefs are destroyed by cyanide which is used in leaching gold and in fishing. When destroyed, the survival of aquatic creatures is highly compromised.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environmental Pollution Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Define pollution. What is anthropogenic pollution? Give examples of two greenhouse gases.
Answer:

Types Of Pollution

The common pollution problems that we have to face can be classified in three ways –

According to the component of the environment that is being polluted; for example-

  1. Air pollution,
  2. Water pollution and
  3. Land (soil) pollution.

According to the physical nature of the pollutant; for example-

  1. Gaseous pollution,
  2. Dust pollution,
  3. Noise pollution,
  4. Thermal pollution,
  5. Radioactive pollution etc.

According To Origin:

Pollution can be classified into two broad groups – natural and artificial or anthropogenic (manmade).

1. Natural pollutions are those which originate from natural processes e.g., forest fires, volcanic eruptions, dust storms, natural organic and inorganic decays, the release of microbes, pollens, spores, etc.

2. Artificial or anthropogenic pollution is that whthatriginate due to activities of man; for example industrial pollution, agricultural pollution, automobile pollution, domestic pollution, etc.

3. The anthropogenic polpollutione isajor problem because they are increasing day by day due to overpopulation.

Among the various man-made pollution problems, the largest ones are air pollution, water pollution, soil pollution, noise pollution, and radioactive pollution because these are very common (i.e., frequently occurring) and they produce deleterious effects on a vast population.

Air Pollution Definition

Any adverse change in the composition of the atmosphere that occurs due to the activities of man or some natural event and endangers human life is called air pollution or atmospheric pollution.

Causes And Effects Of Air Pollution

Causes-

Greenhouse Gases:

1. CO2, CH4/ water vapor, N2O, SF6, and CFC are liberated from different industrial sources and have different grades of global warming potential (GWP) when they are compared concerning CO2, which has a GWP of 1.

2. CO2, NO2, SO2, and hydrocarbons from automobile and industrial sources.

3. SPM (Suspended Particulate Matter), which are of two types SPM10 (diameter of 10μ and SPM2.5μ (diameter of 2.5μ liberated from automobile exhaust, building dust, etc.

They may be fibrous material of plant or animal origin, fly ash particles, oil particles, or fungal spores.

Effects-

1. Green House Effect:

GHGs absorb shorter UV rays of the sun and also those which are reflected from the Earth’s surface causing elevation of global temperature,

Global Warming:

It results in the melting of ice and snow in the permanent glaciers.

The water level in the ocean rises causing infiltration of saline water, flooding of low-lying areas, extreme reduction in agricultural productivity, and unprecedented changes in the wind and global precipitation pattern,

Effect On Biomes:

Due to the shifting of climatic belts as a consequence of global warming, vegetation would gradually also shift in the same direction to stay in favorable climatic conditions.

Those species which will be unable to do so shall die. Thus there will be losses of genetic resources on a large scale. All important biomes shall be affected.

2. Acid rain: These gases get dissolved in rainwater producing different types of acids like Carbonic acid (H2C03), Nitrous acid (HNO2) or Nitric acid (HN03), Sulphurous acid (H2SO3) or Sulphuric acid (H2SO4), etc.

The acid-laden aerosols come downwards as acid precipitation or acid rain. Acid rain is corrosive affects aquatic ecosystems, causes disbalance to mineral cycles, kills soil microbes by changing their pH, and damages monuments, plants, etc.

Oxides of nitrogen are responsible for the formation of peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN) and peroxybenzoyl nitrate (PBN) which cause acute irritation of eyes and respiratory problems.

NO2 may cause pulmonary edema besides being an important constituent of photochemical smog.

NO is responsible for the depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer.

Sulphar retards photosynthesis and inhibits carbon assimilation. Plants exposed to SO2 for long durations suffer from necrosis and interveinal chlorosis.

SO2 is capable of causing the thickening of the mucous layer of the trachea, bronchial constriction, and hypertrophy of mucous glands.

Hydrocarbons in excess cause necrosis of leaves, chlorosis of floral buds, irritation of mucous membranes, and bronchial constriction. Many hydrocarbons are known to have carcinogenic properties.

3. SPM reduces visibility and prevents the sun rays from entering the atmosphere reducing photosynthetic productivity,

They may also cause lung diseases like chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) and other respiratory distress like apnoea, dyspnoea, or difficulty in breathing.

It may damage the surfactant in the lining of alveolate and induce respiratory distress syndrome,

SPM is also capable of causing various types of allergies.

Types Of Pollution Class 10

Question 2. List out the major causes of air pollution. Mention two source control methods to check air pollution.
Answer:

Air Pollution Definition

Any adverse change in the composition of the atmosphere that occurs due to the activities of man or some natural event and endangers human life is called air pollution or atmospheric pollution.

Causes And Effects Of Air Pollution

Causes-

Greenhouse Gases:

1. CO2, water vapor, N2O, SF6, and CFC are liberated from different industrial sources and have different grades of global warming potential (GWP) when they are compared wconcerningCO2, which has a GWP of 1.

2. CO2, NO2, SO2, and hydrocarbons from automobile and industrial sources.

3. SPM (Suspended Particulate Matter), which are of two types SPM10 (diameter of 10μ and SPM2.5μ (diameter of 2.5μ liberated from automobile exhaust, building dust, etc.

They may be fibrous material of plant or animal origin, fly ash particles, oil particles, or fungal spores.

Effects-

1. Green House Effect:

GHGs absorb shorter UV rays of the sun and also those which are reflected from the Earth’s surface causing elevation of global temperature,

Global Warming:

It results in the melting of ice and snow in the permanent glaciers.

The water level in the ocean rises causing infiltration of saline water, flooding of low-lying areas, extreme reduction in agricultural productivity, and unprecedented changes in the wind and global precipitation pattern,

Effect On Biomes:

Due to the shifting of climatic belts as a consequence of global warming, vegetation would gradually also shift in the same direction to stay in favorable climatic conditions.

Those species which will be unable to do so shall die. Thus there will be losses of genetic resources on a large scale. All important biomes shall be affected.

2. Acid rain: These gases get dissolved in rainwater producing different types of acids like Carbonic acid (H2C03), Nitrous acid (HNO2) or Nitric acid (HN03), Sulphurous acid (H2SO3) or Sulphuric acid (H2SO4), etc.

The acid-laden aerosols come downwards as acid precipitation or acid rain. Acid rain is corrosive affects aquatic ecosystems, causes disbalance to mineral cycles, kills soil microbes by changing their pH, and damages monuments, plants, etc.

Oxides of nitrogen are responsible for the formation of peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN) and peroxybenzoyl nitrate (PBN) which cause acute irritation of eyes and respiratory problems.

NO2 may cause pulmonary edema besides being an important constituent of photochemical smog.

NO is responsible for the depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer.

Sulphar retards photosynthesis and inhibits carbon assimilation. Plants exposed to SO2 for long durations suffer from necrosis and interveinal chlorosis.

SO2 is capable of causing the thickening of the mucous layer of the trachea, bronchial constriction, and hypertrophy of mucous glands.

Hydrocarbons in excess cause necrosis of leaves, chlorosis of floral buds, irritation of mucous membranes, and bronchial constriction. Many hydrocarbons are known to have carcinogenic properties.

3. SPM reduces visibility and prevents the sun rays from entering the atmosphere reducing photosynthetic productivity,

They may also cause lung diseases like chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) and other respiratory distress like apnoea, dyspnoea, or difficulty in breathing.

It may damage the surfactant in the lining of alveolate and induce respiratory distress syndrome,

SPM is also capable of causing various types of allergies

Question 3. What are the effects of water pollution? Does noise pollution affect animals? Explain. 
Answer:

Water pollution Definition

Water pollution is the phenomenon in which water is rendered unsuitable for consumption by man and other animals or habitation of aquatic plants and animals due to the mixing of any poisonous material or pollutant with it.

Causes And Effects Of Water Pollution

Causes-

1. Agricultural Runoff:

It includes pesticides, herbicides, phosphate and nitrate fertilizer, and other mixed organic pollutants including different phosphates and nitrates that are washed down by either rainwater or Irrigation water to nearby low-lying lakes and other water bodies.

2. Sewage disposal:

The sewage water contains some pathogens like Vibrio cholera, Micrococcus, Salmonella type, etc.

3. Industrial discharge and oil contamination

Effects-

The deposition of excess nutrients in the water bodies results in eutrophication causing an increase in BOD (Biochemical Oxygen Demand) and algal bloom.

It also increases COD, which oxidizes different chemical compounds and thereby reduces the DO (dissolved oxygen) killing aquatic life including fish.

The increase in sewage level causes contamination of water by different pathogenic organisms that cause cholera, gastroenteritis, and typhoid. The problem becomes more acute due to poor sanitation.

  1. Leads to an abundance of microbes.
  2. Creates a deficit of oxygen in aquatic systems.
  3. Algal blooms are created.d
  4. Causes an increase in toxic trace elements.

Reduction of growth:

Pesticides have some direct harmful effects on plants including poor root hair development, shoot yellow, ng, and reduced plant growth.

Effect On Animals:

Reduction in biodiversity:

Pesticides inflict extremely widespread damage to biota.

Reduction In Animal Feed:

Widespread application of pesticides can eliminate food sources that certain types of animals need, causing the animals to relocate, change their diet, or starve.

Food chain effect:

Poisoning from pesticides can travel up the food chain; for example, birds can be harmed when they eat insects and worms that have consumed pesticides.

The killing of earthworms:

The earthworms are killed, which reduces soil fertility. The pesticide also can accumulate in these organisms, which gets into the body of the predators.

Killing Of Birds:

In England, the use of pesticides in gardens and farmland has seen a reduction in the number of Common Chaffinches. About 72 million birds are killed by pesticides in the United States each year.

Bald eagles are common examples of non-target organisms that are impacted by pesticide use. Rachel Carson’s landmark book Silent Spring dealt with the loss of bird species due to the bioaccumulation of pesticides in their tissues.

Thinning of eggshell:

DDT-induced eggshell thinning has especially affected European and North American bird populations.

The herbicide paraquat (dipyridylium), when sprayed onto bird eggs, causes growth abnormalities in embryos and reduces the number of chicks that hatch successfully.

Additionally, it causes an increase in the amount of pesticides through the phenomenon called biomagnification.

Biomagnification simply denotes enhancement in the concentration of a particular substance (such as a toxic chemical) in the tissues of tolerant organisms at successively higher levels along the food chain.

By this method, a toxic substance enters the food chain at a very low concentration and as it moves up into the consumers of the higher trophic level, its concentration increases, which might induce lethality in these animals.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic B Environmental Pollution barker

Types Of Pollution Class 10

At each level of the food chain, more than half the biomass is lost through excretion, respiration, and decay; but most of the toxic substances (such as DDT) are retained since DDT is metabolized and excreted much more slowly than other nutrients.

Thus DDT accumulates in the bodies (especially in fat) and as a result, becomes highly concentrated in carnivores. This is why the hazard of DDT to nontarget animals is particularly acute for those species living at the top of food chains.

This phenomenon can operate both in terrestrial as well as aquatic ecosystems.

Barker in 1958 showed that the concentration of DDT in the soil below elm trees is 10 ppm, and the earthworm contained 86 ppm of DDT. The Robin bird died after consuming 11-12 such earthworms and the liver of the dead bird showed 744 ppm of DDT, while their brain showed 250 ppm of DDT.

Woodwell (1967) showed 0.002 ppm of DDT in the body of zooplanktons, it increased to 2.07 ppm in the body of needle fishes and 75.5 ppm in the body of fish-eating gulls.

Thus, the adverse effect of DDT is felt in the body of higher consumers by the phenomenon of biomagnification.

Effect On Human Beings:

Similar biomagnification can be observed in the case of heavy metals like mercury causing Minamata disease, and lead causing anemia in mammals.

Humans become more susceptible to cancers, liver and kidney failure, respiratory disorders, birth defects in pregnant women, and Brain damage and heart diseases as a result of mercury, cadmium, lead, cobalt, chromium, and other chemical poisonings.

For instance, diseases like hepatitis and cancer have been attributed to consuming seafood that has Been poisoned by mercury and aromatic hydrocarbons.

Question 4. What is soil pollution? Discuss its effects on animals in brief.
Answer:

Soil Pollution

  1. Reduction of synthetic pesticides.
  2. Using organic manure.
  3. Use of biofertilizer.
  4. Adoption of biological control.
  5. Use of genetically modified crops that can resist insect pests, like Bt cotton

Question 5. Mention two causes of noise pollution. How does it affect human beings? What is acoustic zoning?
Answer:

Noise Pollution  Definition

An increase of noise i.e., unwanted and loud sound which is displeasing to the ear, in the surroundings is called noise pollution or sound pollution.

Control of Noise Pollution

Control At Receiver’s End:

For people working in noisy installations, ear-protection aids like earplugs, ear-muffs, noise helmets, headphones, etc. must be provided to reduce occupational exposure.

Suppression of Noise at Source:

This is possible if working methods are improved by:

Designing, fabricating, and using quieter machines to replace the noisy ones.

Proper lubrication and better maintenance of machines.

Installing noisy machines in soundproof chambers.

Covering noise-producing machine parts with sound-absorbing materials to check noise production.

Reducing the noise produced by a vibrating machine by vibration damping i.e. making a layer of damping material (rubber, neoprene, cork, or plastic) beneath the machine.

Using silencers to control noise from automobiles, ducts, exhausts, etc., and conveyor systems with ends opening into the atmosphere.

Use glass wool or mineral wool covered with a sheet of perforated metal for mechanical protection.

Acoustic Zoning:

Increased distance between source and receiver by the zoning of noisy industrial areas, bus terminals, railway stations, aerodromes, etc.

Being away from the residential areas would go a long way in minimizing noise pollution. There should be silence zones near residential areas, educational institutions, and above all, hospitals.

The permissible noise levels in different types of localities are:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic B Environmental Pollution locality

Sound Insulation at Construction Stages:

  1. Sound travels through the cracks that get left between the door and the wall. To reduce noise, this space (jamb frame gap) should be packed with sound-absorbing material.
  2. Sound insulation can be done by constructing windows with double or triple panes of glass and filling the gaps with sound-absorbing materials.
  3. Acoustical tiles, hair felt, perforated plywood, etc., can be fixed on walls, ceilings, floors, etc., to reduce noise (especially for soundproof recording rooms, etc.)

Planting of Trees:

Planting green trees and shrubs along roads, hospitals, educational institutions, etc., helps in noise reduction to a considerable extent.

Legislative Measures:

Strict legislative measures need to be enforced to curb the menace of noise pollution.

Some of these measures could be:

  1. Minimum use of loudspeakers and amplifiers especially near silence zones.
  2. Banning pressure horns in automobiles.
  3. Framing and implementation of a strict Noise Pollution Act.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. An inflammable greenhouse gas produced from paddy fields is______________.
Answer: Methane (CH4).

Question 2. The fine droplets of smoke, ashes, dust, pollen grains, etc, are suspended in the air, collectively called which causes various lung diseases.
Answer: Suspended Particulate Matters (SPM).

WBBSE Chapter 5 Write True Or False

Question 1. A degradable pollutant is responsible for biomagnification.
Answer: False

Question 2. Acid rain is caused by SO2 and NO2 gases formed due to air pollution.
Answer: True

WBBSE Chapter 5 Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find it out and write it: Pesticides used in agriculture, Typhoid, Water pollution, liquid wastes from factories.
Answer: Water pollution.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle

WBBSE Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Nitrogen Cycle

Introduction to Nitrogen Cycle:

Nitrogen was originally formed in the hearts of stars through the process of nuclear fusion.

When ancient stars exploded, they flung nitrogen-containing gases across the universe. When the earth was formed, nitrogen was a main ingredient in its atmosphere.

The present-day earth’s atmosphere is composed of about 78% nitrogen, about 21% oxygen, and about 1% other gases.

This is an ideal balance because too much Oxygen can be toxic to cells as well as being highly flammable.

Nitrogen, on the other hand, is inert and harmless in its gaseous form.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle

Nitrogen is one of the primary nutrients critical for the survival of all living organisms since it is a necessary component of many biomolecules such as proteins, DNA, and chlorophyll.

Although nitrogen is very abundant in the atmosphere as dinitrogen gas (N2), it is largely inaccessible in this form to most organisms, making nitrogen a scarce resource and often limiting primary productivity in many ecosystems.

This is because of the strong triple bond between the N atoms in N2 molecules (NN) that makes it relatively inert, whereas organisms need reactive nitrogen to be able to incorporate it into cells.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

For plants and animals to be able to use nitrogen, N2 gas must first be converted to a more chemically available form such as ammonium (NH4+), nitrate (NO3), or organic nitrogen (such as urea).

Thus, nitrogen undergoes many different transformations in the ecosystem, changing from one form to another as organisms use it for growth and in some cases, energy.

The movement of nitrogen between the atmosphere, biosphere, and geosphere in different forms is called the nitrogen cycle.

As a major biogeochemical cycle, the nitrogen cycle consists of various reservoirs of nitrogen and processes by which those reservoirs exchange nitrogen.

Nitrogen Cycle Class 10

The nitrogen cycle is the biogeochemical cycle by which nitrogen is converted into multiple chemical forms as it circulates among the atmosphere, and terrestrial and marine ecosystems keeping the balance between the gaseous nitrogen and its form that is useful in biological processes.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

The different stages of the nitrogen cycle, which are not altogether sequential, fall into the following classifications:

1. Nitrogen fixation
2. Nitrogen assimilation (ie. nitrogen uptake through organismal growth)
3. Ammonification (ie., nitrogen mineralization through decay)
4. Nitrification
5. Denitrification.

Illustrates the above stages simply:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic A Nitrogen Cycle atmospheric

Microorganisms, particularly bacteria, play major roles in all of the principal nitrogen transformations.

Because these processes are microbially mediated, or controlled by microorganisms, these nitrogen transformations tend to occur faster than geological processes like plate motion which is a part of the carbon cycle.

The rates are affected by environmental factors that influence microbial activity, such as temperature, moisture, and resource availability.

The involvement of prokaryotes in the nitrogen cycle can be shown by a simple.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic A Nitrogen Cycle Nitrogen cycle

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Nitrogen Fixation

Any natural or industrial process that involves the conversion of atmospheric nitrogen to ammonia and water-soluble nitrites or nitrates which is metabolized by most organisms is referred to as nitrogen fixation.

It can be of three types:

1. Natural or Atmospheric
2. Biological
3. Industrial

About 10% of natural nitrogen fixation takes place by physiochemical methods and 90% by biological methods.

Natural or Atmospheric nitrogen fixation: The fixation of atmospheric nitrogen is a very energy-intensive endeavor.

Under the influence of lightning and thunder, N2 and O2 in the air react to form nitric oxide (NO).

The nitric oxides are again oxidized with oxygen to form different nitrogen oxides.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic A Nitrogen

 

During the rains, NO, combines with rainwater to form nitrous acid (HNO2) and nitric acid (HNO3). The acids fall on the soil along with rain water and react with the alkaline radicals to form water-soluble nitrates \(\left(\mathrm{NO}_3{ }^{-}\right)\) and nitrites \(\left(\mathrm{NO}_2^{-}\right)\)

\(2 \mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \longrightarrow \mathrm{HNO}_2+\mathrm{HNO}_3
(Rainwater)\) \(\mathrm{HNO}_3+\mathrm{Ca} \text { or K Salts } \longrightarrow \text { Ca or K nitrates }
(In soil) \quad (Soluble in water)
\)

The nitrates are soluble in water and as a result, are directly absorbed by the roots of the plants.

Biological nitrogen fixation:

The conversion of molecular nitrogen in the atmosphere into organic nitrogenous compounds through the agency of some living organisms like bacteria and cyanobacteria with the help of an enzyme called nitrogenase is called biological nitrogen fixation.

The action of nitrogenase requires cofactors like iron and molybdenum. Nitrogenase is destroyed in the presence of Oxygen, so these organisms are either anaerobic in nature or they remove oxygen from the site of nitrogenase.

Nitrogen Cycle Class 10

The process of nitrogen fixation involves the conversion of nitrogen to ammonia by gradual reduction. This ammonia is directly used by the organisms to produce complex proteins.

Nitrogen fixers:

Only certain bacteria, some blue-green algae, and leguminous plants Nitrogen fixers:

Only certain bacteria, etc can fix atmospheric nitrogen.

The different types of nitrogen-fixing organisms are represented in the table below:

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic A Nitrogen Cycle Nitrogen fixes diazotrophs

Mechanism of nonsymbiotic biological N2-fixation:

It requires the presence of hydrogenase and nitrogenase enzyme systems, ferredoxin (a non-heme iron protein) as an electron carrier, pyruvate (an electron donor & energy source), and cofactors like Thiamine Pyro Phosphate, coenzyme-A, inorganic phosphate, and Mg+.

The breakdown of pyruvate produces acetyl phosphate and electrons.

Ferridoxin accepts electrons and gets reduced. [Mechanism of Symbiotic Biological Nitrogen Fixation:]

Acetyl phosphate reacts with ADP to generate ATP.

In the presence of reduced ferredoxin and ATP, nitrogen is absorbed on the surface of the enzyme nitrogenase.

Electrons are now transferred to N2.

Reduction of nitrogen takes place and the enzyme is set free only when nitrogen has been completely reduced to ammonia.

Mechanism Of Symbiotic Biological Nitrogen Fixation:

Symbiotic nitrogen fixation occurs in plants that harbor nitrogen-fixing bacteria within their tissues. The best-studied example is the association between legumes and bacteria in the genus Rhizobium.

Rhizobia are Gram-negative bacilli that live freely in the soil (especially where legumes have been grown). However, they cannot fix atmospheric nitrogen until they have invaded the roots of the appropriate legume.

The Infection Thread

The interaction between a particular strain of rhizobia and the “appropriate” legume is mediated by the “Nod factor” secreted by the rhizobia and transmembrane receptors on the cells of the root hairs of the legume.

Different strains of rhizobia produce different Nod factors, and different legumes produce receptors of different specificity.

If the combination is correct, the bacteria enter an epithelial cell of the root and then migrate into the cortex. Their path runs within an intracellular channel that grows through one cortex cell after another.

This infection thread is constructed by the root cells, not the bacteria, and is formed only in response to the infection.

When the infection thread reaches a cell deep in the cortex, it bursts and the rhizobia are engulfed by endocytosis into membrane-enclosed symbiosomes within the cytoplasm.

At this time the cell goes through several rounds of mitosis without cytokinesis so the cell becomes polyploid. The cortex cells then begin to divide rapidly forming a nodule.

This response is driven by the translocation of cytokinins from epidermal cells to the cells of the cortex.

The rhizobia also go through a period of rapid multiplication within the nodule cells. Then they begin to change shape and lose their motility.

The bacteroids, as they are now called, may almost fill the cell. Only now does nitrogen fixation begin.

Root nodules are not simply structureless masses of cells. Each becomes connected by the xylem and phloem to the vascular system of the plant.

Thus the development of nodules, while dependent on rhizobia, is a well-coordinated developmental process of the plant. In addition, the legume host supplies one critical component of nitrogenase —the key enzyme for fixing nitrogen.

The bacteroids need oxygen to make their ATP (by cellular respiration). However, nitrogenase is strongly inhibited by oxygen. Nodules are filled with hemoglobin.

So much of it, in fact, that a freshly-cut nodule is red.

The hemoglobin of the legume (called leghaemoglobin), like the hemoglobin of vertebrates, probably supplies just the right concentration of oxygen to the bacteroids to satisfy their conflicting requirements.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Nitrogen Cycle

The metal molybdenum is a critical component of nitrogenase and so is absolutely essential for nitrogen fixation. The whole process of nitrogen fixation is controlled by nef genes.

Because of the specificity of the interaction between the Nod factor and the receptor on the legume, some strains of rhizobia will infect only peas, some only clover, some only alfalfa, etc.

The treating of legume seeds with the proper strain of rhizobia is a routine agricultural practice.

Industrial Nitrogen Fixation:

The industrial production of ammonia is carried out by mixing nitrogen and hydrogen at high temperatures and pressure (i.e. about 150-250 millibar and 400- 500°C).

The process known as the Haber-Bosch process, requires an iron catalyst (magnetite or Fe304) which removes oxygen from the environment.

\(\mathrm{N}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{NH}_3\)

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Nitrogen Assimilation

Nitrogen assimilation is the formation of organic nitrogen compounds like amino acids from inorganic nitrogen compounds present in the environment.

Plants absorb nitrogen from the soil in the form of nitrate (NO3+) and ammonium (NH4+). In aerobic soils, nitrate is usually the predominant form of available nitrogen that is absorbed.

Ammonia can predominate in grasslands and in flooded, anaerobic soils. Both ammonium and nitrate are taken up by plants by using several transporters.

Nitrogen is transported from the root to the shoot via the xylem in the form of nitrate, dissolved ammonia, and amino acids.

Nitrate is reduced to nitrite by the enzyme nitrate reductase and nitrite is then reduced to ammonia in a series of two-electron transfers by nitrite reductase.

Ammonia (both absorbed and synthesized) is incorporated into amino acids via the GS- GOGAT pathway.

\(\mathrm{NO}_3^{-} \underset{2 e^{-}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_2^{-} \underset{6 e^{-}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NH}_3\)

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Ammonification

The process is also called nitrogen mineralization, which involves the conversion of complex organic nitrogenous compounds present in the dead bodies of plants and animals to ammonium ions.

It is essentially carried out by an array of bacteria present in the soil like Bacillus ramosus, Bacillus vulgaris, Bacillus my codes, etc. in the presence of enzymes like GS, GOGAT, GDH, etc.

The ammonia released in the soil changes the soil pH and reduces the toxic acidophilic bacteria. This ammonia becomes the substrate for the nitrifying bacteria, which ultimately increases soil fertility.

Amino acid + Oxygen→ Keto acid + Ammonia

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Nitrogen Cycle

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Nitrification

The stagewise microbial conversion of ammonium ion to nitrite and then nitrite to nitrate is called nitrification.
The process occurs in two steps.

The first step is Nitritation, carried out by Nitrosomonas. \(\mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

The second step is called Nitratation, carried out by Nitrobacter. \(\mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{NO}_3\)

Some soil conditions controlling nitrification rates are:

  1. Substrate availability (ie., presence of NH4+)
  2. Availability of 02 (c) Soil drainage
  3. Soil pH
  4. Soil temperature

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Denitrification

The process involves the reduction of soil nitrate to nitrogen gas by bacteria like Bacillus denitrificans, Thiobacillus denitrificans, Paracoccus denitrificans, Micrococcus, Thiobacillus thiolates, Pseudomonas, etc.

Denitrifying microbes require a very low oxygen concentration as well as organic C for energy. More than one enzymatic pathway has been identified in the reduction process.

The denitrification process may generate a series of oxides of nitrogen, which also includes N2O, which is a greenhouse gas and may cause global warming.

\(2 \mathrm{NO}_3^{-} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO} \rightarrow \mathrm{N}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{N}_2\)

Steps Of Nitrogen Cycle Class 10

Direct reduction from nitrate to ammonium compounds is possible, which is also called dissimilatory nitrate reduction (DNRA), which is carried out by bacteria like Alcaligenes, Bradyrhizobium, etc.

Some genes known in microorganisms that denitrify include nir, nos, etc.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Diagrammatic Sketch Of The Nitrogen Cycle

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic A Nitrogen Cycle Diagrammatic Sketch Of The Nitrogen Cycle

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Significance Of The Nitrogen Cycle

There are several importance of the nitrogen cycle which are mentioned below:

The nitrogen cycle brings in the inert nitrogen from the air into the biochemical process in plants and then to animals.

Plants need nitrogen to synthesize chlorophyll and so the nitrogen cycle is absolutely essential for them.

During ammonification, the bacteria help degrade decomposing animal and plant matter. This helps in naturally cleaning up the environment.

Due to the nitrogen cycle, nitrates and nitrites are released into the soil which helps in enriching the soil with nutrients needed for cultivation.

Animals obtain nitrogenous compounds from plants. Nitrogen is needed as an integral part of cell composition. It is due to the nitrogen cycle that animals are also able to utilize the nitrogen present in the air.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Human Activities And Nitrogen Cycle

Human activities have greatly influenced the nitrogen cycle. The increase in the global population has necessitated an increase in the production of food.

This is mainly done by the addition of nitrogen-enriched fertilizer including urea in the soil, which has resulted in the liberation of more nitrogenous compounds in nature. This has affected the global ecosystem in the following ways:

The increased generation of nitrous oxide (N2O) results in global warming and increased melting of permafrost causing elevation of water levels in the sea and ocean.

Elevation in the level of NO and NO2 due to the burning of fossil fuel results in acid rain, which damages the leaf surface reducing the photosynthetic productivity, reducing soil pH and fertility of the soil, and damaging buildings and monuments.

This increases the population of acidophilic bacteria, which may cause pathogenicity in animals including human beings.

Steps Of Nitrogen Cycle Class 10

The reduction in the pH of water bodies including streams and lakes and the discharge of agricultural runoff containing excess nitrates cause the destruction of aquatic fauna including fish.

The acidic pH of water damages the pipeline and also the drainage system.

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The percentage of Nitrogen in the atmosphere is____________________
Answer: 78%

Question 2. The bio-geochemical cycle include oxygen, carbon and____________________ .
Answer: Nitrogen

Question 3. The protein sub units are called____________________ .
Answer: Amino acid

Question 4. Nostoc is a____________________ that fixes nitrogen.
Answer: Cyanobacteria

Question 5. The percentage of nitrogen in protein is____________________ .
Answer: 16%

Question 6.____________________ is synthesized during lightning.
Answer: No

Nitrogen Cycle Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. Ammonia to nitrate conversion is called____________________.
Answer: Nitrification

Question 8. NO to NO2 conversion occurs by____________________ .
Answer: Oxidation

Question 9. Leg-haemoglobin transports____________________ .
Answer: Oxygen

Question 10. ____________________ causes ammonification.
Answer: Bacillus mycoides

Question 11. HN03 reacts with calcium of rock to produce____________________ .
Answer: calcium nitrate

Question 12. During acid rain, the common acids formed are sulfurous and ____________________acid.
Answer: Nitrous

Question 13. The Alnus nodule contains____________________ .
Answer: Frankia

Question 14. Nitrogen is____________________ to ammonia during .
Answer: Reduced Nitrogen fixation

Question 15. ____________________ is a denitrifying bacteria.
Answer: Pseudomonas

Question 16. The smog is created by which forms ____________________.
Answer: NO2 Pan (Peroxy Acettl Nitrate)

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Match The Column

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic A Nitrogen Cycle match the column
Answer: 1-C,2-D,3-A,4-B

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 5 Environment Its Resources And Their Conservation Topic A Nitrogen Cycle match the column2
Answer: 1-C,2-D,3-A,4-B

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Write True Or False

Question 1. Nitrogen is directly absorbed from nature by higher organisms.
Answer: False

Question 2. The plant absorbs nitrate from the soil.
Answer: True

Question 3. Pseudomonas helps in nitrification.
Answer: False

Question 4. Fertilizer contains N, P, and K.
Answer: True

Question 5. Protoplasm contains inorganic nitrogen.
Answer: False

Question 6. Bacillus ramosus is a nitrifying bacteria.
Answer: False

Question 7. Anabaena is a nitrogen-fixing bacteria.
Answer: False

Question 8. Thiobacillus is a denitrifying bacteria.
Answer: True

Nitrogen Cycle Class 10 MCQs

Question 9. The atmosphere contains 78% nitrogen
Answer: True

Question 10. Nitrogen dioxide is a greenhouse gas.
Answer: False

Question 11. Azotobacter is a free-living nitrogen-fixing bacteria.
Answer: True

Question 12. Oxygen is a poison for nitrogenase enzymes.
Answer: True

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Name endophytic cyanobacteria.
Answer: Anabaena azollae.

Question 2. Name two free-living nitrogen-fixing bacteria.
Answer: Azotobacter and Clostridium.

Question 3. Which bacteria convert Ammonia to nitrite?
Answer: Nitros monas.

Question 4. Name the most important compound containing nitrogen in the cytosol.
Answer: Amino acid.

Question 5. Name the enzyme that fixes atmospheric nitrogen.
Answer: Nitrogenase.

Question 6. Name the red-colored pigment present in the nodule of the leguminous plant.
Answer: Leg-haemoglobin (Lb).

Question 7. What amount of ATP is needed to fix one molecule of N2?
Answer: 16 ATP.

Question 8. What is the name of a nitrogen-fixing gene?
Answer: if gene.

Question 9. Name two gram-ve nitrogen-fixing bacteria.
Answer: Klebsiella and Rhizobium.

Question 10. Name the co-factor for nitrogenase.
Answer: Fe and Mo.

Nitrogen Cycle Class 10 MCQs

Question 11. What are diazotrophs?
Answer: The nitrogen-fixing bacteria and archaea are together called diazotrophs.

Question 12. State the equation for biological nitrogen fixation.
Answer: \(\mathrm{N}_2+8 \mathrm{H}^{+}+8 \mathrm{e} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{H}_2\)

Question 13. Name a marine cyanobacterium fixing nitrogen.
Answer: Trichodesmium.

Question 14. Name 2 nitrogen-fixing lichen.
Answer: isobaric and Peltigera.

Question 15. Name 2 plants showing actinorhiza.
Answer: Ain us sp and Myrica sp.

Question 16. A pair of related terms is given below. Based on the relationship in the first pair, write the suitable word in the gap of the second pair.
Answer: Rhizobium: root nodule:: Klebsiella: leaf nodules

Steps Of Nitrogen Cycle Class 10

Question 17. Which one is the most predominant method of nitrogen fixation?
Answer: Biological nitrogen fixation

Question 18. Give examples (one each) of legumes that are poor fixers and good fixers of nitrogen.
Answer: Poor fixer—Common beans Good fixer—Soybeans

WBBSE Chapter 5 Nitrogen Cycle Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is the nitrogen cycle?
Answer:

Nitrogen cycle

The nitrogen cycle is the biogeochemical cycle by which nitrogen is converted into multiple chemical forms as it circulates among the atmosphere, and terrestrial and marine ecosystems keeping the balance between the gaseous nitrogen and its form that is useful in biological processes.

Question 2. What is ammonification?
Answer:

Ammonification

Ammonification, also called nitrogen mineralization, involves the conversion of complex organic nitrogenous compounds present in the dead bodies of plants and animals to ammonium ions by an array of bacteria present in soil like Bacillus ramosus, Bacillus vulgaris, etc.

Amino acid + Oxygen→ Ketoacid + Ammonia

Nitrogen Cycle Diagram Class 10

Question 3. What is nitrification?
Answer:

Nitrification

The biological degradation of ammonia to nitrite and nitrite to nitrate by bacteria like Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter is called nitrification.

\(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
& 2 \mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO}_3
\end{aligned}\)

Question 4. What is denitrification?
Answer:

Denitrification

The biological conversion of soil-borne nitrite or nitrate to nitrogen gas by bacteria like Pseudomonas is called denitrification.

\(2 \mathrm{NO}_3^{-} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO} \rightarrow \mathrm{N}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{N}_2\)

Question 5. What is Haber-Bosch process?
Answer:

Haber-Bosch process

The chemical process of generating ammonia by mixing nitrogen and hydrogen under high temperatures (400-500 °C) and pressure (about 150-250 millibar) in the presence of an iron catalyst is called the Haber-Bosch process.

\(\mathrm{N}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{NH}_3\)

Question 6. What are the constituents of NOx?
Answer:

The constituents of NOx

NO, NO2, and N2O.

Question 7. What is the role of diazotrophs in the nitrogen cycle?
Answer:

The role of diazotrophs in the nitrogen cycle

The diazotrophs are bacteria containing molybdenum or vanadium nitrogenase enzyme systems which combine nitrogen and hydrogen to produce biologically useable ammonia under normal temperature and pressure. Thus diazotrophs facilitate the consumption of nitrogen by plants by fixing them.

Question 8. How does Rhizobium develop symbiotic associations with legume plants?
Answer:

Inside the root nodules of leguminous plants, Rhizobium differentiates into bacteroids and fixes atmospheric nitrogen into ammonium using the enzyme nitrogenase.

Ammonium is then converted to amino acids before it is exported to the plant. In return, the plant supplies the bacteria with carbohydrates in the form of organic acids.

The plant also provides the bacteroid oxygen for cellular respiration, tightly bound by leghaemoglobins.

This way the symbiotic relationship of Rhizobium develops with the legume plants involving a signal exchange between both partners and the development of symbiotic structures.

Question 9. What is the role of nitrogen in the legume plant?
Answer:

The role of nitrogen in the legume plant

Nitrogen is used for protein and enzyme synthesis, amino acid and nucleic acid, and chlorophyll biosyntheses.

Thus plants with sufficient nitrogen experience high rates of photosynthesis and typically exhibit vigorous plant growth and development.

Question 10. What is biofertilizer?
Answer:

Biofertilizer

A substance containing the nitrogen-fixing free-living bacteria like Azatobacter, and Clostridium and cyanobacteria like Nostoc, and Anabaena that increases soil fertility through nitrogen fixation and thereby promotes growth by increasing the supply or availability of primary nutrients to the plant is called biofertilizer.

Biofertilizers provide eco-friendly organic agro-input since the microorganisms in them restore the soil’s natural nutrient cycle and build soil organic matter.

Importance Of Nitrogen Cycle Class 10

Question 11. Name the acids formed from nitrogenous oxides.
Answer:

Nitrous acid and nitric acid are produced from oxides of nitrogen like nitric oxide and nitrogen dioxide.

Question 12. What is Leghaemoglobin?
Answer:

Leghaemoglobin

Leghaemoglobin is an oxygen carrier and hemoprotein found in the nitrogen-fixing root nodules of leguminous plants.

It is produced by legumes only in response to the roots being colonized by nitrogen-fixing rhizobia as part of the symbiotic interaction between the plant and the bacteria.

The holoprotein (protein + heme cofactor) is red in color, has close chemical & structural similarities to hemoglobin, and has a high affinity for oxygen.

Question 13. List two main human activities that alter the nitrogen cycle.
Answer:

Two main human activities that alter the nitrogen cycle in both aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems are-

  1. Burning of fossil fuels
  2. Application of nitrogen-based fertilizers in agriculture which often ends up in a runoff

Question 14. List out the sources of nitrogen to plants. Sources of nitrogen to plants:
Answer:

  1. Atmospheric molecular nitrogen
  2. Nitrates, nitrites & ammonia in the soil
  3. Aminoacids (organic nitrogen) in soil
  4. Small insects (in the case of insectivorous plants)

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation

WBBSE Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation Introduction To The Concept Of Adaptation

Living organisms have to continuously react directly to the environments in which they grow and survive.

As the environment changes rapidly, to survive in those changed conditions, living organisms have to undergo modifications accordingly.

Modifications or changes allow an organism to better adapt to its environment and help it to survive and have more offspring. Otherwise, there is a chance of extinction.

These modifications which make the species best fitted to its environment are called adaptations. Organisms adapting themselves to new environments undergo genetic mutations to produce new varieties of offspring through the process of natural selection.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation

This process, happening over successive generations, results in evolution. Thus adaptation is the cause and evolution is the effect.

The permanent morphological, physiological, and behavioral modifications, that occur within an organism to enable it to survive successfully within a particular environmental condition, are known as adaptations.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

Adaptations can be morphological or anatomical, behavioral, and physiological. Anatomical or morphological adaptations are physical features such as an animal’s shape.

Behavioral adaptations can be inherited or learned and include tool use, language, and swarming behavior. Physiological adaptations include the ability to make venom; but also more general functions such as temperature regulation etc.

The types of adaptations are categorized by observable or measurable means, but genetic change is the basis of all adaptations.

Most organisms have combinations of all these types of adaptations based on how genetic changes are expressed in them to survive the new conditions.

Adaptation Class 10 Life Science

Significance Of Adaptations:

To cope with the changing environment to survive and propagate.

To enable organisms to adjust to the environment by morphological, physiological, and behavioral modifications.

To overcome the adverse conditions of the environment.

To propagate favorable modifications to the next generation to help the evolutionary process.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

Relation Between Adaptation And Evolution:

All organisms undergo adaptations to survive and thrive. Some adaptations are structural. Structural adaptations are physical features of an organism like the bill of a bird or the fur of a bear.

Other adaptations are behavioral. Behavioral adaptations are the things organisms do to survive. For example, bird calls and migration are behavioral adaptations.

Based on body chemistry and metabolism, physiological adaptations usually don’t show from the outside.

They consist of features like more efficient kidneys for desert animals like kangaroo rats, compounds that prevent blood coagulation in mosquito saliva, etc.

Adaptations are the cause of evolution.

Evolution is a change in a species over long periods.

Adaptations usually occur because a gene mutates or changes by accident Some useful mutations can help an animal or plant to survive better than others without the mutation.

For example, imagine a bird species. Suppose, one day a bird is born with a beak that is longer than the beaks of other birds in the species.

The longer beak naturally helps the bird to catch more food. Because the bird can catch more food, it is healthier than the other birds lives longer, and breeds more.

In due course, the bird passes the gene for a longer beak onto its offspring. As a result, they also live longer and have more offspring and the gene continues to be inherited generation after generation.

Eventually, it so happens that the longer beak can be found in all of the resulting species. This doesn’t, of course, happen overnight. It takes thousands of years for a mutation to be found in an entire species.

Over time, finally, the animals that are better adapted to their environment survive and breed. Animals that are not well adapted to an environment may not survive.

Adaptation Class 10 Life Science

The characteristics that help a species to survive in an environment are passed on to future generations.

Those characteristics that don’t help the species to survive slowly disappear leading to the extinction of these particular species. This is the essence of natural selection which brings about evolution.

Thus it can be summarised that since evolution is the aggregate changes to the genotype of an organism as a result of natural selection, hence evolution is the long-term effect of adaptation.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation Behavior And Adaptation

Behavioral adaptation is the process by which an organism or a species changes its pattern of action to better suit its environment, which allows better survival and reproduction.

Any behavior that helps to ensure the survival of an organism specifically, and its species generally, can be considered as a behavioral adaptation.

A behavioral adaptation is something an animal does – how it acts – usually in response to some type of external stimulus.

Examples of some behavioral adaptions are- what an animal can eat, how an animal moves, how an animal may protect itself, etc.

Animals adapt their behavior according to the requirements of the current situation.

The behavior may be learned and passed on from one generation to another or it may become an instinctive behavior passed on genetically.

A wide range of sensory organs supply the animal’s nervous system with information about the immediate environment (external cues, such as odor, sound, or visual signals), but also about the current state of the body (internal cues).

Depending on both external and internal cues, the nervous system switches modulates, or sustains the pattern of activity in its output organs to change the current behavior or to maintain it.

Some behavioral adaptations benefit the group while others benefit the individual to the detriment of the group.

Migration, for example, benefits the group because the target destination has conditions that favor the survival of the group although many individuals die due to the rigors of the journey.

By contrast, some behaviors, such as infanticide among lions, benefit only the individual. A male lion who displaces another usually kills all the offspring of the other male.

This does not enhance the survival of the group, but it causes the adult females to go into estrous and then they bear the offspring of the new leader, who ultimately benefits by the propagation of his genes.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation Examples Of Adaptation

Adaptations are of three types. Some adaptive features of different organisms are discussed below.

Morphological Adaptations:

Morphological or structural adaptations are the physical features of an organism, such as shape, body covering, armament, etc that help the organism to survive in its ecological niches.

Some examples are-

Cactus (conversion of leaf into spine or reduction in the number of leaves):

Cacti are the most common forms of xerophytes that have adaptations to survive in an environment with little liquid water, such as a desert.

The desert climate, also known as the arid climate, is a climate in which there is an excess of evaporation over precipitation.

The often bald, rocky, or sandy surfaces of arid climates evaporate the scanty precipitation so that the water level becomes very low. The problem is compounded by intense sunshine all year round.

Adaptation Class 10 Life Science

Importance of water conservation:

If the water vapor potential inside a leaf is higher than outside, the water vapor will diffuse out of the leaf down this pressure gradient. This loss of water vapor is called transpiration.

The water vapor diffuses through the open stomata. Transpiration is natural and inevitable for plants and a significant amount of water is lost through this process.

However, plants living in dry conditions must be adapted to decrease the size of the open stomata, lower the rate of transpiration, and consequently, reduce water loss to the environment.

Without sufficient water, plant cells lose turgor. This is known as plasmolysis. If the plant loses too much water, it will pass its permanent wilting point and die.

Adaptations Of Cactus:

From the point of view of plants, the rate of transpiration is governed by the number of stomata, stomatal aperture i.e., the size of the stomata opening, leaf area (allowing for more stomata), and the presence of a waxy cuticle.

In cacti, leaves are small, much less in number, scaly, and often modified into sharply pointed spines.

Lamina may be long narrow needle-like or divided into many leaflets. Spines, thorns, or needles do not bear stomata. It prevents the loss of water by transpiration.

Foliage leaves become thick fleshy and succulent or tough and leathery in texture.

The epidermis is covered with a thick cuticle to reduce the rate of transpiration.

Stomata are generally confined to the lower epidermis of leaves called hypognathous. Stomata are present in pits called sunken stomata. They are lined with hair.

Examples: Opuntia, Acacia, Aloe, etc.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation Cactus

The swim bladder of fish:

The swim bladder or air bladder is an internal gas-filled organ that contributes to the ability of a fish to control its buoyancy, and thus to stay at its current water depth without having to waste energy in swimming.

The swim bladder is connected to the gut by a small duct called the pneumatic duct.

The Role Of the Swimbladder In the Aquatic Adaptation Of Fish Is Summarised As:

It is a specially built double-chambered sac (in some fishes swim bladder is single-chambered).

The anterior sac has a gland (Red gland) to release a gas to inflate the bladder and some special tuft of capillaries (Rete mirabile) of the posterior chamber suck the gas to squeeze it.

Thus, by increasing or decreasing the gas in the swim bladder, the fish changes the buoyancy of its body and can move at different levels of water.

The dorsal position of the swim bladder lowers the center of mass below the center of volume, allowing it to act as a stabilizing agent.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation swim bladder of fish

Detailed Functions Of Swim Bladder:

The normal gaseous content of the swim bladder of fresh-water fishes near the surface is approximately that of the atmosphere.

The composition varies with the species, pressure, temperature, amounts, and kinds of dissolved gases, and with the seasons of the year.

When fishes are placed in water containing little or no oxygen, the oxygen in the swim bladder diminishes; indicating that the swim bladder may act as a reservoir from which the blood may draw oxygen in times of need.

Adaptation Class 10 Life Science

A perch is enabled to go into the water with low oxygen content without asphyxiation.

The effect of increased pressure in the surrounding water is to increase both the percentage of oxygen and carbon dioxide in the swim bladder.

If carbon dioxide is increased in the medium in which perch are living, the volume of the fish is changed and the fish automatically rise in the water.

This response would be of adaptive value, causing the fish to move out of deeper water containing larger amounts of carbon dioxide into the safer zones above.

The primary function of the swim bladder of most freshwater fishes is hydrostatic.

Perch possesses no voluntary muscular control over the size of the swim bladder.

Under conditions where high oxygen percentages are found in the swim bladder, a higher tension of the gases exists than that in the blood. This indicates an active secretion.

Under conditions where fishes are not changing their depth rapidly, the gases in the swim bladder are probably kept constant by simple diffusion of gases from the blood.

A “rete mirabile” partially surrounds the walls of the swim bladder and furnishes a rich supply of blood. It is apparently how the gases are transferred from the blood to the swim bladder.

The mechanism by which gas is secreted into the swim bladder can be explained on a chemical and physical basis. The hydrogen ion concentration of the swim bladder gland is increased by external stimulation.

This indicates the secretion of a substance by the gland which may aid in the secretion of gases into the swim bladder.

The apparent secretion of oxygen is believed to be brought about by an increased flow of blood because of the dilatation of the capillaries and increased tension of the oxygen due to the local dissociation of oxygen from oxy-hashemoglobin.

The swim bladder is a mechanism that enables the fish to actively maintain its stability in the midst of changing external conditions.

Air sac of bird:

Because flight is a very energetically expensive activity, birds need a much more efficient respiratory system. They have lungs, but they have also developed numerous air sacs through which air circulates.

Usually, birds have nine air sacs (three paired and three unpaired).

Air sacs are very thin-walled with few blood vessels. So they do not play a direct role in gaseous exchange. They act as bellows to ventilate the lungs.

Some are tucked into the body cavity and some are inside some of the bird’s hollow bones. These air sacs allow a continuous flow of air through the respiratory system, without any wasted space. This is also called dual respiration.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation air sac of bird

Most birds have 9 air sacs, as

  1. one interclavicular sac,
  2. two cervical sacs,
  3. two anterior thoracic sacs,
  4. two posterior thoracic sacs, and
  5. two abdominal sacs.

Functionally, these 9 air sacs can be divided into anterior sacs (interclavicular, cervicals, & anterior thoracics) & posterior sacs (posterior thoracics & abdominals).

Survival Strategies Class 10

Role Of Air Sacs:

Air sacs store oxygenated air which is used to supply additional oxygen during the flight. During inspiration, air comes in contact with the alveoli of the lungs causing the first gaseous exchange. Then air enters the air sacs.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation role of air sacs

During expiration, oxygenated air comes out of air sacs and flows over the alveoli thus coming in contact with the alveoli for the second time causing a second gaseous exchange.

Thus, in one complete breathing cycle, gaseous exchange takes place twice in the lungs.

This is how the air sacs facilitate dual respiration which provides increased functional efficiency of lungs, greater oxygen supply, higher rate of respiration, and consequent energy production that are needed for volant adaptation.

Air-filled sacs reduce the specific gravity of the body which helps in flight.

These also help in maintaining the body balance in flying conditions.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation Physiological Adaptations

Physiological adaptations refer to the metabolic or physiological adjustments within the cells or tissues of an organism in response to external environmental stimuli resulting in the improved ability of an organism to maintain homeostasis or to cope with its changing environment.

Some examples are—

Salt adaptation in Sundri; A mangrove is a shrub or small vegetation that grows in coastal saline or brackish water, in areas with low-oxygen soft soil, and has to cope with varying salinity.

Many mangrove species have leaves with glands that excrete salt. Some species can also tolerate the storage of large amounts of salt in their leaves which are discarded when the salt load is too high.

All species of mangroves can exclude at least 80% of external salt during water uptake.

To deal with salt, all mangrove trees exclude some salt at the root level, and all can tolerate more salt in their tissues than other plants, often in quantities that would kill other plants.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation physilogical adaptations

Mangrove adaptations to their environment:

Mangroves have to physically adapt their leaves, their roots, and their reproductive methods to survive in a harsh, dynamic environment of soft, low-oxygen soils and varying salinity.

Leaf Adaptations To Saline Conditions:

Many mangrove species, such as the Grey Mangrove and the River Mangrove (common species along the Redlands coast), have leaves with glands that excrete salt.

Some species such as the Grey Mangrove can also tolerate the storage of large amounts of salt in their leaves – which are discarded when the salt load is too high.

Mangroves can also restrict the opening of their stomata (these are small pores through which carbon dioxide and water vapor are exchanged during photosynthesis).

Survival Strategies Class 10

This allows the mangrove to conserve its fresh water, an ability vital to its survival in a saline environment.

Mangroves can turn their leaves to reduce the surface area of the leaf exposed to the hot sun. This enables them to reduce water loss through evaporation.

Root Adaptations To Soft, Saline, Low Oxygen Soils:

A distinctive feature of mangroves is their far-reaching, exposed roots. While these roots come in many different shapes and sizes, they all perform an important function – structural support in soft soils.

Some species of mangroves have pneumatophores, which are aboveground roots showing negative geotropism.

These are filled with spongy tissue and peppered with small holes in the aerial portion that offer structural support and allow oxygen to be transferred to the roots trapped below ground in the anaerobic (low oxygen) soils.

The roots of many mangrove species are also adapted to stop the intake of a lot of salt from the water before it reaches the plant.

Reproductive Adaptations To Tidal Environment:

Some mangrove species have evolved to produce seeds that float. The tide acts as the method of dispersal to avoid the crowding of young plants.

Other mangrove species are viviparous.

They retain their seeds until after it has germinated and a long, cylindrical propagule has formed.

When it has matured to this stage, the parent tree drops it into the water, where it remains dormant until it finds the soil and can put out roots. This phenomenon is known as viviparous germination.

Adaptations of camel (Camel’s ability to withstand extreme water loss and the shape of RBC in camel):

Camels live in hot deserts.

Camels adapted to desert areas can survive and reproduce despite extreme temperatures and limited water availability using a variety of physiological adaptive mechanisms to either avoid or tolerate environmental conditions that can result in heat stress and dehydration.

Tolerance of fluid loss:

Camels can handle extreme dehydration since they are known to lose safely body water equivalent to 40% of their body weight, a loss that would be lethal in any other animal.

The small oval erythrocyte (RBC) of the camel can continue to circulate in situations of increased blood viscosity.

On the other hand, camels can take in a very large amount of water in one session to make up for previous fluid loss. In other animals, this would result in severe osmotic problems.

Camels can do this because water is absorbed very slowly from their stomach and intestines, allowing time for equilibration. Furthermore, their erythrocytes can swell to 40% over the normal size without bursting.

Formation of dry feces:

Cattle lose 20 to 40 liters of fluid daily through feces, whereas camels lose only 1.3 liters. Fluid is absorbed in the end part of the intestines where the small fecal balls are produced.

Role of the rumen (a compartment of the stomach):

The rumen helps maintain water balance in two ways. First, the rumen of hydrated ungulates and the foregut of camels contain a large volume of water, approximately equal to 20% of body weight, and may buffer ungulates against short-term water deprivations.

During the first few days of dehydration, the fluid contained in the rumen is used to maintain the water balance of blood and body tissues and represents a large portion (50-70%) of the water lost during dehydration.

Second, after dehydration in some species, the rumen plays a role in the prevention of hemolysis and osmotic tissue shock during rapid rehydration.

Role of the kidney:

The camel’s kidney plays a major role in the process of conserving water by increasing the osmolarity of urine. The kidney is characterized by a long loop of Henley and a well-developed medulla.

During dehydration, the kidneys reduce water losses both by decreasing the glomerular filtration rate and by increasing the tubular reabsorption of water. A dehydrated camel urinates only drops of concentrated urine.

This concentrated urine not only serves to conserve water but also allows camels to drink water that is more concentrated than seawater (above 3% NaCI) and to eat salty plants that would otherwise be toxic.

In response to increased blood osmolarity, a larger release of ADH hormone leads to a fast renal response that causes increased reabsorption of water. This leads to a smaller volume of more concentrated urine being excreted.

The shape of erythrocytes of camels:

The oval-shaped nonnucleated erythrocytes of camel can resist osmotic variation without rupturing; these cells can swell to almost twice their initial volumes following rehydration.

The oval RBC can easily flow quicker in a dehydrated state of the animals as compared to the round-shaped blood cells in other mammals. The RBCs are also enormously expansible.

Because of shorter and less saturated fatty acid chains in the red cell membranes, these are more fluid and have remarkable stretching ability.

Survival Strategies Class 10

The ellipsoid shape of camel erythrocytes is very stable and they may expand with distilled water to 400% before they rupture.

Another unique feature of the erythrocytes is their long life span when the camel is dehydrated. The life span of the erythrocytes of hydrated camels is 90 to 120 days.

When camels are chronically dehydrated during summer, the life span of erythrocytes extends to 150 days. Erythrocyte turnover is water and energy-expensive. Therefore, extending the life span of erythrocytes reduces energy and water expenditure.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation Behavioral Adaptations

Behavioral Adaptations are inherited systems of behavior (whether inherited as instincts or as a neuro-psychological capacity for learning) that enable organisms to adjust to their environment to ensure survival.

Some examples are—

Problem-solving in chimpanzees:

Just like humans, chimpanzees create and use tools to make their lives easier.

Termites are one of the chimpanzee’s favorite foods, but how to reach the creatures deep within their mounds presents quite a problem to them. Chimpanzees pick up a twig and stripe the leaves off of it.

Then pushing the twig into one of the holes in the termite mound, they leave it there for a moment and slowly pull it out. As termites cling to the twig, they pick them off with their lips and scrunch them. This way they use the stem as a tool to ‘fish’ for insects.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies problem solving in chimpanzee

Chimpanzees have also been seen using tools such as stone hammers to chop up and reduce food into smaller bite-sized portions Chimpanzees like eating nuts.

They hammer them open with stone or wood.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation chimpanzes eating Nuts

Non-human primates especially chimpanzees self-medicate. Chimpanzees in the wild appear to practice herbal medicine. They consume numerous items with medicinal properties, such as anti-bacterial agents and deworming herbs.

As they live in large groups, these animals are highly efficient in scaring away predators, finding food, and defending territory. They usually forage on the ground and never stick to a specific area for a long time.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Adaptation Notes

Chimpanzees, being adapted to form a highly social community, manipulate, deceive, control their emotions, and actively engage in a complex social environment.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation chimpanzes

They can quickly pass on important information through visual or vocal means. Various body movements relay information about dominance, excitement, and aggression.

Chimpanzees and humans are “more closely related to each other than either is to any other living primate.

The average stretch of human DNA is almost 99% identical to the corresponding stretch of chimp DNA, but small differences in DNA can lead to numerous differences in the proteins generated by the DNA.

Comparing proteins from chimps and humans, only about 75% are found to be identical. Still, that is a lot of overlap, so it is not surprising that chimps are the closest to human intelligence of all non-human animal species.

For a long time, psychologists have been impressed by the intelligence of chimpanzees. Perhaps the most famous example comes from Wolfgang Kohler in his book The Mentality of Apes (1925).

Kohler suspended bananas out of the reach of chimpanzees. He found that chimps could assemble two sticks to make a single instrument to reach out to the bananas.

They also proved to be capable of piling up boxes to reach the bananas. And they could combine these techniques when necessary.

Communication in honeybees:

Communication is an adaptation that helps animals survive.

Animals use communication to attract mates, warn off predators, mark territory, and identify themselves. Bees communicate through dances, vibrations, and body chemical signals.

The most prominent mode of communication among honey bees is through a series of dances done by foraging worker bees who return to the hive with news of nectar, pollen, or water.

The details of the dance languages were worked out by Karl von Frisch (1967).

The Scout Or Collector Worker Bees Perform Two Common Types Of Dances:

The round dance and the waggle dance.

The round dance is simpler and it communicates that the food source is near the hive.

For a food source found at a greater distance from the hive, the worker bee performs the waggle dance in a figure-eight (8) pattern. It involves a shivering side-to-side motion of the abdomen.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Adaptation Notes

The bee first runs straight ahead for a precise distance wagging her abdomen from side to side. Then she turns left and circles back to the starting point, where she starts forward again, waggling the same distance as before.

When she reaches the point where she turns, she circles back to the right. Depending on how plentiful the nectar is, eight may be repeated several times.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation waggle dance and round dance

The waggle dance includes information about the direction and energy required to fly to the goal. Energy expenditure (or distance) is indicated by the length of time it takes to make one circuit.

For example, a bee may dance 8-9 circuits in 15 seconds for a food source 200 meters away, 4-5 for a food source 1000 meters away, and 3 circuits in 15 seconds for a food source 2000 meters away.

The direction of the food source is indicated by the direction the dancer faces during the straight portion of the dance when the bee is waggling.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation hive

If she waggles while facing straight upward, then the food source may be found in the direction of the sun. If she waggles at an angle of 60 degrees to the left or upward, the food source may be found 60 degrees to the left of the sun.

Similarly, if the dancer waggles 120 degrees to the right or upward, the food source may be found 120 degrees to the right of the sun. The dancer emits sounds during the waggle run that help the recruits determine the direction in the darkness of the hive.

Chapter 4 Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. A ________________ adaptation is something an animal does how it acts – usually in response to some type of external stimulus.
Answer: Behavioural

Question 2. Cacti have many adaptations that allow them to live in ________________ areas.
Answer: Dry Leaves

Question 3. Most species of cacti have reduced or lost true ________________, retaining only spines.
Answer: Swim Bladder

Question 4. The________________ is an internal gas-filled organ that contributes to the ability of a fish to control its buoyancy.
Answer: Pneumtophores

Question 5. Breathing roots of Halophytes are known as Many species have leaves with glands________________
Answer: Mangrove

Question 7. ________________ have been known to lose safely body water equivalent to 40% of its body weight.
Answer: Camels

Question 8. Just like humans, chimpanzees create and use ________________ to make their lives easier.
Answer: Tools

Question 9. Chimpanzees in the wild appear to practice ________________ medicine.
Answer: Herbal

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Adaptation Notes

Question 10. The details of the dance languages of________________ were worked out by Karl von Frisch.
Answer: Bees

Question 11. The tuft of capillaries present in the posterior chamber of the swim bladder is known as________________
Answer: Rete mirabile

WBBSE Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation Write True Or False

Question 1. Any behavior that helps ensure the survival of an organism specifically, and its species generally, can be considered as a behavioral adaptation.
Answer: True

Question 2. Animal migration is an example of behavioral adaptation.
Answer: True

Question 3. Cacti have many adaptations that allow them to live in saline areas.
Answer: False

Question 4. The spines protect the cactus from predators.
Answer: True

Question 5. The swim bladder or air bladder is an internal fluid-filled organ that contributes to the ability of a fish to control its buoyancy.
Answer: False

Question 6. Usually, birds have nineteen air sacs.
Answer: False

Question 7. All mangrove trees exclude some salt at the root level.
Answer: True

Examples Of Adaptation In Animals Class 10

Question 8. Camels can take in a very large amount of water in one session to make up for previous fluid loss.
Answer: True

Question 9. Chimpanzees use tools such as iron hammers to chop up and reduce food into smaller bite-sized portions.
Answer: False

Question 10. Two common types of bee dances are the so-called round dance and the waggle dance.
Answer: True

WBBSE Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is behavioral adaptation?
Answer: Behavioural adaptation is the process by which an organism or a species changes its pattern of action to better suit its environment, which allows better survival and reproduction,

Example: Migration.

Question 2. To which environmental condition are cacti adapted?
Answer: Dry, arid, desert conditions with low or very low precipitation.

Question 3. What are the uses of spines in cacti? 
Answer: Protection from predators and reduction of loss of water by transpiration.

Question 4. State the main function of the swim bladder in a fish.
Answer: It contributes to the ability of a fish to control its buoyancy besides controlling its stability.

Question 5. How many air sacs are there in a bird?
Answer: Usually birds have nine air sacs (three paired and three unpaired).

Question 6. Are the air sacs of birds supplied with blood capillaries?
Answer: No.

Question 7. Name the network of blood vessels found around the swim bladder of fish.
Answer: Rete mirabile

Examples Of Adaptation In Animals Class 10

Question 8. How Sundari plants are adapted to the salty estuarine environment?
Answer: Their tissue fluid can tolerate more salt.

Question 9. State the utility of the hump of camels.
Answer: The fat within the hump can be metabolized for energy.

Question 10. Name two favorite foods of chimpanzees.
Answer: They prefer to eat termites and nuts.

Question 11. Give examples of two animals that exhibit secondary volant adaptation.
Answer: Draco and Tree Frog.

Question 12. A pair of related terms is given below. Based on the relationship in the first pair, write the suitable word. 
Answer: In the gap of the second pair: developed root system : Hydrophytes:: Highly developed root system: Xerophytes.

Human erythrocytes: biconcave:: Camel’s erythrocytes: oval.

morphological adaptation: a thick layer of fat in polar bears:: physiological adaptation: production of venom

Question 13. Name a mammal that shows volant adaptation.
Answer: Bat.

Question 14. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out that term and write it: Hibernation, behavioral adaptation, migration, living in troops. 
Answer: behavioral adaptation.

Question 15. Give an example of physiologically dry soil.
Answer: Salt marsh.

Question 16. Which part of the cactus performs photosynthesis?
Answer: Phylloclade containing chloroplasts performs photosynthesis in cacti.

Question 17. Name one fish that does not have a swim bladder.
Answer: Shark

Question 18. Name a secondary aquatic animal.
Answer: Whale

Examples Of Adaptation In Animals Class 10

Question 19. In which plant does viviparous germination occur?
Answer: Rhizophora

Question Name a plant that has a pneumatophore.
Answer: Sundari (Heritiera minor)

WBBSE Chapter 4 Survival Strategies Adaptation Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is a phylloclade?
Answer:

Phylloclade

The thick, flat, fleshy green morphologically modified stems of cacti are known as phylloclade. These can perform photosynthesis besides the normal functions of a stem.

Question 2. What are the functions of the swim bladder of a fish?
Answer:

The functions of the swim bladder of a fish

The swim bladder or air bladder is an internal gas-filled organ that contributes to the ability of a fish to control its buoyancy, and thus to stay at its current water depth without having to waste energy in swimming.

Also, the dorsal position of the swim bladder moves the center of mass below the center of volume, allowing it to act as a stabilizing agent.

Question 3. What are the air sacs of birds?
Answer:

The air sacs of birds

Usually, birds have nine very thin-walled air sacs.

Some are tucked into the body cavity and some are inside some of the bird’s hollow bones. These air sacs allow a continuous flow of air through the respiratory system, without any wasted space.

Types Of Adaptation In Plants And Animals Class 10

Question 4. Write about the salt adaptations of Mangrove plants.
Answer:

The salt adaptations of Mangrove plants

Many mangrove species have leaves with glands that excrete salt.

Some species can also tolerate the storage of large amounts of salt in their leaves which are discarded when the salt load is too high. All species of mangroves can exclude at least 80% of external salt during water uptake.

Question 5. What are the adaptations of RBCs of camels?
Answer:

The adaptations of RBCs of camels

The small oval erythrocyte (RBC) of the camel can continue to circulate in situations of increased blood viscosity.

Furthermore, their erythrocytes can swell to 240% of normal size without bursting. The erythrocytes have a long life span when the carnal is dehydrated.

Question 6. How do chimpanzees collect termites as their food?
Answer:

Termites are one of chimpanzees’ favorite food but how to reach the creatures deep within their mounds presents quite a problem.

Chimps pick up a twig and stripe the leaves off it. Then pushing the twig into one of the holes in the termite mound, they leave it there for a moment and slowly pull it out.

As termites cling to the twig, they pick them off with their lips and scrunch them. They thus use the stem as a tool to ‘fish’ for insects.

Question 7. State the significance of the wagtail dance of honey bees.
Answer:

The significance of the wagtail dance of honey bees

The worker bee performs the waggle dance in eight (8) patterns to communicate the message about a food source that is located at a greater distance from the hive.

Depending on how plentiful the nectar is eight may be repeated several times. The waggle dance includes information about the direction and energy required to fly to the goal.

Energy expenditure (or distance) is indicated by the length of time it takes to make one circuit. The direction of the food source is indicated by the direction the dancer faces during the straight portion of the dance when the bee is waggling.

Question 8. Mention the significance of the modification of the leaves of cacti into spines.
Answer:

The leaves bear stomata, but the spines do not. Hence the leaves of cacti are modified into spines to reduce the rate of transpiration.

Question 9. What do you mean by physiologically dry soil?
Answer:

Physiologically dry soil

Plants cannot absorb water from soil that contains a greater concentration of mineral salts even if it is rich in water, because endosmosis cannot occur in the root hairs in such soil.

This type of soil is known as physiologically dry soil. This type of salt marsh is found in the river delta and along the coastline.

Question 10. What is halophyte?
Answer:

Halophyte

The plants that grow in a river delta and show morphological, physiological, and reproductive adaptations in response to tagline marshy lands are known as halophytes.

Examples: Sundari (Heritiera), Rhizophora, Garan, etc.

Question 11. Mention two adaptive features of halophytes.
Answer:

The presence of pneumatophores and viviparous germination are two adaptive features of halophytes.

Question 12. Differentiate between primary and secondary aquatic animals.
Answer:

Difference between primary and secondary aquatic animals

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation primary aquatic animals

Question 13. Mention two adaptive features of secondary aquatic animals.
Answer:

Two adaptive features of secondary aquatic animal

  1. Adaptive features of secondary aquatic animals:
  2. Presence of blabber (thick layer of fat below the skin) to maintain body temperature in cold water
  3. Presence of an oar-shaped flipper which is the modified forelimb.

Types Of Adaptation In Plants And Animals Class 10

Question 14. What is meant by a secondary volant animal?
Answer:

Secondary volant animal

The animals that can fly in the air but whose ancestors were either terrestrial or aquatic are known as secondary volant animals.

Example: Flying lizard (Draco), Flying fish (Exocoetus), Flying squirrel (Petaurista), etc.

Question 15. What is mimicry?
Answer:

Mimicry

Mimicry is a type of defensive adaptation by which some animals and plants protect themselves by camouflage or by alarming coloration or structural pattern.

Example: Leaf insect (Phyllium) and stick insect (Euryacantha) camouflage with leaf and dry sticks respectively to escape predation.

Question 16. What is keel?
Answer:

Keel

The sternum of a pigeon is modified into a boat-shaped structure that provides added space to hold the sturdy flight muscles. This triradiate flat bony plate is called the keel.

Question 17. What is double adaptation?
Answer:

Double adaptation

Some animals are adapted to survive in two different environments. This is known as double adaptation.

Pigeons can walk on the ground as well as fly in the air, frogs can leap on land and swim in the water, etc. These are examples of double adaptation.

Question 18. What is vivipary germination?
Answer:

Vivipary germination

Plants growing in saline marshes show a peculiar type of germination known as vivipary. In such cases, the seeds begin germination before their liberation from the fruits.

The radicle becomes elongated and considerably swollen.

Then the seeds get detached from the parent plant and come vertically downward. The radicle pierces the muddy soil below and thus gets fixed. Lateral roots are soon formed for anchorage and the plumule is kept above the surface of saline water.

Examples: Rhizophora, Ceriops, etc.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic B Survival Strategies Adaptation vivipary germination

Question 19. Mention the adaptive features of a halophyte which is adapted to grow in physiologically dry soil.
Answer:

Sundari (Heritiera minor) is a halophytic plant, which grows on salty marshes of river delta. It has the following adaptive features:

Root:

  1. The root system is not very elaborate.
  2. Stilt roots grow to support the plant body to stand erect in soft mud.
  3. Pneumatophores grow vertically above the substratum to get oxygen from the atmosphere.
  4. Root buttresses are also found to support the plants to stand erect on the soft muddy soil.

Stem:

Evergreen plants with strong and branched stems.

The epidermis is coated with cuticle or wax. Vascular and mechanical tissues are well developed.

Leaf:

Thick leaves, coated with cuticle and wax. Cells contain mucilage. Palisade parenchyma is dense. Stomata are sunken.

Question 20. Which is the special adaptation of maguro (Clarias) fish?
Answer:

Magur (Clarias) inhabits muddy water with very low oxygen concentration.

To solve the problem, the fish has adapted itself for aerial respiration with the help of a specially built air-breathing organ, called a respiratory tree placed at the two sides of its head.

Question 21. Which adaptive features are found in the hind limbs of a pigeon for perching?
Answer:

Pigeons show double adaptation.

Apart from volant adaptations, they are also adapted specially to sit on the branch of a tree.

Out of the four digits of the hindlimb, three are directed forward and one in a backward direction arrangement helps pigeons to grip the branches well while they sit on them.

Moreover, the hindlegs of the pigeon are fitted with the body in a ‘Z’ shape. This arrangement acts as a shock absorber while they land from a flight.

Types Of Adaptation In Plants And Animals Class 10

Question 22. Mention two behavioral adaptations of camels to survive in desert climates.
Answer:

Food habit:

Camels eat green herbs and this causes indirect intake of sufficient moisture to maintain the body’s hydration. On the other hand, they can survive for several months without food.

Water intake:

A camel can go a week or more without water. When a suitable opportunity arises, they can drink up to 32 gallons (46 liters) of water in one drinking session to make up for previous water loss.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Mention one morphological adaptation of cactus to prevent transpiration.
Answer: In cactus leaves are small, much less in number, scaly, and often modified into sharp pointed spines to prevent transpiration.

Question 2. Mention one adaptation of the Sundari plant for salt tolerance.
Answer: In Sundari, pneumatophores grow vertically above the substratum to get oxygen from the atmosphere.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution

WBBSE Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution Introduction To The Concept Of Evolution

The term evolution means a change in life form over a long period. According to the Big Bang hypothesis, our earth originated due to the explosion of a condensed gaseous body and was a glowing fireball containing a molten mass of gases and vapors of various elements.

The temperature was about 5000 to 6000°C. As the earth moved away from the sun, it was getting cooled. This led to the condensation of gases.

The heavy elements like iron, nickel, etc. occupied the core of the earth while the lighter elements like helium, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, and carbon occupied the atmosphere of the earth.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution               n

For its first billion years, no life existed on Earth. After the formation of the atmosphere and clouds, water vapor came down as rain. Continuous rain led to the formation of water bodies.

Simple compounds react with each other during lightning to form complex organic compounds. Before life appeared, polymerization reactions generated the carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, and nucleic acids of which organisms are composed.

Molecules of these organic compounds formed aggregates in water bodies that developed essential features of life. Thus they were the first living cells formed on Earth.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

Evolution can thus broadly be classified into two different types:

Chemical evolution or homogeny:

It is the process by which the Earth after it was formed, gradually became habitable and was capable of sustaining life, and

Organic evolution:

It occurred after homogeny, which meant the formation of complex life forms from simpler ones. The first process occurred over one billion years, between 4.5 and 3.5 billion years ago.

The second process started with the formation of the first life form and is even continuing today.

Evolution Class 10 Life Science

Organic evolution has two steps:

Biogeny (the transformation of organic compounds to protocells) and Cognogeny (the Diversification of protozoa into metazoa, metaphyta, and various other forms).

Mutation is the cause of organic evolution and evolution is the cause of biodiversity on Earth.

Organic evolution is the slow but gradual change in the heritable characteristics of biological populations over successive generations through the process of reproduction & variation resulting in the origin of complex diverse new species from simpler organisms.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution Evolution

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Significance Of Evolution

It produces complex life forms capable of adapting to changing environments.

It results in adaptive radiation enabling species to survive in variable environmental conditions.

It formed new species by genetic mutation with a new set of characters.

It enriches the biodiversity of the world.

In 1953 Urey and his student Miller devised an experiment to give direct evidence of the molecular evolution of life or abiogenic origin

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Origin Of Life

Earth is believed to have originated about 4.5 billion years ago. How life originated on Earth is a matter of speculation.

Alexander Oparin, a Soviet biochemist, suggested the possibility of the abiogenetic formation of the simplest organic substances—hydrocarbons.

These led to the formation of protein-like compounds and then colloidal systems which were capable to give rise to life through gradual improvement.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Abiogenesis Or Spontaneous generation Or Naturalistic theory

Russian biochemist A.I. Oparin and English biologist J.B.S Haldane suggested a theory that complex organic molecules were formed through a series of chemical reactions under the influence of lightning.

Evolution Class 10 Life Science

Organic compounds like water, ammonia, methane, alcohol, amino acids, etc produce ‘hot soup’ or ‘primordial soup’ within water bodies where smaller organic compounds combine to form large organic compounds like polypeptides, proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, etc.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

These compounds produced the first living cell. Thus life is believed to have originated in oceans. The stage of chemical evolution is completed with the origin of proteins, nucleoproteins, and nucleic acids.

The process involved in the formation of a living cell from simple inorganic and organic nonliving elements is called abiogenesis or spontaneous generation of life from nonliving matters.

Oparin assumed that natural forces made some molecules in a colloidal solution mix and organize to form droplets called coacervates.

Successful coacervates gradually became better organized to give rise to the first living cells. The formation of coacervates was called coacervation.

Salient Features Of Coacervates Were As Follows:

They were stable, spherical in shape with uniform diameter and microscopic.

They had double-layered boundaries around them.

They were motile and capable of growth,

They could reproduce through binary fission, budding, and fragmentation.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Urey And Miller’s Experiment

In 1953 Urey and his student Miller devised an experiment to give direct evidence of the molecular evolution of life or the abiogenic origin of life.

In this experiment, they took a mixture of methane, ammonia, and hydrogen (in the ratio of 2:2:1) in a discharge tube which was connected to a flask containing boiling water.

The hydrocarbon mixture within the discharge tube resembled the primitive atmosphere of Earth and the flask containing boiling water resembled the primitive sea.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution urey and millers experiment

The water vapor from boiling water simulated torrential rain which formed the water bodies on Earth.

The gas mixture in the tube was subjected to electric discharge at 75000 volts for 7 days to resemble vigorous lightning and violent electrical storms in early Earth.

It was then cooled with the help of a condenser and liquified and the liquid was collected in another flask. On analyzing the jelly-like liquid it was found to contain simple organic compounds such as amino acids, hydroxy acids, and aliphatic acids.

The amino acids included glycine, alanine, aspartic acid, and glutamic acid. In this experiment, alpha-alanine predominated over beta-alanine.

Evolution Class 10 Life Science

Modern proteins contain only alpha amino acids. Miller argued that amino acids were formed on primitive Earth under the influence of ultraviolet light and lightning. The resultant liquid contained no nucleic acids.

Inference:

From the experimental observation, Miller concluded that organic molecules were synthesized abiotically in early Earth under the energetic influence of thunderstorms, cosmic radiations, etc. Thus the phenomenon of the chemical origin of life was proved.

Conditions on earth at the time of the origin of life differed greatly from those of today. No free oxygen was present in Earth’s early atmosphere.

The reducing atmosphere of early Earth helped chemical reactions to occur that produced a molecular soup.

Under conditions that resemble Earth’s primitive reducing atmosphere, small molecules essential to living systems formed and polymerized.

Moreover, these molecules accumulated in the seas because the rate of their formation was greater than the rate at which they were destroyed.

In a somewhat similar experiment, Sydney Fox obtained complicated molecules of protein having similar properties to the coacervates of Oparin.

Fox called those molecules as microspheres which, like coacervates, were immiscible in the surrounding medium.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution RNA World Hypothesis

It should be kept in mind that complex protein is not life. Primitive life is represented by DNA or desoxyribonucleic acid which has the ability to produce protein.

Thus according to an alternative view, life forms were created from a single-stranded ribonucleic acid or RNA, which can behave as an enzyme (catalytic function) or protein (ribozyme).

Though unstable, it has the ability to replicate spontaneously and can produce protein by the process of translation or even double-stranded DNA by the process of reverse transcription.

RNA was the first molecule of heredity and DNA evolved after RNA-based proto-life became surrounded by membranes that provided an environment in which DNA is stable.

This is called the RNA world hypothesis and is presently considered the most legitimate way of origin of life.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Major Evolutionary Events

Origin of Earth:

Formation of the Earth some 5000 million years ago in the form of a mass of burning gases separated from the sun as per the Big Bang hypothesis. The temperature was about 5000 to 6000°C.

Formation of water, methane, and ammonia:

Gradual cooling of the Earth and hardening of the Earth’s crust, creation of clouds followed by precipitation, and formation of the small and large water bodies.

The primitive earth contained large amounts of hydrogen, nitrogen, carbon & oxygen. Of these, hydrogen combined with nitrogen to form ammonia, with oxygen to form water, and with carbon to form methane.

Compounds like ammonia, methane, etc got dissolved in rainwater and accumulated in the sea. Mineral rocks also dissolved ” leading to the accumulation of minerals and salts in seawater. Thus the first chemicals formed on the earth were water, ammonia, methane, and others.

Formation of micro and macromolecules:

The next step was the formation of micromolecules like amino acids, fatty acids, purine, pyrimidines, etc. in the form of colloids.

The micromolecules combined in various ways to form macromolecules like proteins, lipids, nucleic acids & nucleoproteins. The first formed proteins were called proto-proteins.

In the next step, nucleic acids were formed from phosphoric acid, sugar, purines, and pyrimidines. The nucleic acids and proteins combined together to form nucleoproteins.

Coacervation:

Formation of lipid membrane-bound structures commonly called coacervates. They exhibited certain properties of cells.

Development of monera and protista:

Coacervates developed into provirus which gradually grew into two fundamental types-the monera and the Protista.

Oxygen revolution:

The emergence of the first photosynthetic bacteria or cyanobacteria having chlorophyll (a universal photosynthetic pigment) and blue-green pigments like phycocyanin.

These organisms had the ability of oxygenic photosynthesis which resulted in the liberation of oxygen in the atmosphere that turned the reducing environment to oxidizing environment.

The advent of multicellularity:

The prokaryotic organisms became diversified and divided repeatedly to produce multicellular prokaryotes.

The accumulation of free oxygen in the earth’s atmosphere made possible the evolution of aerobic metabolism, eukaryotes, sexual recombination, and multicellularity.

Formation of eukaryotes:

The emergence of nuclear membranes produced the first formed eukaryotes, which were initially unicellular and later became multicellular.

All early cells were haploid. Diploid cells appeared when some cells failed to divide after their DNA was duplicated. Diploid cells were better protected from harmful mutations.

Diversification to other forms:

Emergence of aquatic invertebrate animals.

The emergence of aquatic vertebrates in the form of fishes and their diversification.

The gradual development of land plants, and their colonization resulted in the massive modification of the terrestrial habitat, adding more oxygen to the terrestrial environment.

Diversification of terrestrial habitats with the development of new adaptive features which modified the Earth’s landscape.

The gradual shift of animal species from aquatic to terrestrial habitats initially for a short time in the form of four-limbed amphibians later creating a permanent terrestrial group of animals in the form of reptiles

The emergence of the highest-evolved land mammals.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Theories Of Organic Evolution

Several theories have been proposed by different evolutionists. A few important theories are mentioned here.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Lamarck’s Theory

Lamarck’s theory, known as Lamarckism, was proposed by French biologist Jean Baptista de Lamarck (1744-1829) and the theory was discussed in detail in his book ‘Philosophic Zoologique’ in 1809.

Lamarckism comprises of following propositions or assumptions.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution jean baptista de lamarck.jpg

1. New needs and their effects:

Continuous changes in environment create new needs in organisms to become better adapted or more suited to the changed environment.

As a result, certain organs are extensively used and certain others are disused. Lamarck quoted the example of the influence of the environment on plants in support of his view.

He observed differences in the same species of plants grown in different environmental conditions. When plants are grown in fertile soil, they become healthy & luxuriant; the same plants grown in unfertile soil are weak and thin.

2. Use and disuse:

Continuous use of an organ or organs tends to develop them highly, whereas disuse results in a gradual reduction, degeneration, and complete disappearance.

Examples in favor of the Use theory:

The long neck of a giraffe, webbed feet of aquatic birds, bicep muscles & long legs of wading birds, etc.

Examples in favor of disuse theory:

Loss of limbs in snakes, degeneration of eyes in cave animals, degeneration of wings in flightless birds, vestigial organs in man, etc.

3. Internal urge of an organism:

Animals and plants have the ability to grow and increase in size. According to Lamarck, this increase is due to desire which is some sort of an internal urge of the animal to attain the maximum size.

4. Inheritance of acquired characters:

The changes acquired in an organism, during its lifetime, due to the use and disuse of organs and under the influence of the environment are called acquired characteristics.

The characteristics acquired by an organism during its lifetime are inherited by the offspring. It means that changes are cumulative over a period of time and are inherited by the next generation.

As per this proposition, the long neck of the giraffe and the degenerated wings of the kiwi are acquired characters. Hence, they are inherited by their progeny generation after generation.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Examples In Favor Of Lamarckism

Several examples were put forward in support of Lamarckism, of which a few are—

Giraffe:

The ancestors of giraffes had short necks and fore-limb, like horses. They were browsers, but due to much competition in that mode of food habit with scarcity in surface vegetation, they tried to stretch their neck and forelimbs to obtain leaves, as food, from the top branches of trees.

As a result, there were slight elongations of these organs. These acquired characteristics were inherited by the next generation and further elongation occurred due to the accumulation of similar efforts.

As a result, the present-day giraffe has developed a much longer neck and forelimbs.

Aquatic birds:

Aquatic birds like ducks have evolved from terrestrial ancestors. Ducks have all their fingers covered by a flap of skin called webbed feet that helps in swimming. Thus, because of the constant use of fingers for swimming, webbed feet have evolved.

Snakes:

Snakes evolved from lizard-like ancestors having two pairs of limbs. But due to their burrowing habit, they used to crawl on the abdominal muscle.

Prolonged disuse caused a reduction and disappearance of these organs. Present-day snakes like Boa & Python have vestigial pectoral girdles and pelvic girdles though they are limbless.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution lamarcks giraffe

Cave dwellers:

Cave-dwelling animals like Proteus anguinus (amphibia) and Amblyopsis (fish) initially had normal eyesight, but due to living in a dark environment, they did not use their eyes and ultimately lost their power to see.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution cave dweellers

Emergent hydrophytes:

The effect of environment and inheritance of acquired characters is clearly seen in emergent hydrophytes like Ranunculus aquatilis.

Here the submerged leaves are dissected while the emerged ones are simply lobed. When the plant is grown out of water, all the leaves are undissected. In the submerged environment, all the leaves are dissected.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Criticism Of Lamarckism

Internal urge:

This principle states that when there are new needs, new structures or organs develop as per the desire of the animals. Every human being has a desire to fly.

If Lamarck’s principle is correct, every individual, who desires to fly, should develop wings; but this does not happen.

Use and disuse:

The heart is put to use continuously throughout the lifespan of an organism; still, it remains the same size generation after generation. Thus the theory of use and disuse has met with strong objections.

Inheritance of acquired characters:

This theory is much contradicted. Weismann, in his famous experiment, had cut off the tails of rats for 22 generations and allowed them to breed; but tail-less offspring were never born.

Piercing of the nose and ears in Indian women, and circumcision of the penis in Muslims and Jews are age-old customs, but they are not inherited.

In the old tradition, Chinese women used to wear iron shoes in order to have small feet, but their children at the time of birth always had normal feet. These examples prove that acquired characters are not inherited.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Neo-Lamarckism

Long-forgotten Lamarckism has been revived as Neo-Lamarckism in the light of recent findings in genetics which confirm that environment does affect the form, structure, color, size, etc. and these characteristics are inheritable.

Neo-Lamarckism States That:

Germ cells may be formed from somatic cells indicating similar nature of chromosomes and genetic constitution in both the two types of cell lines.

This fact is established in phenomena like regeneration in earthworms, vegetative propagation in Bryophyllum with foliar buds, etc.

The effect of the environment on germ cells is indirectly passed on through the somatic cells.

Heslop Harrison, an entomologist, found that a pale variety of moth, Selenia bipinnaria when fed on manganese-coated food, a true breeding melanic variety of moth is produced.

Germ cells may be directly affected by environmental factors.

Tower, an American entomologist, exposed the young ones of some potato beetles to temperature fluctuations and found that though beetles remained unaffected with no somatic change the next generation had marked changes in the body coloration.

Germ cells can carry forward the somatic changes to the next progeny.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Darwin’s Theory Of Evolution

During the beginning of the 19th century, it was generally believed that species had remained unchanged since their creation.

A new era of biology began on 24th November 1859, the day Darwin published his famous book “On the Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection or The Preservation of Favoured Races in the Struggle for Life”. (Popularly known as—The Origin of Species).

Darwin made two major points in The Origin of Species—

Branching Descent:

Many species of organisms presently inhabiting the earth are descendants of ancestral species that were different from the modern species. Variation is the law of nature.

Living organisms of ancestral species had to adapt to changing environments due to variations, as these had a competitive advantage.

Natural Selection:

He proposed a mechanism for the evolutionary process, which is termed natural selection.

The basic concept of natural selection is that a population can change over generations if individuals that possess certain heritable traits leave more offspring than other individuals.

Natural selection is the differential success in the reproduction of different phenotypes resulting from the interaction of organisms with their environment.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Darwin’s Contribution

Charles Darwin (1809-1882) was born in Shrewsbury in England. From his boyhood, he was much interested in nature. Darwin’s father, a famous physician, could not see his son’s future as a naturalist and sent him to the University of Edinburgh to study medicine.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution Charles Darwin.jpg

However Charles was not at all interested in studying medicine and surgery and left medical school without a degree.

He enrolled at Cambridge University with the intention of becoming a clergyman.

Darwin received his B. A. degree from Cambridge.

Reverend John Henslow, a professor of Botany at Cambridge University, recommended Darwin’s name to Captain Robert Fitz Roy, who was preparing the survey ship HMS Beagle for a voyage around the world.

In 1831, Darwin left England aboard the Beagle.

The main mission of the voyage was to chart poorly known stretches of the South American coastline.

During this expedition, Darwin observed and collected thousands of South American plants and animals and also studied their adaptations.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Evolution Notes

Geologic observation and geographic distribution of species also impressed Darwin during the voyage.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution galapagos

In the Galapagos (a group of geologically young volcanic islands located near the equator about 900 km West of South America), Darwin observed and studied several organisms, specifically, some birds (finches) and turtles.

Although quite similar, they seemed to be different species and some were unique to specific islands, while others were distributed on two or more adjacent islands.

The slight phenotypic differences amongst the finches did not allow them to cross-breed.

After his return to England in 1836, Darwin reassessed his observations during the voyage and began to perceive adaptation to the environment and the origin of new species as closely related processes.

Though Darwin wrote a long essay on the origin of species and natural selection, he was reluctant to publish his theory because he anticipated the uproar it might cause.

In June 1848, Darwin received a manuscript from Alfred Russel Wallace (1823-1913), a British naturalist, working in the East Indies (Malay Archipelago), who had developed a theory of natural selection similar to that of Darwin.

Wallce’s paper, along with extracts from Darwin’s unpublished 1844 essay was presented at a meeting of the Linnean Society of London on July 1, 1848.

Darwin’s The Origin of Species was published on November 24, 1859.

Although Wallace was the first to write up his ideas for publication, he is a great admirer of Darwin and agreed that Darwin has developed the idea of natural selection so extensively that he should be regarded as its main architect.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution The Origin Of Species As Per Darwinism

Darwin developed two main ideas —

Evolution explains the unity and diversity of life,

Natural selection is a cause of adaptive evolution.

Evolution And Branching Descent:

Darwin proposed that the history of life is like a tree, with several branchings from a common trunk to the tips of the youngest twigs, representing the diversity of living organisms.

Each fork of the tree represents the ancestor of evolutionary branches from that point. Asian elephants and African elephants are similar because they shared a common ancestor and the same line of descent.

Most branches of evolution are dead ends and about 99% of all species that have ever lived have now become extinct.

Natural Selection and Adaptation:

Regarding the working of natural selection and explanation of adaptation, evolutionary biologist Ernst Mayr (1982) has viewed the logic

Darwin’s theory of natural selection is into three inferences based on five observations:

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution obeseravtions and inferences

Darwin considered an important connection between Natural selection resulting from the struggle for existence and the ability of organisms to overproduce.

Darwin conceived this idea from an essay by Thomas Malthus(1798), on population growth.

Malthus proposed that much of human suffering famine, disease, war, etc were the consequence of the human population’s potential for faster growth than the availability of food and other resources.

In every generation environmental factors filter out heritable variations, favoring some characters over others. Organisms with favorable traits produce more offspring than organisms without those traits.

Increases in the frequencies of favored traits in a population are an important source of evolutionary modification.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Salient Features Of Darwin’s Theory Of Natural Selection

The important features of Darwin’s theory are as follows—

1. Prodigality of reproduction:

Organisms have enormous fertility and they multiply in geometric ratio.

A few examples are—

Insects lay hundreds of eggs.

Plants produce thousands of seeds. A single fern produces a few million spores.

A salmon fish lays several hundred eggs at a time.

Elephant, the slowest breeder, lives for about 90 years. They attain reproductive maturity at about the age of 30 and give rise to about 6 offspring per head during their lifetime.

It is calculated that, if all offerings survive, then 19 million descendent elephants will be produced in 750 years from a single female.

2. Limitation of food and space:

Though a population tends to increase geometrically; food, space, and other resources on Earth are limited and they are liable to increase only arithmetically.

Limited food and space, which together form the major part of the carrying capacity of the environment, are the two main limiting factors that do not allow a population to grow indefinitely.

The struggle for existence:

Due to the rapid multiplication of populations but limited food & space, there starts an everlasting competition

between individuals having similar requirements.

In this competition, every living organism desires to have an upper hand over others.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Evolution Notes

The struggle for existence may be of three different types—

Intraspecific struggle:

It is the struggle between members of the same species because they share similar environmental resources.

Examples:

Two dogs struggling for a piece of meat.

Interspecific struggle:

It is the struggle for the members of different species due to sharing the same ecological conditions.

Example:

The struggle between predator and prey.

Environmental or extra-specific struggle:

It is the struggle of individuals with environmental constraints like floods, drought, earthquakes, extreme heat or cold disease, etc.

Out of these three forms of struggles, the intraspecific struggle is the strongest type as the needs of the individuals of same species are most similar.

Example:

Sexual selection in which a cock with a more beautiful comb and plumage has a better chance to win a hen than a cock with a less developed comb.

Similarly, cannibalism is another example of intraspecific struggle as in this individuals eat the members of the same species.

4. Variation:

Except for identical twins, no two individuals are alike and their requirements also vary. This is known as variation and by these variations, some individuals become better adapted to their environment.

According to Darwin, the variations are continuous. Adaptively useful variations pass to the next generation, while the others disappear.

Examples of variations with competitive advantages are increased speed in prey, increased water conservation in plants, etc.

5. Natural selection:

Individuals with favorable variations and greater reproduction ability are selected by nature. Unfit individuals are rejected by nature.

Characters, selected by nature, pass to the next generation. Sorting out of individuals with useful variations from a
heterogeneous population by nature was called natural Selection by Darwin. So natural selection acts as a restrictive force and not a creative force.

6. Survival of fittest and origin of species:

Descendents with favorable variations, selected by nature, will survive because they are the fittest to adapt to their environment; while the unfits will become extinct.

Originally, the phrase ‘the survival of the fittest, was first used by Herbert Spencer.

7. Speciation:

According to Darwinism, useful variations appear in every generation and are inherited from one generation to another.

So the useful variations go on accumulating and Darwin considered that, after several generations, the descendants with continuous and gradual variations will be so distinct from their ancestors, that they will form a new species.

So, according to Darwinism, evolution is a gradual process and speciation occurs by gradual changes in the existing species.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Examples Of Natural Selection

Skeletal adaptations:

Giraffes, lizards, and many other known species adapted to their environments through genetic changes to their skeletons.

Giraffes developed long necks to reach food sources higher up in trees, so members of the giraffe population who didn’t develop a long neck died out.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution skeletal adaptations

At the same time, certain lizards with one characteristic are passed on to the next generation in greater proportion than the shorter neck region developed longer leg bones to help them climb up during periods of flood and to escape predators in the ground;

shorter-legged lizards of the same population died out until only the lizards with long legs survived.

Coloration:

Many species of deer mouse, peppered moth, and peacock have adapted to their environment through adaptations in coloring.

Once the optimal coloration is present, natural selection occurs when members of the species without the adaptive coloring died out more quickly and therefore, did not reproduce as abundantly.

Bacteria:

Bacteria can adapt to new food sources that were previously unusable.

Some bacteria have adapted to the presence of deadly antibiotics and exhibited traits that let them not only survive but also reproduce to generate offsprings that are also resistant to the antibiotics.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Criticism Of Darwinism

Criticism against Darwinism relates to the following points:

Darwin had no idea about genetics. So he could not explain the cause of variation and the actual process of inheritance of variation.

He did not distinguish between inheritable and non-heritable variations.

Darwinism explains only the existence of useful variations, but it does not give any idea about useless variations like the vestigial organs.

Natural selection says that a new species is evolved by the gradual accumulation of useful variations. If this is true then there should be intermediate forms, but in most cases, such intermediate forms are not recognized.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Evolution Notes

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Neo-Darwinism

It is the refinement of the original theory of Natural Selection and is also known as the Synthetic theory of evolution. The salient features of Neo- Darwinism are as follows:

Rapid multiplication:

All organisms multiply in a geometrical ratio, producing more number of offsprings than what can survive.

Limited food and space:

Food, space & other basic necessities are limited.

The struggle for existence:

Intraspecific, interspecific, and environmental struggles for existence appear among the organisms due to both the high rate of multiplication and the limitation of resources.

Genetic variations:

These are inheritable variations that can occur due to the following reasons—

Mutations:

It may be genetic, chromosome aberrations, or gene mutations.

Gene Recombination:

These are new combinations of genes that may arise due to crossing over.

Hybridization:

It causes the intermingling of genes belonging to different groups.

Genetic drift:

It is the change in gene number and gene frequency in a small isolated population.

Natural Selection:

Natural selection operates upon the genotype of the individual. Effects may be advantageous when they have positive selection pressure or disadvantageous when they have negative selection pressure.

Individuals having genes with negative selection pressure are eliminated before reaching maturity.

Origin of new species:

There are various barriers separating two or more interbreeding groups into distinct populations.

An isolated population of a species independently develops different types of mutations which ultimately accumulate over several generations to form a new species.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Hugo De Vries Mutation Theory

Hugo de Vries studied plants of evening primrose, Oenothera Lamarkiana, and put forward a theory of evolution called the mutation theory.

Salient Features Of Mutation Theory:

  1. Mutations are the raw materials of evolution.
  2. Mutations appear all of a sudden and become operational immediately.
  3. AII mutations are inheritable
  4. Useful mutations are selected by nature.
  5. Lethal mutations are eliminated.
  6. Accumulation of several variations produces new species.
  7. Evolution is a jerky and discontinuous process.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Evidences For The Theory Of Evolution

The 4.5-4.8 billion years of the Earth’s history involve great alteration of geography, geology, and climate.

The changes in the earth’s appearance and character included the development of the atmosphere, formation of land surfaces and continental drift, variation in sea level, sedimentation, mountain-building, volcanism, seasonality, and glaciation.

A geologic era is a subdivision of geologic time that is separated by catastrophic extinction boundaries.

Sedimentary rocks formed over the past 570-600 million years suggest that three different eras be recognized:

The Paleozoic, Mesozoic, and Cenozoic.

All time prior to the start of the Paleozoic is referred to as the Precambrian.

The Earth calendar shows that the Precambrian accounts for 9/10ths of the entire history of the Earth.

The three eras mentioned above are divided into 12 geologic periods, and some of the periods are further broken down into epochs.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution Gelogical time scale

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution Evidences for evolution

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Palaeontological Evidence

Paleontology is the study of fossils. Leonardo da Vinci is known as the father of paleontology. However, George Cuvier is considered the founder of modern paleontology.

The evidence of evolution gained from the knowledge of fossils is called palaeontological evidence.

The fossils are the remains or impressions of hard parts of past individuals in the strata of the earth that provide acceptable evidence in support of evolution.

The original land mass of ancient earth is converted into rock strata containing fossil records. There are different methods of determining the ages of rocks and fossils.

Fossilization is the process by which a plant or animal becomes a fossil. Depending upon fossilization, fossils are of many types.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Evolution Notes

Types Of Fossils:

Compactions:

These are fossils found in peat, brown coals (lignite), and other soft sediments. The plant remains, frequently seeds and fruits of the Tertiary or younger, are entirely of original organic material.

They are three-dimensional fossils that have been somewhat flattened and reduced in volume.

Compressions and impressions:

When fine-grained sedimentary deposits containing dead plants are subjected to the extreme weight of overlying strata, so that the air and water are driven out, compressions and impressions may form.

The plant matter usually leaves but also trunks, stems, and roots, are reduced to a thin carbonaceous film.

If a two-dimensional positive image is formed, it is called compression. In this case, the only original organic matter left of the leaf or stem is the thin layer of carbon. Negative images, or imprints, are called impressions.

They are also twodimensional, but they are lacking in any original material. Those compressions which have remnants of waxy leaf cuticles can give thin peels suitable for microscopic examination.

Leaf venation is evident. The cellular structure of underlying remains can be detected. Some deformation of the plant does occur. Compressions and impressions are not necessarily found together.

Petrifactions:

In some sedimentary deposits, the surrounding water is high in mineral content; Silica (Si02) or Calcium Carbonate (CaC03) may be present, but also iron and manganese oxides.

These salts precipitate out of the solution and collect inside any plant matter present. The plant matter may be replaced during mineralization, but usually, cell cavities are filled, enclosing the original plant material.

Theories Of Evolution Class 10

Thin sections from throughout these three-dimensional fossils reveal beautifully preserved cell structures under the microscope. Striking colors result from the presence of oxides.

The best-known petrifactions are the petrified woods, particularly those of the Petrified Forest in Arizona and of Yellowstone National Park.

Casts and molds:

These fossils consist of no original plant material, and they show no cellular structure.

They are, though, very useful and accurate renditions of surface structure or internal layering of wood and bark. When a root or stem trapped in sediment decays away, the surrounding deposits may be solid enough to retain their shape.

The mold which results solidifies as a faithful copy of the exterior surface of the solid plant part. If the cavity left behind is then filled with new deposits, a cast is produced, identical to the original plant. Many times molds and casts occur together.

Intact Preservations:

The entire animal or plants are preserved as a whole because of the prevailing temperature being below the freezing point, e.g. Fossil of Mammoth.

Significance of fossils in organic evolution:

By comparing fossils of different organisms, it is possible to tell the phylogenetic relationships between organisms.

Fossil records show a gradual increase in the complexity of organisms over time. Older lower rock strata contain fossils showing simple structures while younger upper rock strata contain fossils showing more complex structures.

Some fossil records have been used to reconstruct an almost complete evolutionary history of the development of certain organisms.

Example: human fossils and fossils of horses.

Fossil records provide ideas about the possible cause of extinction of the prehistoric organisms.

Palaeontological evidence help understand evolution in several ways—

Missing links:

The missing links refer to transitional fossils of organisms that are intermediate between two groups and share the characteristics of both but are extinct from the earth.

Missing links like Archaeopteryx were transitional forms between reptiles and birds. Their fossils have been found in the limestone rocks of the Jurassic period of Solenhofen in Bavaria, Germany.

Theories Of Evolution Class 10

It is a missing link between reptiles & birds.

It was about the size of a crow and had both reptilian and avian characters as pointed out below:

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution dinousour

Reptilian characters:

  1. Presence of teeth in beak,
  2. Each finger-ends into a claw,
  3. A long tail with free caudal vertebrae.

Avian characters:

  1. The presence of feathers on the body,
  2. Rounded cranium with the intimate fusion of bones,
  3. Forelimbs modified into wings and having only three fingers,
  4. Presence of 4-toes in each foot and adopted for perching as in birds.

The study of missing links focuses on a group in transition representative that explains the possible mechanism of evolution and transition between two groups.

Palaeontological history to establish evolutionary trend:

An evolutionary trend can be either a directional change within a single lineage or a parallel change across lineages.

Almost all fossils related to the intermediate stages of the evolution of horses exhibit an evolutionary trend.

A series of fossils from different geological periods have been discovered, regarding the evolution of the modern horse (Equus ferus).

The earliest known fossil of the horse was that of Eohippus (= Hyracotherium) which was present during the Eocene period. This animal was about the size of a cat (30 cm high at the shoulders) with a short head and neck.

They had forefeet with four complete fingers (2, 3, 4, and 5) and one splint of the first finger, and hind feet with three functional toes (2, 3, and 4) and two splints of first and fifth toes.

Gradually through the development of a series of species like Orohlppus, Mesohippus, Miohippus, Parahippus, Marychippus, Pliohippus, etc., the modern species of horse (Equus) has developed.

Theories Of Evolution Class 10

The fossil records show gradual changes of the species for adjustment to their environment in two respects:

Food-getting mechanism and to attain speed.

The modern horse is about 150 cm in height at the shoulders with a long head and neck. Both fore and hind feet of modern horses have one finger one toe, and two splints.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution fore foot and hind foot

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Morphology And Comparative Anatomical Evidence

The sources of evidence of evolution are known as radius and ulna.

The radius and Morphology Comparative Anatomy Are The Following:

Homologous Organs:

The organs in different organisms that have the same embryonic origin and have basic structural similarities but are functional and may or may not be alike are called homologous structures or organs.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution forelimbs

In animals:

Forelimbs:

The forelimbs of all vertebrates except the fishes have a common bony structural plan. The upper portion of the forelimb is supported by a bone known as the humerus.

Below the humerus, there are two bones the ulna followed by carpals, metacarpals, and phalanges. If the bones of the forelimb in the different classes of vertebrates are examined, a striking similarity will be revealed throughout the series.

The wings of a bird or bat, the forelimb of a horse, the forelimb of a seal and whale, and the forelimb of man are all homologous though they perform different functions.

If we compare the bony elements of the above vertebrate animals, they show a basic similarity in the bony architecture of forelimbs. However, due to adaptation in diverse modes of life, there are some modifications in all skeletal structures.

In the case of birds and bats, the forelimbs are modified into wings or patagium for flying purposes. So there are some changes in the bones due to the aerial mode of life.

In horses, the digits of the forelimb are reduced to get adapted to running on land. In seals and whales, the forelimbs, consisting of five digits, are modified into a flipper for swimming.

In monkeys, it is used for climbing and arboreal life. In man, it is used for the manufacturing and manipulation of tools and for various other non-locomotory purposes.

Darwin’S Theory Of Evolution Class 10 

Though there are some modifications in bones for adaptation to different environmental conditions yet the basic plan of arrangement of bones remains the same.

This basic similarity of architecture in bones reflects that they have evolved from a common ancestor and modifications are due to the evolutionary process. This similarity in different organisms is called divergent evolution.

Brain:

The common pattern of the brain in vertebrates suggests a common ancestor.

Mouth parts of insects:

In the insect’s basic plan of mouth, parts are the same but modified according to the mode of feeding.

In plants:

Homologous organs are also present in plants and are performing various functions.

Leaf:

In plants like pitchers, Venus fly traps, poinsettia, and cacti, the leaves show different functions and shapes.

The pitcher plant and the Venus flytrap use leaves to trap and digest insects. The bright red leaves of poinsettia, though leaves, look like flower petals.

The cactus leaves are modified into small spines to perform protective functions. Again, the tendril of a pea plant & the spines of a barberry plant are homologous organs.

The tendril of a pea plant is a modified leaf used to provide mechanical support. In barberry plants, the spines are modified leaves meant for protection.

Stem:

The stems of Opuntia, ginger, and potato are modified respectively into phylloclade [Opuntia), rhizome (ginger) & tuber (potato) for preparation & storage of food. All of these are modified forms of stems, modified to adapt to their respective environments.

Analogous Organs:

The organs of the different organisms that are different in origin and structures but have similar functions are called analogous structures or organs.

In animals:

Wings:

A classical example is the wings of insects and the wings of birds and bats (mammals).

Like birds or bats, the wings are also developed in most of insects since they perform the same function.

However there is no developmental or structural similarity between the wings of insects with that of birds or bats. The wing of an insect is membranous

The same selection pressure is supported by veins, but those of birds and bats are derived from forelimbs which is supported by bones.

Hence the wings of insects are analogous structures to those of birds and bats as they perform the same function.

This superficial similarity has developed due to the adaptation to a similar environment. It is called convergent evolution.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution wings

Gliding wings:

The two animals sugar gliders & flying squirrels can glide in the air using their gliding wings. Both species are different from each other in many ways.

Flying squirrels is a placental mammals whereas sugar glider is a marsupial mammals like kangaroos. To adapt to a common function, both animals evolved similar gliding wings.

In plant:

Climbers:

A tendril of the pea plant is the modified form leaf and the tendril of jhumkalata is the modified form of the stem. The tendrils of both plants perform the same function as climbers.

Storage of food:

Potato & sweet potato also show similar characteristics but have different origins. Potato is a modified stem meant for the storage of food.

Sweet potato is a modified root also meant for the storage of food, so they are analogous.

Vestigial organs:

The organs which are present in reduced form but non-functional in possessors, but were fully formed and functional in ancestors and related species are called vestigial organs.

There are several examples of vestigial organs in living organisms—

Human vestigial organs:

Some of the vestigial organs found in humans are- the nictitating membrane of the eye, vermiform appendix, muscles of the pinna, coccyx (tail bone), canines and wisdom teeth, body hairs, mammary glands, nipples in males, etc.

Darwin’s Theory Of Evolution Class 10 

The appendix is not of any use in modern man, but it is believed that for our ancestors, the appendix was much larger and it was mostly used for the consumption of woody material such as tree bark.

Human ancestors had tails before and since, we no longer needed them, over time, while in the fetus, the tail (coccyx) has been absorbed by the body.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution muscles to move ears

Vestigial organs of other animals:

A few important examples are vestiges of pelvic girdles and hind limbs of pythons and Green Land whales; wings of flightless birds like kiwi, ostrich, etc; splint bones (2nd and 4th digits) of limbs of horses, etc.

Vestigial organs in plants:

Notable examples are leaves are reduced to scales in Asparagus, Ruscus, Cuscata, etc; vestigial stamens (staminodes) found in flowers

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution staminode pistiliode and scaly leaf of cuscuta

of several plants belonging to Labiatae, Cucurbitaceae, etc; nonfunctional pistils (pistil lodes) of male flowers of Cucurbitaceae; ray florets of sunflower lack stamens while the pistil is rudimentary with small nonfunctional stigma and ovule-less ovary.

The presence of vestigial organs indicates that organisms have evolved from ancestors since they were large, beneficial, and functional in ancestors but, in line with the concept of Natural selection, they are no longer useful for the current organisms.

Organisms have kept the traits that are useful and have lost the traits that are not useful.

Structure Of Vertebrate Heart:

A comparative study of the structural plan of hearts of different classes of vertebrates such as fishes, amphibians, reptiles, birds, and mammals will show the basic similarity with gradual complexities.

The heart in vertebrates is mainly composed of two toads and frogs, the two-chambered heart of fishes has become three-chambered (two auricles and one ventricle).

The auricle is divided into two only to prevent the admixture of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood. The heart of reptiles is also three chambered but there is a tendency for the division of the ventricle by an incomplete partition.

But in the heart of birds and mammals, the ventricle is completely divided into two chambers. So the heart of birds and mammals is composed of two auricles and two ventricles i.e. four-chambered heart.

Darwin’s Theory Of Evolution Class 10 

Here the oxygenated blood and deoxygenated blood are completely separated and this is in response to the change of habitat and to satisfy the demand for oxygen in these terrestrial animals.

Thus the simple heart of fishes gradually modifies to different classes of vertebrates and ultimately becomes a complex structure in mammals.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution structure of vertebrate heart

Thus the study of heart chambers, auricles,s and ventricles. The auricle receives the blood through veins and the ventricle distributes the blood to the different parts of the body through arteries.

In the case of fishes which are aquatic animals, the heart is composed of two chambers- a single auricle and a single ventricle.

But in response to the change of habitat from water to land in amphibians like toads and frogs, the two-chambered hearts of fishes have become three-chambered (two auricles and one ventricle).

The auricle is divided into two only to prevent the admixture of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood. The heart of reptiles is also three chambered but there is a tendency for division of the ventricle by an incomplete partition.

But in the heart of birds and mammals, the ventricle is completely divided into two chambers. So the heart of birds and mammals is composed of two auricles and two ventricles i.e. four-chambered heart.

Here the oxygenated blood and deoxygenated blood are completely separated and this is in response to the change of habitat and to satisfy the demand for oxygen in these terrestrial animals.

Thus the simple heart of fishes gradually modifies to different classes of vertebrates and ultimately becomes a complex structure in mammals.

Thus the study of the heart from fish to mammals supports organic evolution.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Embryological Evidences

Comparative studies of embryos of different organisms show some resemblances.

The similarity in early development:

All triploblastic animals develop from single-celled zygote to three-layered gastrula stages through processes like cleavage, blastulation, gastrulation, etc.

These stages of embryogeny are fundamentally similar in all the animals suggesting a common ancestor.

Similarities among vertebrate embryos:

Due to common ancestry, embryos of different vertebrates like fishes, amphibians, reptiles, birds, and mammals resemble each other so closely, during the early development period, that it is very difficult to distinguish them.

A few similarities are the presence of gill clefts, notochord, tail, etc., the development of limb buds in a similar way, and the notochord getting replaced by a vertebral column in all of them.

Again embryos of closely related animals are more alike than those of other animals which are not so closely related.

For example, the embryo of a fish is more like that of an amphibian than that of a reptile or a bird; the embryo of a monkey is more similar to that of a man than that of a reptile.

As development proceeds, the embryos of these diverse animals progressively diverge from the common pattern & attain their respective adult morphogenesis.

From these observations, Von Baer (1828) put forward Baer’s law which was later modified by Ernst Haeckel (1866) as Recapitulation theory or Biogenetic law.

The law states that ‘Ontogeny Repeats Phyllogeny’, which means that an organism, during its development (ontogeny) passes through its ancestral history (phylogeny).

Its significance is that if the development of an organism is studied from its embryo, then the ancestral history of that organism becomes clear.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution embryological evidences

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Evolution Of Plant Animal Life

Compared to prokaryotic organisms such as bacteria, plants, and animals have a relatively recent evolutionary origin. DNA evidence suggests that the first eukaryote evolved from prokaryotes between 2500 and 1000 million years ago.

Thus eukaryotes as a taxon date from the Proterozoic eons, the final eon of the Precambrian era.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Evolution Of Plant Life on the Earth

The oldest known life consists of forms of bacteria, blue-green algae, and green algae, all of which probably resided in saltwater environments.

The stromatolites were formed by the action of early plant life. They are the indirect evidence of early life, rather than consisting entirely of fossilized life.

Stromatolites are layered mounds, columns, and sheet-like sedimentary rocks that were originally formed by the growth of layer upon layer of cyanobacteria, a single-celled photosynthetic microbe.

Bacteria and blue-green algae have a prokaryotic organization. Their cells lack true nuclei, because of the absence of a nuclear membrane.

The cellular unit of plants and animals is the more advanced eukaryotic cell, in which nuclear material is set off from the cytoplasm of the cell by a nuclear membrane.

Lamarckism And Darwinism Class 10

Eukaryotic cells first appeared in the fossil record 2.5 billion years ago. These cells were evidently photosynthetic and they most closely resembled the green algae. They have developed into higher plant forms.

Some Of These Developments Are Listed Below

Thallophytes:

Algae:

These eukaryotic plants, which are classified primarily on the basis of color (green, golden-brown, brown, red) lack true roots, stems, and leaves.

Fungi:

These non-photosynthetic plants also have undifferentiated plant bodies with a unique filamentous structure called mycelia and participate in decomposition activity or may also survive as a parasite.

Bryophytes:

(mosses and liverworts) These plants possess a greater specialization of tissues than is found among the thallophytes. True roots do not exist, but the mosses and liverworts have distinct leaf-like forms. Their fossils are quite rare.

Tracheophytes ; (club mosses):

They are also called lycopods or lycopsids, and possess true roots, stems, and leaves, as is true with all tracheophytes. The most common living members are Lycopodium and Selaginella, which enjoy widespread distribution.

The club mosses are characterized by scale-like leaves and a dichotomous branching of the stem.

During the Carboniferous, the most conspicuous forms were the arborescent lycopsids, especially Lepidodendron and Sigillaria. Their remains are one of the chief ingredients of coal.

Horsetails:

These lower vascular plants are also called sphenopsids. Equisetum is the only living genus. The leaves are reduced in size, and the stem and cones of horsetails are characterized by the presence of ridges (nodes and internodes).

Pteropslds:

These plants are differentiated into root, stem, and leaves. True ferns are a group of plants that appeared fairly early in the history of land plants, and they continue to adapt successfully to the earth’s environments.

Gymnosperms:

They are also called naked-seeded trees. Most of these plants have become extinct and few are living right now,

some of these are discussed below:

Cycads:

They have short, thick trunks and apical crowns of leaves that are classified separately on the basis of reproductive anatomies (particularly cone structure). Some present-day cycads are arborescent, an Australian species growing as tall as 60 feet.

Ginkgo:

One species remains alive today, native to remote forests of China, and planted widely as an ornamental tree.

Leaves of these plants are fan-shaped, sometimes deeply lobed, and with a characteristic venation.

Because the Ginkgo has remained largely unchanged in appearance for many millions of years, it is referred to as a living fossil.

Conifers:

The conifers represent the largest group of gymnosperms.

The seven present-day families include pine, spruce, fir, hemlock, juniper, cypress, bald cypress, and the largest form of life on earth, the Sequoia (gigantea is the largest plant; sem previews is the tallest).

Conifers are usually evergreens and their leaves appear as needles. They are more prevalent in temperate parts of the world.

Angiosperms:

They are the most advanced plants on earth, they are also called flowering plants. They have covered seed, and ovules remain in hollow ovaries.

They are abundant and exceedingly diverse plants, with more than 200,000 species known to exist.

Angiosperms first appeared 135 million years ago and they began their present dominance 70 to 100 million years ago.

The two basic forms of angiosperms are the monocotyledons and dicotyledons, which are distinguished by the number of embryonic leaves, the arrangement of vascular bundles in stems and roots, leaf venation, and groupings of petals in the flowers.

Angiosperm families are grouped primarily on the basis of floral structure.

The following trends in evolution are commonly observed in plants:

Energy generation:

The method of energy generation has occurred in the following way; early life forms must necessarily have existed under anaerobic conditions.

They were heterotrophic forms of life, meaning that food and necessary nutrients were obtained externally, most likely through processes of fermentation.

Later, autotrophic organisms developed which could produce their own food, through the process of photosynthesis. A consequence of autotrophic life is the development of aerobic life.

Cellular organization:

Prokaryotic cells, with less organized nuclear material, lead to eukaryotic cells, with true nuclei; unicellular life forms leading to multicellularity.

Ecological niches:

The plants occupied aquatic (marine and freshwater) forms and later led to the development of the land plant.

Differentiation of plant tissues:

The development occurred in the form of branching; evolution of roots, stems, and leaves; development of the seed. Early land plants lacked branching.

The greater complexity of growth was attained by plants that had a dichotomous pattern of branching, with two equal axes being formed at each fork.

Ultimately, trilateral branching off a main stem evolved. The evolution of the seed is considered to be one of the most significant advances of land plants.

Plant size:

The herbaceous habit led to the arborescent habit. It is not to be assumed that larger plants are more complex or advanced plants.

It is true, in the plant world as well as the animal world, that many life forms have followed a trend towards larger and larger representatives.

The club mosses and horsetails are examples of plants that achieved gigantism and dominance, only to be followed by the extinction of the large forms.

Size of the Reproductive Spores:

Asexual reproduction was followed by sexual reproduction. Early land plants were homosporous; they had reproductive spores of one type & one size.

An important advance in the move towards seed production was heterosporous reproduction, where two distinct reproductive cells, of differing sizes, were produced by plants.

The development of sexual reproduction and of the seed allows for increased efficiency of reproduction and the increased possibility of genetic variability.

Coevolution with animals:

The angiosperms have undergone an accelerated evolution during their 135 million-year history largely as a response to the pressures exerted by insect predators.

They have adapted to life with insects not only as a means for defense as is the case with the conifers, but also in ways that have increased the reproductive advantage and dispersal advantage of these plants.

Lamarckism And Darwinism Class 10

The wide variety of flower types among the angiosperms, and the extremely elaborate ways in which some species have coevolved with particular species of insects (orchids and wasps, for example)

Give ample evidence that they have attained a degree of success in exploiting their environments that has never been attained by other plant types.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Evolution Of Animals

The unicellular animal cells are represented by protozoa. The oldest fossil evidence of multicellular animals, or metazoans, burrows that appear to have been made by smooth, worm-like organisms.

Such trace fossils have been found in rocks from China, Canada, and India, but they tell us little about the animals that made them apart from their basic shape.

In 2016, scientists reported that, about 800 million years ago, a minor genetic change in a single molecule called GK-PID may have allowed organisms to go from a single-cell organism to one of many cells.

Between 620 and 550 million years ago (during the Vendian Period) relatively large, complex, soft-bodied multicellular animals
appeared in the fossil record for the first time.

These animals include sponges that represent multicellular organisms without any definite cellular organization. The animal is sedentary, it has a calcareous body and multiple pores called ostia.

The first differentiation occurred in the form of the outer ectoderm and endoderm with the mesoglea in between; they have a cavity inside called coelenteron, e.g. Hydra and Jellyfish.

Helminths:

The first triploblastic animal then appeared was in the form of tapeworms (Platyhelminthes). Their body is dorsoventrally flattened and they are without any cavity inside. The animal is bisexual and can exhibit self-fertilization.

The pseudocolor appeared in the nematode, which is lined by endoderm, but the sexes are different and they require both the male and female for sexual reproduction.

Annelids:

The true coelomate animal appeared next in the form of annelids, which has a metamerically segmented body and tubular alimentary canal; they have pigmented blood and closed vasculature, e.g. Earthworm.

Arthropods:

The next group of animals had jointed appendages, well-developed hearts, open circulation, and internal fertilization. This group of animals represents the largest group of invertebrates.

Mollusca:

This group of animals has developed a heart and an intermediate between open and closed circulation. The animal has a muscular foot and an outer shell enclosing a soft body covered by a mantle.

Echinodermata:

These are the highest-evolved invertebrates with a developed cerebral ganglia, water vascular system, and haemal system.

Chordate:

This group is the highest evolved with a notochord, dorsal nerve cord, and pharyngeal gill slit.

The group starts with hemichordates, followed by Urochordata, and Cephalochordata, and the most advanced group is Vertebrata. The Vertebrata evolved through fishes, amphibia, reptiles, aves, and mammals.

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The fossils are found mostly in________________ rock.
Answer: Sedimentary

Question 2. The life originated before________________ years ago.
Answer: 3.5 Billion

Question 3. Peripatus joins________________ and arthropods.
Answer: Annelids

Question 4. ________________ joins gymnosperms and angiosperms.
Answer: Gnetum

Question 5. The coccyx is a________________ organ in man.
Answer: Vestigial

Question 6. The incomplete ventricular septum is found in the heart of________________.
Answer: Reptiles

Evolution Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. The competition between members of different species is known as ________________ struggle.
Answer: Interspecific

Question 8. The________________ law was given by Haeckel.
Answer: Biogenetic

Question 9. ________________ coined the word evolution.
Answer: Lycll

Question 10. ________________ has led to global biodiversity.
Answer: Evolution

Question 11. Origin of Life on Earth was written by________________.
Answer: Oparin

Question 12. The highest evolved invertebrate phylum is________________
Answer: Echinodermata

Question 13. Protovirus originated from________________ .
Answer: Protein

Question 14. Ginkgo is a________________ .
Answer: Living fossil

Question 15. changed the earth’s atmosphere from a reducing to an oxidizing one________________.
Answer: Photosynthesis

Question 16. Flippers of the whale are similar to ________________ of man.
Answer: Hands

Question 17. ________________ are called the connecting link between the living and nonliving.
Answer: Viruses

Question 18. Mammoth is an example of________________ .
Answer: Intact preservation

Question 19. ________________ joins pteridophyte and gymnosperms.
Answer: pteridosperm

Question 20. ________________ is the raw material of evolution.
Answer: Mutation

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Write True Or False

Question 1. Amphibia has 3 chambered heart.
Answer: True

Question 2. The earliest horse is Merrychippus.
Answer: False

Question 3. The earliest first living units are called protobionts.
Answer: True

Question 4. The use and disuse theory was proposed by Darwin.
Answer: False

Question 5. Mutation theory was proposed by Lamarck.
Answer: False

Question 6. Natural Selection theory was proposed by Darwin.
Answer: True

Evolution Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. Birds are glorified reptiles.
Answer: True

Question 8. Pteridosperm is in between the pteridophyte and the gymnosperm.
Answer: True

Question 9. Ginkgo is a missing link.
Answer: False

Question 10. Gnetum connects gymnosperm and angiosperm.
Answer: True

Question 11. Food, space, and other basic necessities of organisms are unlimited.
Answer: False

Question 12. Archaeopteryx is a missing link.
Answer: True

Question 13. Urey and Miller disapproved of Oparin’s theory.
Answer: False

Question 14. Vascular tissues first appeared in pteridophytes.
Answer: True

Question 15. Fishes have 3 chambered hearts.
Answer: False

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Match The Column

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution match the column 1
Answer: 1-E,2-D,3-A,4-B
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution match the column 2
Answer: 1-B,2-E,3-D,4-A
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution match the column 3
Answer: 1-B,2-D,3-A,4-A
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution match the column 4
Answer: 1-E,2-C,3-D,4-B
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution match the column 5
Answer: 1-E,2-C,3-B,4-A

 

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is the full form of LUCA?
Answer: Last Universal Common Ancestor, also called the Last Universal Ancestor (LUA).

Question 2. Name the link between the gymnosperm and the angiosperm.
Answer: Gnetum.

Question 3. Name the Eon when life started.
Answer: Proterozoic Eon.

Question 4. Name the membrane-bound Procell.
Answer: Coace private.

Question 5. Give the other name for proteinoid.
Answer: Microsphere.

Question 6. Where did life start?
Answer: In Ocean.

Evolution Class 10 MCQs

Question 7. State the duration of organic evolution.
Answer: 3.5 billion years.

Question 8. Name the organs which are structurally the same, but functionally different.
Answer: Homologous organs.

Question 9. Name the vestigial organ of the human eye. 
Answer: Nictitating membrane.

Question 10. Name the animal connecting reptiles and mammals.
Answer: Duck-billed platypus.

Question 11. Name the ship on which Darwin undertook his voyage.
Answer: H.M.S. Beagle.

Question 12. Name the oldest living fish.
Answer: Coelacanth.

Question 13. Name the connecting link between fishes and amphibia.
Answer: Latimaria.

Question 14. A pair of related terms is given below. On the basis of the relationship in the first pair, write the suitable word in the gap of the second pair.
Answer:

Flood: environmental struggle:: the battle to grab mating partner: Intraspecific struggle

Peripatus: Connecting link between Annelida & Arthropoda:: Pteridosperm: Connecting link between Pteridophyta and Gymnosperm

Macroevolution: Grand scale evolution of geological time::Microevolution: Genetic level evolution

Question 15. Which theory was proposed by Weisman? 
Answer: Germplasm theory.

Question 16. Name the functional form of the Appendix. 
Answer: Caecum.

Question 17. Name the book written by Lamarck.
Answer: Philosophic Zoologique.

Question 18. What is a mutant?
Answer: An organism formed by mutation.

Question 19. Name the phylum showing pseudocolor.
Answer: Aschelminthes.

Question 20. Name the type of heart found in fish.
Answer: Venous heart.

Question 21. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out that term and write it:
Answer: 

  1. Darwin’s point, vestigial organs, auricular muscles, Erector pili vestigial organs.
  2. Natural selection, mutation, Neo Darwinism, Darwinism Neo Darwinism

Question 22. Name a plant with pistilode-
Answer: Asparagus.

Question 23. Name a living fossil within a pteridophyte.
Answer: Psilotum.

Question 24. Where should a mutation occur for evolutionary success?
Answer: In germplasm DNA.

Question 25. Use the proper scientific term to explain the better adaptation of certain individuals among a population.
Answer: Natural Selection.

Question 26. Choose the odd one and write it: Species diversification, mutation, species death, evolution.
Answer: Species death.

Question 27. Name the smallest unit of living organisms that can undergo evolution.
Answer: A population.

Evolution Class 10 MCQs

Question 28. Give examples of living fossils (one each) from the animal and plant kingdom.
Answer: Bony fish Coelacanth (Latimeria menadoensis) Ginkgo biloba (Gymnosperm)

Question 29. Which type of animals has been fossilized most?
Answer: Invertebrates.

Question 30. What is ontogeny?
Answer: Ontogeny is the origin and development of an organism usually from the time of fertilization of the egg to the organism’s mature form (embryonic development).

WBBSE Chapter 4 Topic A Evolution Short Answer Questions With Answers
Question 1. What do you mean by LUCA?
Answer:

LUCA

LUCA (The last universal common ancestor) or LUA is the most recent common ancestor of all current life on earth.

LUCA is not the first living organism on earth, but only one of many early organisms, whereas the others became extinct. LUCA is estimated to have lived some 3.5 to 3.8 billion years ago.

LUCA had a single cell with a water-based cytoplasm enclosed by a lipid bilayer membrane. It had a set of 355 genes, a ring-shaped coil of DNA composed of four nucleotides, and was an anaerobic, C02 fixing, and thermophilic organism.

LUCA evolved in areas like deep sea vents and could tolerate environmental extremes like high salinity, acidity, or temperature.

Question 2. What are coacervates ?
Answer:

Coacervates

Coacervates consist of a colloidal protein with an outer lipoprotein membrane and represent a protocell.

Also called microspheres or proteinoids, they not only could move around but also exhibit endosmosis or exosmosis when kept under hypotonic and hypertonic conditions.

They do not contain any cell organelle but have enzymatic properties and therefore can be the center of different biochemical reactions.

Question 3. What is proto ribosome?
Answer:

Proto ribosome

The granular or fibrous RNA proteinoid complex which can perform a ribosome-related function is called a proto ribosome.

Question 4. How proteinoid is generated?
Answer:

Sidney Fox (1957-58) applied dry heat to a mixture of 18 amino acids and then cooled it. They joined to produce a polypeptide called proteinoid in the presence of water.

Question 5. How was organic molecule first produced in the world?
Answer:

When the temperature of the Earth went down to 100°C, hydrocarbons and water reacted with each other to produce biomacromolecules of fatty acid, sugar, nucleotide, amino acids, purine, pyrimidines, etc in the form of colloids.

Question 6. How protovirus was produced?
Answer:

The small nucleoprotein molecules joined with each other to produce a larger nucleoproteinoid which is also called the provirus.

Question 7. What is meant by the inheritance of acquired characteristics?
Answer:

Inheritance of acquired characteristics

As per Lamarckism, the changes or characters acquired by an organism in its lifetime are transmitted to the next generation.

It means that changes are cumulative over some time. This is known as the inheritance of acquired characteristics.

Question 8. Distinguish between homologous and analogous organs.
Answer:

Difference between homologous and analogous organs

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution Homologous and analogous

Question 9. What is organic evolution?
Answer:

Organic evolution

The slow but gradual process by which simple life forms are converted to relatively complex life forms over successive generations through the process of reproduction & variation is called organic evolution.

Evolution Class 10 MCQs

Question 10. What is the RNA world hypothesis?
Answer:

RNA world hypothesis

The RNA world states that RNA acted as an enzyme that developed into protein and gave rise to DNA by reverse transcription. Thus life forms were created from RNA. RNA was the first molecule of heredity and DNA evolved after it.

Question 11. How origin of new species was explained?
Answer:

The origin of new species was mentioned by Darwin, but he could not explain it.

It was later explained by Hugo deVries, who showed that because of the sudden & permanent modification or mutation of the constituent gene, new species are created.

Thus mutations are the raw materials of evolution.

Question 12. How is it possible that birds have originated from reptiles?
Answer:

The Archaeopteryx, which is a fossil bird is a missing link between reptiles and birds.

Like reptiles, they had teeth in the jaw, clawed digits, and long tails, and like birds, they had feathers, anterior limbs modified to form wings, and a round cranium.

Thus the presence of both reptilian and avian characters explains the mechanism of transmission between the two classes. Hesperornis was a flightless toothed aquatic bird and also an intermediate between reptiles & birds.

Such missing links sharing the characters of two groups prove the origin of birds from reptiles in the evolutionary process.

Question 13. What is the source of energy in the ancient world?
Answer:

The source of energy in the ancient world

UV rays, X-rays, cosmic rays, electric discharges from lightning, and the heat of volcanic lava were the possible sources of energy in the ancient world.

Question 14. What was the nature of the environment of the ancient Earth?
Answer:

The nature of the environment of the ancient Earth

The environment of the ancient Earth was reducing in nature.

The environment contained hydrogen, methane, ammonia, and water vapor.

There was no free Oxygen. More UV rays could enter the lower atmosphere of the Earth but absorption of UV was low. The ambient temperature was quite high compared to the present-day temperature.

Question 15. What is Dolio’s law?
Answer:

Dolio’s law

Evolution is irreversible. This is called Dolio’s law.

Question 16. What is speciation?
Answer:

Speciation

Speciation refers to the formation of new species. Factors that influence speciation are mutation, hybridization, recombination, polyploidy, natural selection, genetic drift, and isolation.

Question 17. Name and explain a vestigial behavior of human beings.
Answer:

The formation of goose bumps in humans under stress is a vestigial reflex or behavior.

A possible function of human evolutionary ancestors was to raise the body’s hair, making the ancestor appear larger to scare off predators.

Raising the hair was also used to trap an extra layer of air to keep the body warm. Due to the diminished amount of hair in humans, the reflex formation of goosebumps when cold is also vestigial.

Question 18. Explain the Germplasm theory in brief.
Answer:

The Germplasm theory

The germ plasm theory was proposed by August Weismann. The theory states that each organism is formed of two types of cells— somatic cells and germ cells.

The somatic cells constitute all the body cells except the germ cells of gonads and they perish with the death of the organism. Any character, acquired by the organism in its somatic cells, can not therefore be transmitted to its offspring.

That is why the facial scar of a soldier is not inherited by his son or daughter. The germ cells or gametes are transmitted from parents to the offspring.

So any change occurring in the germplasm cells is only transmitted to the offspring. The proposal of germplasm theory gave a huge blow to Lamarckism.

Question 19. Mention the factors on which the modern synthetic theory of evolution is based. Explain the phenomenon of elongation of the neck of a giraffe as per the modern concept of evolution.
Answer:

The modern Synthetic theory of evolution is based on the following factors:

  1. Genetic variability in populations
  2. Genetic and chromosomal mutation
  3. Natural Selection
  4. Reproductive isolation
  5. The ancestors of giraffes had necks and forelimbs of different lengths.

With changes in situations, as giraffes were forced to reach leaves on tall trees to access limited food in heterogeneous environments, the giraffes with longer necks and forelimbs had an advantage over others.

These long-necked giraffes had a better chance of survival and the genes controlling the traits were selected by nature as useful mutations.

Accumulation of variations produced new species when these giraffes reproduced and thus, the offsprings possessed the same advantageous variations.

This becomes a case of directional selection or progressive selection in which deviant individuals develop adaptations in response to environmental change and tend to survive and produce more offspring while the other section of individuals who cannot respond to environmental change are eliminated.

This explains how the present-day giraffe with long necks and forelimbs came into existence.

Question 20. What is parallel evolution?
Answer:

Parallel evolution

Analogous organs (having different origins and structures) have a superficial resemblance due to adaptations in similar environments and for the execution of the same function.

This type of evolution is known as parallel evolution. For example, the wings of insects, birds, and bats show this type of evolution since all these organs undergo adaptations to suit the flight of the organisms involved.

Question 21. What do you mean by convergent evolution?
Answer:

Convergent evolution

When similar parts of different animals or plants belonging to different groups are modified for the same purpose to adapt themselves in similar habitats or environments, it is known as convergent evolution.

For example, the same organ (fore limb) of whales and fish have been modified into flippers and fins respectively to suit the aquatic environment.

Both flippers and fins perform the common functions of swimming, steering, and balancing by undergoing convergent evolution.

Among plants, the phylloclade of cactus, the stipule of sweet pea, and the phyllode of Acacia undergo adaptations to perform the same type of functions under similar environmental conditions. These are analogous organs and they show convergent evolution.

Evolution Class 10 Life Science

Question 22. What is divergent evolution?
Answer:

Divergent evolution

When the same basic organs belonging to similar groups of organisms become adapted by specialization to different functions in different environments, it is known as divergent evolution.

The forelimbs of vertebrates are made up of the same structural elements, but whales use them as paddles for swimming, man uses them for holding or gripping, birds and bats use the wings for flying, and horses for running.

In plants, the phylloclade of cactus, cladode of Satamuli (Asparagus), the tendrils of Marjorie, and the rhizome of ginger are different modifications of the stem to perform different functions.

These are homologous organs that evolved due to the adaptation of these organisms to different environments. Hence these are examples of divergent evolution.

Question 23. What is a connecting link? Give examples.
Answer:

Connecting link

Animals exhibiting characters of two adjacent taxonomic groups that are still surviving on earth are called connecting links.

They afford very good evidence of organic evolution since the presence of characteristics of both groups indicates the evolution of one from another.

Peripatus is a connecting link between arthropods and annelids. Its arthropod characters are claws, jaws, hemocoel, trachea, and dorsal tubular heart.

The annelidan characters are continuous muscle layers in the body wall, unjoined legs, and nephridia. Neopilina is a connecting link between annelids and molluscans.

It is the only segmented mollusk that has a cup-shaped shell. Its visceral mass is divided into five segments each with a pair of shell muscles, gills, auricles, and nephridia.

Chimaera is a connecting link between cartilaginous and bony fishes. It has a cartilaginous skeleton, ventral mouth, dorsal fins, etc.

It resembles bony fish since it has a small mouth with fleshy lips, four pairs of gills, the absence of a cloaca, a separate anus, and a urinogenital aperture.

Balanoglossus, a protochordate, is a connecting link between invertebrates and chordates. It is a chordate because it contains a notochord, tubular nerve chord, and gill slits. The invertebrate characters include the phosphagen and the larva.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Evolution Notes

Question 24. Differentiate between inherited and acquired characters. Give examples of each type.
Answer:

Difference between inherited and acquired characters

Characters that are passed on from parents to offspring are known as inherited characters. Only those characters which have a gene for them are inherited.

Example: Colour of eyes. Characters that appear in an individual’s lifetime but that are not transmitted to the next generation are acquired characters.

Acquired characters do not produce changes in the DNA of germ cells, so they are not inherited.

Example: obese body.

Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The earliest ancestor in the evolution of the horse is
Answer: Eohippus

Question 2. Homologous organs evolve due to evolution.
Answer: Divergent

Question 3. was the aggregate of some large colloidal molecules during the early phase of the origin of life.
Answer: Coacervate

Write True Or False

Question 1. The fundamental tenet of the evolutionary theory of Darwin is the process of natural selection.
Answer: True

Question 2. In Lamarck’s opinion, organisms can acquire any particular inheritable physical trait according to their need.
Answer: True

Question 3. According to Darwin organisms reproduce at geometric ratios.
Answer: True

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Which type of evolution is indicated by homologous organs?
Answer: Divergent evolution.

Short Answer Type Questions With Answers

Question 1. Write the names of reactants used and one organic compound formed in the experiment of Miller and Urey in connection with the chemical origin of life.
Answer: 

Urey and Millar’s experiment Reactants used: 

A mixture of methane, ammonia, and hydrogen (in the ratio of 2:2:1) and water vapor organic compound formed (product): Amino acids such as glycine, alanine, aspartic acid, and glutamic acid.

Question 2. Write four important features modified in the evolution of the horse.
Answer:

Evolution of horse:

Increase in size:

Eohippus (30 cm high at shoulders) Mesohippus (61 cm high at shoulders) Merychippus (102 cm high at shoulders) Equus (150 cm high at shoulders).

Lengthening of limbs and feet to attain a speed

Reduction of lateral digits: 

Eohippus had forefeet with four complete fingers (2,3,4 and 5) and one splint of the first finger and hind feet with three functional toes (2, 3, and 4) and two splints of the first and fifth toes. Both the fore and hind feet of modern horses have one finger and one toe and two splints.

Increase in length and thickness of the third digit.

Question 3. Mention two features of internal structures on the basis of which ‘flipper of whales’ and ‘wings of birds’ are considered homologous organs.
Answer: Both the flipper of whales and the wings of birds are modified forelimbs of vertebrates.

The upper portion of the fore limb is supported by the humerus. Below the humorous, there are radius and ulna. These two bones are followed by carpals, metacarpals, and phalanges. Thus the bones reveal a striking similarity.

Flipper is a typically flat forelimb evolved for movement through the water. In the case of birds, the forelimbs are modified into wings for flying purposes in the aerial mode of life.

Hence, though there are some modifications in the bones for adaptation to different environmental conditions, the basic plan of arrangement of bones remains the same. Hence these are homologous structures.

Question 4. Write the names of one each vestigial organ present in the vertebral column and alimentary canal in the human body.
Answer:

Human vestigial organ Present in the vertebral column:

A vestigial tail or coccyx at the end of the vertebral column Present in the alimentary canal: Vermiform appendix of the caecum.

Question 5. Write in chronological sequence the names of four main fossil ancestors during the course of the evolution of horses.
Answer:

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution period

 

Question 6. Explain the process of Natural Selection as proposed by Darwin with the help of a suitable example. 
Answer:

Salient Features Of Darwin’s Theory of Natural Selection

The important features of Darwin’s theory are as follows—

1. Prodigality of reproduction:

Organisms have enormous fertility and they multiply in geometric ratio.

A few examples are—

Insects lay hundreds of eggs.

Plants produce thousands of seeds. A single fern produces a few million spores.

A salmon fish lays several hundred eggs at a time.

Elephant, the slowest breeder, lives for about 90 years. They attain reproductive maturity at about the age of 30 and give rise to about 6 offspring per head during their lifetime.

It is calculated that, if all offerings survive, then 19 million descendent elephants will be produced in 750 years from a single female.

2. Limitation of food and space:

Though a population tends to increase geometrically; food, space, and other resources on Earth are limited and they are liable to increase only arithmetically.

Limited food and space, which together form the major part of the carrying capacity of the environment, are the two main limiting factors that do not allow a population to grow indefinitely.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Evolution Notes

The struggle for existence:

Due to the rapid multiplication of populations but limited food & space, there starts an everlasting competition

between individuals having similar requirements.

In this competition, every living organism desires to have an upper hand over others.

The struggle for existence may be of three different types—

Intraspecific struggle:

It is the struggle between members of the same species because they share similar environmental resources.

Examples:

Two dogs struggling for a piece of meat.

Interspecific struggle:

It is the struggle for the members of different species due to sharing the same ecological conditions.

Example:

The struggle between predator and prey.

Environmental or extra-specific struggle:

It is the struggle of individuals with environmental constraints like floods, drought, earthquakes, extreme heat or cold disease, etc.

Out of these three forms of struggles, the intraspecific struggle is the strongest type as the needs of the individuals of same species are most similar.

Example:

Sexual selection in which a cock with a more beautiful comb and plumage has a better chance to win a hen than a cock with a less developed comb.

Similarly, cannibalism is another example of intraspecific struggle as in this individuals eat the members of the same species.

4. Variation:

Except for identical twins, no two individuals are alike and their requirements also vary. This is known as variation and by these variations, some individuals become better adapted to their environment.

According to Darwin, the variations are continuous. Adaptively useful variations pass to the next generation, while the others disappear.

Examples of variations with competitive advantages are increased speed in prey, increased water conservation in plants, etc.

5. Natural selection:

Individuals with favorable variations and greater reproduction ability are selected by nature. Unfit individuals are rejected by nature.

Characters, selected by nature, pass to the next generation. Sorting out of individuals with useful variations from a
heterogeneous population by nature was called natural Selection by Darwin. So natural selection acts as a restrictive force and not a creative force.

Theories Of Evolution Class 10

6. Survival of fittest and origin of species:

Descendents with favorable variations, selected by nature, will survive because they are the fittest to adapt to their environment; while the unfits will become extinct.

Originally, the phrase ‘the survival of the fittest, was first used by Herbert Spencer.

7. Speciation:

According to Darwinism, useful variations appear in every generation and are inherited from one generation to another.

So the useful variations go on accumulating and Darwin considered that, after several generations, the descendants with continuous and gradual variations will be so distinct from their ancestors, that they will form a new species.

So, according to Darwinism, evolution is a gradual process and speciation occurs by gradual changes in the existing species.

Examples Of Natural Selection

Skeletal adaptations:

Giraffes, lizards, and many other known species adapted to their environments through genetic changes to their skeletons.

Giraffes developed long necks to reach food sources higher up in trees, so members of the giraffe population who didn’t develop a long neck died out.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution skeletal adaptations

 

At the same time, certain lizards with one characteristic are passed on to the next generation in greater proportion than the shorter neck region developed longer leg bones to help them climb up during periods of flood and to escape predators in the ground;

shorter-legged lizards of the same population died out until only the lizards with long legs survived.

Coloration:

Many species of deer mouse, peppered moth, and peacock have adapted to their environment through adaptations in coloring.

Once the optimal coloration is present, natural selection occurs when members of the species without the adaptive coloring died out more quickly and therefore, did not reproduce as abundantly.

Bacteria:

Bacteria can adapt to new food sources that were previously unusable.

Some bacteria have adapted to the presence of deadly antibiotics and exhibited traits that let them not only survive but also reproduce to generate offspring that are also resistant to the antibiotics.

Question 7. Tigers are extinct but there are many deer in the jungle. A few tigers are brought from another sanctuary and released in such a jungle. Imagine and write the names of different kinds of struggles for existence those tigers have to be involved in.
Answer:

The struggle for existence:

Intra-specific struggle due to the sharing of similar environmental resources

Interspecific struggle coming from members of other predator species, if any

Environmental struggle due to new geographical location and geological conditions of the jungle.-

WBBSE Chapter 1 Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Show the major evolutionary events with the help of a flow chart.
Answer:

Major Evolutionary Events

Origin of Earth:

Formation of the Earth some 5000 million years ago in the form of a mass of burning gases separated from the sun as per the Big Bang hypothesis. The temperature was about 5000 to 6000°C.

Formation of water, methane, and ammonia:

Gradual cooling of the Earth and hardening of the Earth’s crust, creation of clouds followed by precipitation, and formation of the small and large water bodies.

The primitive earth contained large amounts of hydrogen, nitrogen, carbon & oxygen. Of these, hydrogen combined with nitrogen to form ammonia, with oxygen to form water, and with carbon to form methane.

Compounds like ammonia, methane, etc got dissolved in rainwater and accumulated in the sea. Mineral rocks also dissolved ” leading to the accumulation of minerals and salts in seawater. Thus the first chemicals formed on the earth were water, ammonia, methane, and others.

Formation of micro and macromolecules:

The next step was the formation of micromolecules like amino acids, fatty acids, purine, pyrimidines, etc. in the form of colloids.

The micromolecules combine in various ways to form macromolecules like proteins, lipids, nucleic acids & nucleoproteins. The first formed proteins were called proto-proteins.

In the next step, nucleic acids were formed from phosphoric acid, sugar, purines, and pyrimidines. The nucleic acids and proteins combine to form nucleoproteins.

Coacervation:

Formation of lipid membrane-bound structures commonly called coacervates. They exhibited certain properties of cells.

Development of monera and protista:

Coacervates developed into provirus which gradually grew into two fundamental types monera and the Protista.

Oxygen revolution:

The emergence of the first photosynthetic bacteria or cyanobacteria having chlorophyll (a universal photosynthetic pigment) and blue-green pigments like phycocyanin.

These organisms had the ability of oxygenic photosynthesis which resulted in the liberation of oxygen in the atmosphere that turned the reducing environment to oxidizing environment.

The advent of multicellularity:

The prokaryotic organisms became diversified and divided repeatedly to produce multicellular prokaryotes.

The accumulation of free oxygen in the earth’s atmosphere made possible the evolution of aerobic metabolism, eukaryotes, sexual recombination, and multicellularity.

Formation of eukaryotes:

The emergence of nuclear membranes produced the first formed eukaryotes, which were initially unicellular and later became multicellular.

All early cells were haploid. Diploid cells appeared when some cells failed to divide after their DNA was duplicated. Diploid cells were better protected from harmful mutations.

Diversification to other forms:

Emergence of aquatic invertebrate animals.

The emergence of aquatic vertebrates in the form of fishes and their diversification.

The gradual development of land plants, and their colonization resulted in the massive modification of the terrestrial habitat, adding more oxygen to the terrestrial environment.

Diversification of terrestrial habitats with the development of new adaptive features which modified the Earth’s landscape.

The gradual shift of animal species from aquatic to terrestrial habitats initially for a short time in the form of four-limbed amphibians later creating a permanent terrestrial group of animals in the form of reptiles

The emergence of the highest-evolved land mammals.

Question 2. Describe the brief outline of the chemical origin of life mentioning Miller and Urey’s experiment.
Answer:

Abiogenesis Spontaneous Generation Or Naturalistic Theory

Russian biochemist A.I. Oparin and English biologist J.B.S Haldane suggested a theory that complex organic molecules were formed through a series of chemical reactions under the influence of lightning.

Organic compounds like water, ammonia, methane, alcohol, amino acids, etc produce ‘hot soup’ or ‘primordial soup’ within water bodies where smaller organic compounds combine together to form large organic compounds like polypeptides, proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, etc.

These compounds produced the first living cell. Thus life is believed to have originated in oceans. The stage of chemical evolution is completed with the origin of proteins, nucleoproteins, and nucleic acids.

The process involved in the formation of a living cell from simple inorganic and organic nonliving elements is called abiogenesis or spontaneous generation of life from nonliving matters.

Oparin assumed that natural forces made some molecules in a colloidal solution mix and organize to form droplets called coacervates.

Successful coacervates gradually became better organized to give rise to the first living cells. The formation of coacervates was called coacervation.

Salient Features Of Coacervates Were As Follows:

They were stable, spherical with uniform diameter and microscopic.

They had double-layered boundaries around them.

They were motile and capable of growth,

They could reproduce through binary fission, budding, and fragmentation.

Urey and Miller’s Experiment

In 1953 Urey and his student Miller devised an experiment to give direct evidence of the molecular evolution of life or the abiogenic origin of life.

In this experiment, they took a mixture of methane, ammonia, and hydrogen (in the ratio of 2:2:1) in a discharge tube which was connected to a flask containing boiling water.

The hydrocarbon mixture within the discharge tube resembled the primitive atmosphere of Earth and the flask containing boiling water resembled the primitive sea.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution urey and millers experiment

 

The water vapor from boiling water simulated torrential rain which formed the water bodies on Earth.

The gas mixture in the tube was subjected to electric discharge at 75000 volts for 7 days to resemble vigorous lightning and violent electrical storms in early Earth.

It was then cooled with the help of a condenser and liquified and the liquid was collected in another flask. On analyzing the jelly-like liquid it was found to contain simple organic compounds such as amino acids, hydroxy acids, and aliphatic acids.

The amino acids included glycine, alanine, aspartic acid, and glutamic acid. In this experiment, alpha-alanine predominated over beta-alanine.

Modern proteins contain only alpha amino acids. Miller argued that amino acids were formed on primitive Earth under the influence of ultraviolet light and lightning. The resultant liquid contained no nucleic acids.

Inference:

From the experimental observation, Miller concluded that organic molecules were synthesized abiotically in early Earth under the energetic influence of thunderstorms, cosmic radiations, etc. Thus the phenomenon of the chemical origin of life was proved.

Conditions on earth at the time of the origin of life differed greatly from those of today. No free oxygen was present in Earth’s early atmosphere.

The reducing atmosphere of early Earth helped chemical reactions to occur that produced a molecular soup.

Under conditions that resemble Earth’s primitive reducing atmosphere, small molecules essential to living systems formed and polymerized.

Moreover, these molecules accumulated in the seas because the rate of their formation was greater than the rate at which they were destroyed.

In a somewhat similar experiment, Sydney Fox obtained complicated molecules of protein having similar properties to the coacervates of Oparin.

Fox called those molecules microspheres which, like coacervates, were immiscible in the surrounding medium.

Theories Of Evolution Class 10

Question 3. Describe two major tenets of Lamarck’s evolutionary theory. How the comparative anatomy of hearts act as proof in favor of evolutionary theory? 
Answer:

Lamarck’s Theory

Lamarck’s theory, known as Lamarckism, was proposed by French biologist Jean Baptista de Lamarck (1744-1829) and the theory was discussed in detail in his book ‘Philosophic Zoologique’ in 1809.

Lamarckism comprises of following propositions or assumptions.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 4 Evolution And Adaptation Topic A Evolution jean baptista de lamarck.jpg

1. New needs and their effects:

Continuous changes in the environment create new needs in organisms to become better adapted or more suited to the changed environment.

As a result, certain organs are extensively used and certain others are disused. Lamarck quoted the example of the influence of the environment on plants in support of his view.

He observed differences in the same species of plants grown in different environmental conditions. When plants are grown in fertile soil, they become healthy & luxuriant; the same plants grown in unfertile soil are weak and thin.

2. Use and disuse:

Continuous use of an organ or organs tends to develop them highly, whereas disuse results in a gradual reduction, degeneration, and complete disappearance.

Examples in favor of the Use theory:

The long neck of a giraffe, webbed feet of aquatic birds, bicep muscles & long legs of wading birds, etc.

Examples in favor of disuse theory:

Loss of limbs in snakes, degeneration of eyes in cave animals, degeneration of wings in flightless birds, vestigial organs in man, etc.

3. Internal urge of an organism:

Animals and plants can grow and increase in size. According to Lamarck, this increase is due to desire which is some sort of an internal urge of the animal to attain the maximum size.

4. Inheritance of acquired characters:

The changes acquired in an organism, during its lifetime, due to the use and disuse of organs and under the influence of the environment are called acquired characteristics.

The characteristics acquired by an organism during its lifetime are inherited by the offspring. It means that changes are cumulative over some time and are inherited by the next generation.

As per this proposition, the long neck of the giraffe and the degenerated wings of the kiwi are acquired characters. Hence, they are inherited by their progeny generation after generation.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Growth And Development

WBBSE Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Growth And Development Introduction To The Concept Of Growth And Development

Our life starts from a single fertilized cell. This cell is under constant interaction with the environment in the mother’s womb (functional state of life) and after birth with the outside world.

This interaction leads to our growth and development. Growth occurs by the addition of new substances, both protoplasmic and apoplastic (ie. nonliving substances which become components of the tissues).

Cell growth occurs during the post-mitotic phase and interphase. During growth, anabolism is higher than catabolism.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Growth And Development

Growth in unicellular organisms is not pronounced because, in this case, growth means enlargement of the cell only.

Growth in multicellular organisms is pronounced, because it begins with a single cell, and then, over time, newer cells are added to it and so, it grows in volume.

The growth of all multicellular organisms is governed by the reproduction & growth of all the individual cells that constitute the body of the organism.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

Division of each cell and their growth into thousands in number, or their changing into tissues, blood, or bone, is part of the process of development.

For example, the multicellular plant body, as it grows, produces roots, stems, leaves, flowers, fruits & seeds by the differentiation of its cells, tissues, and organs This results in external differentiation in shape called development.

‘Growth’ and ‘Development’ are often used as synonymous terms. But growth is different from development. Growth means an increase in size, height, weight, length, etc. which can be measured.

Growth And Development In Plants Class 10

Development, on the other- hand, implies a change in shape, form, or structure resulting in improved working or functioning, which happens all through the life cycle.

Development distinguishes one kind of organism from another. Growth and development are the two important characteristics of a living organism. Normally growth contributes to development.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

In reality though ‘growth and development’ are different, but they are inseparable. Generally, processes of growth and development go on simultaneously.

To be successful in survival, multicellular organisms have to undergo various phases of growth and development.

Importance of growth:

Growth is an essential, permanent, and irreversible feature of all living organisms that enables them to gradually mature into adult forms.

Growth involves the healing of wounds to protect the adult organism from adverse environmental conditions.

Some protozoans, sponges, and coelenterates are capable of either epimorphic or morphallactic regeneration of the lost part of the body or the entire body itself by the growth and differentiation of cells from the remaining piece of that part.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Growth

Growth is a permanent and irreversible increase in size or volume and dry mass due to the result of an increase in cell number (by mitosis) or cell size or both or due to the accretion of cellular materials when anabolism exceeds catabolism.

Growth involves cell division followed by cells becoming specialized. Growth can be measured as an increase in height, wet mass, and dry mass.

Height and wet mass can be measured when an organism is alive, but dry mass can only be measured when an organism has all its water removed and is dead.

However, dry mass is the best measure of growth. Dry mass is a more reliable measure of mass than fresh mass because the former excludes the fluctuating water concentrations in the biological material measured which is present in the latter.

Dry mass is the solid matter with all water removed. Let a plant sample be taken. Blot the plant to remove any free surface moisture.

Then put the plant in an oven or desiccator overnight until it is dehydrated in an atmosphere of low heat. Let the plant be cooled in a dry environment.

This would produce a dry mass. Weighing the sample on a sensitive scale gives the weight of the dry mass.

Growth in an organism consists of a permanent and more or less irreversible increase in size, commonly accompanied by an increase in solid matter, dry mass, and amount of cytoplasm.

During the growth of a multi-cellular organism, there is an increase in the number of cells. This however excludes an increase in water content and stored food materials (e.g. fat) because these are not permanent.

For example, when a plant cell is placed in a solution of higher water potential than itself, there is a net gain of water via osmosis and when placed in a solution of lower water potential, there is a net loss of water.

Hence these temporary changes are not to be considered for growth measurement.

Growth And Development In Plants Class 10

Once growth occurs in the living body, ie. there is an increase in dry weight accompanied by an increase in the size & volume of the living organism, it can not be reversed. The growth hormones have a great role in controlling both embryonic and post-embryonic growth.

If energy is obtained at the expense of protoplasmic proteins, it results in degrowth. The process in which reserve food material is utilized and exhibits negative growth is degrowth.

Degrowth results when catabolism is higher than anabolism.

Development may be defined as a series of progressive, non-repetitive, organized & genetically programmed changes through cellular differentiation that ultimately increases the complexity of an organism as it grows.

As the number of cells increases, they become differentiated (specialized for different tasks) and change shape to adapt to a specific function.

Development is closely related to growth. Development involves the differentiation of cells, an increase in dry mass (growth), and an increase in the complexity of an organism, e.g. development in flowering plants consists of the growth of a zygote into an embryo within a seed, the process of germination and growth of a seedling into an adult plant.

The main difference between growth and development is that growth involves only a quantitative change whereas development involves both quantitative and qualitative changes. Thus growth is a subset of development.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Types Of Growth

Growth is of different types based on different parameters as outlined below

Based on Growth & Multiplication Of Cells:

Auxetic growth:

When the volume of the body increases due to the growth of cells and not by their number, eg. growth in nematodes, rotifers, etc.

Multiplicative growth:

Here growth results due to cell division and consequent increase in cell number by mitosis, eg. growth in embryos.

Accretionary growth:

Here growth occurs due to the mitotic multiplication of some special types of reserve cells occurring in specific locations of the body, eg. post-embryonic growth of animals.

Based on continuity:

Positive growth:

Positive growth occurs when anabolism exceeds catabolism.

Negative growth:

Degrowth is termed negative growth.

In plants during the germination of a seed and the production of a seedling, there is an increase in cell number, cell size, fresh mass, length, volume, and complexity of form but the dry mass may decrease because the reserves are being used up.

From this point of view, germination is considered to include a period of negative growth which becomes positive only when the seedling starts to photosynthesize.

Before that the stored food is hydrolyzed to be used for respiration and sugars are oxidized to carbon dioxide and water, causing a net decrease in mass.

Based on the period of growth:

Limited growth:

Here growth takes place up to a certain period and then the organism dies. Plant organs like leaves, flowers, and fruits show limited growth.

Unlimited growth:

Here growth never ceases. Fishes, reptiles, and woody perennial plants show unlimited growth.

Based on organs undergoing growth:

Somatic growth:

This involves the growth of the somatic organs. In plants, it is the growth of roots, stems, leaves, etc, and in animals, somatic growth is the growth of organs like the heart, lungs, liver, etc.

Growth And Development In Plants Class 10

Reproductive growth:

This involves the growth of the reproductive organs. In plants, it is the growth of floral buds, flowers, seeds, etc whereas in animals it refers to the growth of male and female genitals.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Phases Of Growth

Growth Includes Three Phases As Follows

Cell Division:

One of the ways to achieve growth in an organism is by an increase in cell number as a result of mitosis cell division. In multicellular animals, the zygote divides repeatedly by mitosis to produce the morula stage.

The cells of the morula form a hollow ball with a monolayer known as a blastula. After this, a three-cell layered gastrula is formed. Cells of gastrula divide and get engaged to form the different organs in the embryonic stage.

In plants, cell division is localized in the meristematic regions.

The apical meristems of the stem tip and root tip are primarily responsible for the growth in length of the axis and the lateral meristems, cambium, and cork cambium are instrumental to the secondary increase in thickness in the stems of dicotyledons and gymno- sperms and roots of dicotyledons.

Cell Enlargement:

This is an irreversible increase in cell size due to an increased rate of anabolism than catabolism. For example, an increase in the length of stems and roots is brought about by the elongation of cells.

As the cells increase in size, vacuoles containing the cell sap begin to appear inside the cells and the vacuoles gradually fuse & expand to form a single vacuole at the center of the cells,

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Notes

Consequently, with the appearance of the vacuole, the cells become osmotically active and thereby allow more water to enter into the cells as a result of which the cells increase in size.

Growing organisms also produce additional organic materials in their cytoplasm, which contributes to the dry mass of the cells.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic D Growth And Development

Cell Differentiation:

This contributes more to development than growth. In any multicellular organism, all the cells derived from the zygote by mitosis are genetically identical.

Therefore a liver cell, for example, contains the same set of genetic instructions as a kidney cell. As cells differentiate, different genes are switched on or off in response to the environment without losing their identifying characteristics.

Thus full-grown cells undergo genetic differentiation to become more specialized for a specific function.

Cell differentiation results in both somatic growth and reproductive growth in an organism. The cells once differentiated remain unchanged till their death.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic D Growth And Development cell division

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Human Lifespan Development

The term lifespan development refers to age-related changes that occur from birth, throughout a person’s life, into and during old age. The stages of human lifespan development are

1. Infancy (Birth to two years):

While the infant is dependent on adults for most things, many psychological characteristics undergo rapid development.

During this stage, the bond that develops between the infant and his/her primary caregiver is important in terms of the infant’s later emotional development.

The infants use the sense organs while all the organs of the body undergo rapid growth at this stage.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic D Growth And Development human lifespan

2. Childhood (Two to ten years):

During this stage, children become increasingly independent from their parents as they learn to do things themselves and gain more self-control due to the tremendous growth of neural fibers inside the brain.

The children’s cognitive skills develop during this stage, and they also begin to develop an understanding of what is right and wrong due to the correct coordination of the nervous system.

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Notes

Adolescence (Ten to twenty years):

The onset of puberty marks the beginning of adolescence. It is dominated by seeking independence from parents and developing one’s own identity.

Compared to the child, an adolescent’s thought processes are more logical, complex, and idealistic. This stage is characterized by very rapid growth but the rate of growth differs in boys and girls.

Secondary sex characters develop. A significant increase in the growth of reproductive organs is observed. Spermatogenesis and Oogenesis start in males and females respectively at this stage-this causes attainment of sexual maturity.

4. Adulthood:

Biologically an adult human being is self-sufficient, has fully developed somatic organs, and has achieved sexual maturity with all primary & secondary sex characters well developed both in male and female.

This may be divided into-

Early Adulthood (Twenty to forty years):

This is the stage of establishing personal and financial independence and establishing & consolidating a career. For many, it is also the time in which individuals select a partner, develop an ongoing intimate relationship, and begin a family.

In human beings, growth stops completely at the age of 22-23 years, i.e. once somebody attains the early adulthood stage.

Middle Age (Forty to sixty-five years):

This is a period of expanding social and personal involvements and responsibilities, advancing a career, and supporting offspring in their development to become mature individuals.

5. Older Age or late adulthood or senescence (Sixty five years plus):

Senescence means the state or process of ageing-in humans it means old age. It involves an increase in impairment of physiological functions with age, resulting in a decreased ability to deal with a variety of stresses and an increased susceptibility to diseases.

It is, therefore, a period of considerable adjustment to changes in one’s life and self-perceptions. For many older people, this is a very liberating time when they no longer have the day-to-day responsibility of looking after their children or working.

Certain aspects of sensory and perceptual skills, muscular strength, and certain kinds of memory tend to diminish with age, rendering older people unsuitable for some activities.

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Notes

There is, however, no conclusive evidence that intelligence deteriorates with age, rather it is more closely associated with education and standard of living. Senescence ultimately results in death.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. Our life starts from a single fertilized cell known as________________.
Answer: Zygote

Question 2. ________________means an irreversible increase in size, height, weight, length, etc. which can be measured.
Answer: Growth

Question 3. ________________implies a change in shape, form, or structure resulting in improved working or in functioning.
Answer: Development

Question 4. Dry mass is the solid matter with all ________________removed.
Answer: Water

Question 5. The term ________________ development refers to age-related changes that occur from birth, throughout a person’s life, into and during old age.
Answer: Lifespan

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Notes

Question 6. The Branch of Biology that deals with the study of the process of aging is called________________.
Answer: Gerontology

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Write True Or False

Question 1. Our life starts from a mass of cells.
Answer: False

Question 2. The single fertilized cell is known as the zygote.
Answer: True

Question 3. Growth involves an irreversible increase in the dry mass of an organism.
Answer: True

Question 4. The wet mass is a more reliable index of growth than the dry mass.
Answer: False

Question 5. Cell differentiation occurs in unicellular organisms.
Answer: False

Plant Growth And Development Class 10 MCQS

Question 6. Human childhood is from 2-10 years.
Answer: True

Question 7. The onset of puberty marks the beginning of senescence.
Answer: False

Question 8. Plants exhibit determinate growth.
Answer: False

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Match The Column

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic D Growth And Development match the column
Answer: 1-E,2-A,3-D,4-C

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is dry mass?
Answer: Dry mass is the solid matter with all water removed.

Question 2. What is cell enlargement?
Answer: Increase in cell size.

Question 3. What is lifespan development?
Answer: The term lifespan development refers to age-related changes that occur from birth, throughout a person’s life, into and during old age.

Question 4. What are the divisions of our adulthood? Adulthood may be divided into- early adulthood, middle age, and older Age or late
Answer: adulthood or senescence.

Question 5. Which type of plant tissue exhibits growth?
Answer: Meristematic tissue.

Question 6. Name a class of animals whose growth takes place in steps in an intermittent manner.
Answer: Arthropods.

Question 7. Name the period of the growth curve which shows maximum growth.
Answer: Log phase.

Plant Growth And Development Class 10 MCQS

Question 8. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out that term and write it.
Answer: log phase, growth curve, stationary phase, senescent phase
Growth, differentiation, development, and increase in complexity characteristics of growth.

  1. Growth Curve
  2. Development

Question 9. Name two environmental factors that hamper normal growth.
Answer: Drought & pollution.

Question 10. What is the average lifespan?
Answer: It is the average number of years survived by the members of a population. For humans, the average life span varies between 80-100 years.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Growth And Development Short Answer Type Questions With Answers

Question 1. What is growth? Mention a few important
Answer:

Growth

Growth is a permanent and irreversible increase in size or volume and dry mass due to the result of an increase in cell number (by mitosis) or cell size or both or due to the accretion of cellular materials when anabolism exceeds catabolism.

Characteristics Of Growth:

1. Growth is quantitative and measurable.
2. Growth comprises of irreversible increase in height, weight, size, and shape of body parts & organs like the brain, muscles, etc.
3. It happens due to cell division and cell enlargement.
4. Growth is for a limited period ie. determinate for animals and indeterminate for plants.

Question 2. Explain the growth curve, rate of growth, and the percentage growth.
Answer:

Growth curve:

If an organism’s measurements (height, mass, etc) are plotted against time, an S-shaped ‘sigmoid’ curve is obtained which represents the growth pattern of all organisms, plants or animals, unicellular or multicellular forms.

This is known as the growth curve. Growth tends to be slow at the initial stage of cell division and the phase is called the lag phase.

The growth rate becomes maximum during the phase of cell elongation and this phase is called the log phase or exponential phase. As adult size is reached, growth slows down and at last, it finally stops.

This phase of growth is known as the stationary phase.

Rate of growth:

Rate of growth refers to the plot of growth increments against time, ie., the estimation of the increase in the size of the organism that takes place during successive intervals of time.

Plant Growth And Development Class 10 MCQS

In most of organisms, the growth rate increases steadily until it reaches a maximum, after which it gradually falls, giving a bell-shaped curve.

Percentage growth:

The increase in growth over a period of time, when expressed as a percentage growth that has already taken place, is the percentage growth.

It expresses the quantum of growth that has already occurred. Growth is fastest at the beginning of life, after which it gradually slows down. This is true for most organisms, both animal and plant.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic D Growth And Development percentage growth

Question 3. What do you mean by a grand period of growth? Write the differences between plant and animal growth.
Answer:

Grand period of growth

The period of maximum elongation of the body corresponding to the log phase of the growth curve is known as the grand period of growth.

The differences between plant and animal growth

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic D Growth And Development plant and animal growth

Question 4. Name two of the external & internal factors that affect the growth of organisms.
Answer:

External factors: Light, water
Internal factors: Nutrition, Hormone

Question 5. Give the names of a few hormones that control human growth.
Answer:

Human growth in the first 10-13 years of age is controlled by thymosin. Growth at the end of childhood and during puberty is controlled by thyroxine and somatotropic hormones.

Question 6. How does the growth of unicellular animals vary?
Answer:

The growth of unicellular organisms like the bacterial population follows the typical S-shaped curve when a culture is inoculated with bacteria and the increase in cell number is plotted on a graph as a function of time.

Plant Growth And Development Class 10 MCQS

The Growth Curve Can Be Divided Into Four Parts:

  1. Lag phase
  2. Log phase
  3. Stationary phase and
  4. Senescent phase.

The lag phase is a period of cell adjustment to the new medium, a period of protoplasmic synthesis, cell enlargement, and preparation for division.

The log phase is the period of active cell division. The more cells there are, the more offsprings follow each division.
The stationary phase is the period in which there is no net increase in cell number.

This means that the rate of cell division equals that of cell death.

In the senescent phase, there is a decline in the number of viable cells in the population as during this time the rate of cell death exceeds that of cell replenishment.

This is the sign of senescent culture and the population continues to die unless the medium is changed.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic D Growth And Development stationary phase

Question 7. What do you mean by direct and indirect development? Give examples.
Answer:

Direct and indirect development

The post-embryonic development in which the embryo is directly developed into an adult animal without the involvement of any intermediate or larval form is known as direct development.

Examples: reptiles, birds, and mammals.

The post-embryonic development in which the embryo becomes an independent intermediate stage called a larva which undergoes metamorphosis to produce the adult form is known as indirect development.

Examples: amphibians, insects, etc.

Question 8. Growth can not be thought of as an increase in size only justify with examples.
Answer:

Growth is a subset of development. Growth is often thought of as an increase in size, but it is not an adequate definition.

The size of a plant cell may increase as it takes up water by osmosis, but this process is easily reversible and thus cannot be considered as growth.

Life Science Class 10 Chapter 2 WBBSE

On the other hand, when a zygote divides repeatedly to form a ball of cells (early embryo), there is an increase in cell number without an increase in size (volume and mass).

This is called cleavage and is the result of cell division without a subsequent increase in the size of daughter cells. This process is considered growth despite the fact that there is no increase in size.

Question 9. What is the relationship between aging and senescence? Mention two important features of senescence.
Answer:

The relationship between aging and senescence

The process of growing old by progressive deterioration of the structures & functions of the cells, tissues, and organs of the body that leads to old age or senescence is called again. Hence aging is the cause and senescence is the effect.

Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Solutions

Features Of Old Age Or Senescence:

This refers to an age group of sixty-five years plus wherein considerable adjustments need to be made in one’s life and self-perceptions due to impairment of physiological functions, decreased ability to deal with stresses, and increased susceptibility to diseases.

Certain aspects of sensory and perceptual skills, muscular strength, and certain kinds of memory tend to diminish with age, rendering older people unsuitable for some activities.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Introduction To Flower

The flower is the most attractive organ of the plant that is solely concerned with reproduction, ultimately resulting in the formation of fruits and seeds.

The flower is equivalent to a shoot, having an axis (called Thalamus) with several specialised leaves (accessory whorls like sepals and petals) meant for reproduction.

Flowers may arise singly, as in the china rose- the stalk of the single flower is called a peduncle. More commonly, flowers arise in groups at the axils of special leaves or the terminal position.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants

A branch or a branch system bearing a cluster of flowers is called an inflorescence. The branched floral axis is called rachis and the branches are the pedicels. Flowers having pedicels are called pedicellate and those without pedicels or stalks are sessile.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants Flower

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Typical Structure Of A Flower

A typical flower has four sets of floral leaves arranged on a short axis called the thalamus in a definite order. They are calyx, corolla, androecium and gynoecium.

Of the four sets of floral leaves the last two, androecium and gynoecium, are directly concerned with reproduction. They are known as reproductive whorls or essential whorls.

Flowering Plants Reproduction Process

The outer two sets, calyx and corolla, do not take any active part in reproduction, but just help in the process. So they are called accessories or helping whorls. Calyx and corolla are often collectively referred to as perianth.

Protective Structures:

Flower buds develop either at the apex of the stem or at the axils of special leaves called bracts. Bracts are generally small green bodies though in some cases they become brightly coloured.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

These outermost leafy structures present in some flowers, which are represented by bracts and bracteoles, that respectively cover the inflorescence stalk and individual flowers, function as protective structures to the flower.

China rose has a whorl of green bracts placed beneath the calyx called the epicalyx.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Parts Of A Flower

Thalamus:

The thalamus is the short abbreviated axis bearing the four sets of floral leaves.

It is the swollen end of the pentacle or pedicel with four nodes and very much compressed internodes. The floral leaves remain inserted on the nodes in whorls or spirally.

Function:

Floral whorls are arranged on the thalamus separately and successively.

Calyx:

The calyx is the outermost accessory set of floral leaves consisting of individual units called sepals (Fig. 2.45). Sepals are usually green inconspicuous bodies.

Sepals of some plants become coloured like the petals and are called petaloids, eg.
Krishnachura.

The sepals of the calyx may be united (gamosepalous) or they may be free (polysepalous). In many cases, sepals fall off before the flowers fully open out.

Flowering Plants Reproduction Process

They are called caducous sepals, eg. Poppy; while in others they fall off with other parts after fertilization. These are deciduous sepals.

The calyx may sometimes be retained even after the fruit is formed, it is called persistent calyx; it can grow along with the fruit (accrescent) as in brinjal or it can just be retained without any size change (marcescent) e.g. tomato.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants Floral

Function:

Sepals protect the inner parts of the flower in bud condition from heat, cold, rain etc.

Green sepals perform photosynthesis.

Coloured and showy sepals help in pollination by attracting insects.

A persistent feathery calyx helps the distribution of fruit by the wind.

Corolla:

It is the second accessory or protective whorl inside the calyx, represented by coloured leafy structures called petals containing different pigments like orange-carotene, red-lycopene, violet-anthocyanin etc.

They are often sweetly scented. The petals of Debdaru are called sepaloid as they are green and sepal-like in appearance.

They also exhibit a specific pattern of arrangement, remaining in one or multiple whorls, which also falls off with the maturity of the fruit.

The petals also can be united (gamopetalous) as in Datura or they can be free (polypetalous) as in the china rose. The free petals often have two parts narrow stalk called a claw and an upper flat blade known as a limb.

Sometimes it looks like a butterfly (papilionaceous) as in a pea flower.

Function:

In the bud stage of the flower, the corolla encloses the essential whorls and protects them from external heat, rain and insect attack.

They attract insects for pollination through colour, scent and nectaries or by providing a seat for them.

Androecium:

It is the first essential whorl and the male reproductive structure of a flower, represented by individual subunits called stamens.

Each stamen is divided into two major parts, the slender stalk-like filament and the apical sac-like anther, containing the yellow-coloured male reproductive spores or pollen grains, which come out through a specific line of dehiscence.

In china rose, one pollen sac is present in each anther lobe. The stamens may either be attached by cohesion or may be attached to the calyx (episepalous) or corolla (epipetalous).

In China, the stamens are called monadelphous since the filaments are united to form one bundle with the anthers remaining free.

The stamens of a flower may be of equal or unequal length. All stamens do not always bear fertile anthers. In Kalkasunde four out of ten stamens are sterile. They are called staminodes.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants Androecium

Function:

Anther of stamen produces male reproductive gametes or units of flower called pollen grains or pollinia.

Gynoecium or pistil:

It is the innermost female reproductive whorl with the individual units called carpels. Pistil may be made of one, two, three or many carpels.

Accordingly, they are monocarpellary, bicarpellary or polycarpellary. The monocarpellary pistil is called simple while others are termed as compound. Each carpel consists of three specific parts, viz.

the uppermost flat receptive structure called the stigma, the middle filamentous portion called style and the basal swollen portion called the ovary.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants ovary

The stigma that receives the pollen grain, is sticky or feathery to trap the pollen grain. The germination of the pollen grain produces the pollen tube which carries the male gametes into the ovary.

The ovary contains one or more egg-shaped bodies called the ovules which remain in a specific arrangement called placentation. It is the site for fertilization.

After fertilization, the ovules produce the seeds while the entire ovary produces the fruit. The fruits and seeds are disseminated by specific agents, which help in the perpetuation of the flowering plants.

In China multiple carpels are united at the common ovary and style portion with carpels remaining free only in the region of stigma.

Such a pistil is known as syncarpous.

Function:

The ovary contains ovules which are the female gametes that become the seeds after fertilization takes place. Seeds germinate to form new plants.

Some Descriptive Terms

A flower having all four floral sets is said to be complete, but if one or more sets are absent, it is incomplete.

When both stamens and carpels are present in the same flower, it is hermaphrodite or bisexual; if only one of them is present, the flower is unisexual.

Unisexual flowers may be staminate or male, or pistillate or female according to the stamens or carpels present in them. If both the whorls are absent the flower is neuter.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Notes

Thus unisexual and neutered flowers are incomplete.

A plant is called monoecious when it bears both staminate and pistillate flowers, eg. Gourd; but when the plants bear either staminate or pistillate flowers only, they are called dioecious, eg. palms. Some plants like mango, mangosteen etc bear all types of flowers bisexual, unisexual and even neutered.

They are called polygamous.

A flower is called regular when the individual parts of the whorls are similar in size and shape, as in China rose; but if the parts are dissimilar, the flower is irregular, eg. pea, Atasi etc.

A flower is termed actinomorphic when it can be cut into two halves by any number of planes passing through the centre. Regular flowers are usually actinomorphic.

It is zygomorphic, when it can be cut into two halves by only one plane through the centre, eg. pea. When even that is not possible, a flower is said to be asymmetrical having no symmetry, eg. Canna.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Description Of China Rose Hibiscus Rosa Sinensis

Flowers:

Solitary, pedunculate, complete, regular, hermaphrodite.

Bracts 5 or more forming a whorl called epicalyx. Calyx: Sepals 5, gamosepalous, tubular.

Corolla:

Regular, showy, petals 5, slightly united at the base with the staminal column Androecium: Stamens many, monadelphous, anthers-free, one-celled.

Gynoecium:

Carpels 5, syncarpous, stigma 5, ovary- 5 chambered with many ovules.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Pollination

Flowers are essentially meant for reproduction through seeds. The two reproductive organs, stamens and carpels, contain male and female gametes inside pollen grains and ovules respectively.

For fertilization, which involves a union of the two dissimilar gametes, the pollen grains must be carried to the stigma of the carpels. This process of transference of the pollen grains from the anthers to the stigma is known as pollination.

The transfer of pollen grains from the anther of a flower to the stigma of the same or a different flower of the same species is called pollination.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants Pollination

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Self-Pollination

The transfer of pollen grain from the anther of a flower to the stigma of the same flower (evidently bisexual) or the stigma of another flower (bisexual or unisexual) of the same plant, is called self-pollination.

When the pollination occurs in the same flower, it is called autogamy and when the pollination occurs between two different flowers of the same plant, it is called geitonogamy.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants geitonogamy

In either of the processes, only one parent plant is concerned with producing the offspring. Therefore the progeny becomes weaker due to the lack of recombination of contrasting characters.

Adaptations That Facilitate Self-Pollination Are As Follows:

Cleistogamous flower:

The flowers are minute, underground and do not open on maturity, so there cannot be any cross-pollination, e.g. Commeima.

The stamens and carpels mature at the same time in a bisexual flower.

It is likely then that some of the pollen grains are necessarily dropped on the stigma of the same flower through the agency of wind or insects. This phenomenon is known as homogamy.

Examples: Cactus, Pea etc.

The stamens are bigger than the carpels and grow just above the stigma.

The pollen grains have unique proteins in their outer coats, which are specific for the stigma of the same flower.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Cross-Pollination

The transfer of pollen grains from the anther of one flower to the stigma of another flower (bisexual or unisexual) borne by two separate parent plants belonging to the same species or closely related species is called cross-pollination.

Pollen Grain Cross When the pollination takes place between two flowers borne by two separate plants of the same species, it is called xenogamy, while if it occurs between two closely related species, it is called hybridism.

In this process, two parent plants are concerned and therefore, the progeny often becomes stronger and healthier owing to the recombination of contrasting characters. Unisexual flowers are always cross-pollinated.

Adaptations That Facilitate Cross Pollination Are As Follows:

The flower is unisexual like in palms. This is called Dicliny.

The anther and stigma mature at different times. This is called Dichogamy.

Examples: Chinarose, Champa etc.

There is some physical barrier between the anther and the stigma e.g. Gynostegium of Calotropis. This is called Herkogamy.

The anthers are never released outside but are borne within sac-like structures called pollinia, which can easily be carried by insects, e.g. Orchid flowers.

There is an unusual growth of the style, which makes them taller than others, so pollen grains cannot reach the stigma. This is called Heteromorphism.

Wbbse Class 10 Life Science Notes

Pollen grains are light in weight, produced in bulk amounts and are not easily destroyed.

There is another phenomenon called self-sterility in which the pollen of a flower has no fertilizing effect on the stigma of the same flower, eg.

Tea flowers, grasses, and some orchids are self-sterile. Only pollen applied from other plants or other species is effective in such cases.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Merits And Demerits Of Self And Cross-Pollination

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants self pollution and cross pollution

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Agents Of Cross-Pollination

There are different agents that help in cross-pollination. Based on the type of agents, cross-pollination may be broadly divided as

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants agents of cross polution

Anemophily or pollination with the help of wind: In this case, the wind is the abiotic agent of pollination.

Floral Character:

Flowers are generally smaller, devoid of any colour, nectar and fragrant odour. Pollen grains are light-weight, and produced in bulk amounts. Stigma is feathery and branched. Anthers are easily cut off from the filament, that is, they are versatile in nature.

Anemophilous plants:

Paddy, maize, bamboo etc.

(H) Hydrophily or pollination with the help of water: In this case, water is the abiotic agent of pollination.

Floral Character:

Flowers are small, inconspicuous, lightweight, colourless and can float easily on the surface of the water. Floral parts are covered by a waxy layer to prevent flowers from getting wet easily.

Pollen grains are impervious to water. Male flowers are superior in position in comparison to the female flower. Male flowers mature slightly before female ones. Stigmas are provided with bristles to catch nearby floating pollen grains.

Hydrophilous plants:

Hydrilla, Vallisneria etc.

Zoophily or pollination with the help of animals:

In this case, animals are the biotic agent of pollination. Depending on the nature of pollinators, zoophilous plants are categorized as:

Entomophily or pollination with the help of insects:

Insects are the pollinators for entomophilous plants.

Floral Character:

The flowers have a corolla tube. The nectaries are present. The anthers are large & projected outward from the corolla, while carpels remain within. The flowers are showy. Stigma may be sticky in nature. Pollen grains are rough, large and sweet in taste.

Entomophilous plants:

Mango, Sunflower, Karabi etc.

Ornithophily or pollination with the help of birds:

Birds pollinate ornithophilous plants.

Floral Character:

The flowers are large, showy and conspicuous.

They are mostly red in colour. The corolla is stout and may remain in the form of a tube, The pollen grains are produced in bulk amounts and are sticky in nature.

Ornithophilous plants:

Shimul, Palash etc.

Malacophily or pollination with the help of slugs, snails and squirrels:

Land plants like chrysanthemums and water plants like Lemna show malacophilous. Arisaema (snake plant) is often visited by snails. Squirrels also visit a large number of malacophilous plants and play a role in their pollination.

Floral Character:

Flowers are usually small. Male and female flowers are arranged in the same spadix. There may be attractive apathy bracts with nectar glands at the basal region of the inflorescence.

Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants

Chiropteriphily or pollination with the help of bats: Bat pollination is most common in tropical and desert areas that have many night-blooming plants.

Floral Character:

Bat-pollinated flowers tend to be large and showy, white or light-coloured, open at night and have strong musty odours. They are often large and have bell-shaped or ball of stamens. Flowers are rich with nectar.

Chiropteriphilous Plants:

Agave, Kadam etc.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Fertilization And Development Of New Plant

Pollen grains are carried to the stigma of a flower by pollination. It is a necessary preliminary to the more important process called fertilization.

Fertilization is the process of the union of two dissimilar haploid isogametes (male and female). It is also known as syngamy. In angiosperms, it is internal and takes place between pollen grain and ovule.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants new plants

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Stages Of Syngamy Or Sexual Reproduction

Germination Of Pollen & Formation Of Male Gamete:

Uninucleate pollen grains generally become binucleate before liberation from the anthers. Of the two, the larger one is the tube nucleus and the smaller one is the generative nucleus.

Subsequent to pollination while resting on the stigma of the carpels, the stigmatic fluid stimulates germination of the pollen grain, as a result of which the exine is stretched and intine with the protoplasmic contents comes out through a weak spot, germ pore, to form a tube, called the pollen tube.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering sexual reprodution

The tube nucleus is located at the tip of the pollen tube and is followed by the generative nucleus. Now the pollen tube elongates and pushes its way through the style ultimately reaching the ovary.

During the growth of the pollen tube, the tube nucleus gradually disintegrates and the generative nucleus divides into two nuclei, called sperm nuclei. They are the haploid (n) male gametes.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering pollen tube

Formation of female gamete:

The embryo sac contains the haploid (n) egg at the micropyle end and the diploid (2n) definitive or secondary nucleus at its centre.

Fertilization:

After piercing into the embryosac, the pollen tube bursts at its tip liberating the two male gametes within the embryo sac.

One male gamete fuses with the egg, i.e., the female gamete, and that results in Pollen grains’ actual fertilisation. The fertilised egg soon secretes a wall around itself and forms the diploid (2n) zygote called oospore, which in the course of time, develops into the embryo.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Fertilization

The second male gamete moves on to the definitive nucleus located at the centre of the embryo sac and fuses with it, forming the triploid (3n) endosperm nucleus.

Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants

Though the second method is subsidiary to fertilisation it is nevertheless important, because the endosperm nucleus ultimately produces the nutritive tissue endosperm by method of free cell formation. This behaviour of the male gametes is called double fertilisation.

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Post-Fertilization Changes

After fertilization, the ovule gets transformed to produce the seed and the entire ovary forms the fruit. Thus the seed is the bearer of the future plant in the form of an embryo.

The different structures of the ovule transforming into the corresponding structures in the seed are-

The seed remains intact for a short period of dormancy before getting germinated to produce the radicle and then the plumule and thereby the entire seedling is generated.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants structure of ovule

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. Sepals are usually______________ in colour.
Answer: Green

Question 2. Corolla are formed of units called______________ .
Answer: Petals

Question 3. Gamopetalous flower includes______________ petals.
Answer: United

Question 4. The unit of androecium is______________ .
Answer: Stamen

Question 5. The unit of______________ is carpels.
Answer: Gynoecium

Question 6. The parts of stamen are and ______________.
Answer: Filament, they

Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 MCQS

Question 7. The carpel consists of stigma, ______________ and ovary.
Answer: Style

Question 8. Pollination involves the transfer of pollen grain from to______________.
Answer: Anther, Stigma

Question 9. The ovule is present within ______________.
Answer: Ovary

Question 10. ______________ is pollination within the same flower.
Answer: Autogamy

Question 11. ______________is pollination between two flowers of the same plant.
Answer: Geitonogamy

Question 12. Pollination by wind is called______________ .
Answer: Anemophily

Question 13. When the pollen tube penetrates the nucleus through the micropyle, the condition is called the______________
Answer: Programs

Question 14. Pollination by water is called______________ .
Answer: Hydrophily

Question 15.______________ flower always shows self-pollination.
Answer: Cleistogamous

Question 16.______________ is also called accessary cells.
Answer: Synergids

Question 17. Pollination by bats is also called ______________.
Answer: Chiropteriphily

Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 MCQS

Question 18. The fusion nucleus is ______________in nature.
Answer: Triploid

Question 19. Ornithophily is pollination by ______________ .
Answer: Birds

Question 20. Wind pollinated flower has______________ stigma.
Answer: Feathery

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants

Question 1. The phenomenon of double fertilization is also called triple fusion.
Answer: True

Question 2. The essential whorls are four in number.
Answer: False

Question 3. The gynoecium is formed of carpels.
Answer: True

Question 4. Stamens are units of the male reproductive whorl.
Answer: True

Question 5. Vallisneria is pollinated by air.
Answer: False

Question 6. Kadam is a self-pollinated flower.
Answer: False

Question 7. Geitonogamy occurs within the same plant.
Answer: True

Question 8. The zygote develops from a fusion nucleus.
Answer: False

Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 MCQS

Question 9. Sepals may help in photosynthesis.
Answer: True

Question 10. Flower is a modified shoot.
Answer: True

Question 12. Stigma of chinarose is five lobed.
Answer: True

Question 13. Endosperm is haploid in a gymnosperm.
Answer: True

Question 14. Fragrant flowers with well-developed nectaries are adapted for anemophily.
Answer: False

Question 15. The antipodals are haploid in nature.
Answer: True

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is pollination by insects called?
Answer: Entomophily.

Question 2. Name the unit of the corolla.
Answer: Petals.

Question 3. if there are 4 microspore mother cells in anthers, what will be the number of pollen grains?
Answer: 4 (mother cells) x 4 = 16 pollen grains through meiosis.

Question 4. Name the gland that produces nectar.
Answer: Nectaries.

Question 5. Name the innermost whorl.
Answer: Gynoecium.

Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 MCQS

Question 6. Name the type of flower which has fused petals.
Answer: Gamopetalous.

Question 7. Name the bract of chinarose.
Answer: Epicalyx.

Question 8. State the nature of stigma in insect-pollinated flowers.
Answer: Sticky.

Question 9. What is the other name for undifferentiated sepals and petals?
Answer: Perianth

Question 10. Name the nutritive layer of the anther.
Answer: Tapetum.

Question 11. Name two wind-pollinated flowers.
Answer: Paddy, wheat.

Question 12. What are the units of perianth called?
Answer: Tepals.

Question 13. What is the nature of the endosperm?
Answer: Triploid (3n).

Question 14. Name the part of the flower where the whorls are arranged.
Answer: Thalamus.

Question 15. Name a plant where pollinia (ie. pollen grains occurring in masses) are found.
Answer: Calotropis (Madar).

Question 16. What is the name of the stalkless flower?
Answer: Sessile.

Question 17. What is the name given to a flower with 4 whorls?
Answer: Complete.

Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 MCQS

Question 18. Name the flower that can be cut into two halves at any plane.
Answer: Actinomorphic.

Question 19. How many nuclei participate in double fertilization?
Answer: egg (n) + secondary nucleus (2n) + [2 x male gamete (n) ] = 5 nuclei

Question 20. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out the term and write it:
Answer:

  1. Stigma, style, carpel, ovary
  2. Malacophilous, ornithophily, myrmecophily, zoophily
  3. Carpel
  4. Zoophily

Question 21. How many types of hydrophilous plants are there?
Answer:

Two types: Hypohydrogamous (pollination taking place completely underwater) and Epihydrogamous (pollination taking place on the water’s surface).

Question 22. What is microsporogenesis?
Answer: Microspore or pollen grain formation within the anther is called microsporogenesis.

Question 23. Name the three nuclei of the egg apparatus at the micropyle end.
Answer: The middle nucleus is the egg and the other two are called synergids.

Question 24. Out of the eight nuclei in the embryo sac, which one degenerates after fertilization?
Answer: The antipodals (3 nuclei) and the synergids (2 nuclei) degenerate after fertilization.

Question 25. A pair of related terms is given below. Based on the relationship in the first pair, write the suitable word in the gap of the second pair:
Answer:

sepals:calyx:: petals: corolla

Paddy: anemophily:: Hydrill: hydrophily

WBBSE Chapter 2 Sexual Reproduction In Flowering Plants Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is autogamy?
Answer:

Autogamy

The transfer of pollen grains from the anther of a flower to the stigma of the same flower (evidently bisexual) or to the stigma of another flower (bisexual or unisexual) of the same plant is called autogamy or self-pollination. Evcactus, pea etc.

Question 2. What is allogamy?
Answer:

Allogamy

The transfer of pollen grains from the anther of one flower to the stigma of another flower (bisexual or unisexual) borne by two separate parent plants belonging to the same species or closely related species is known as allogamy or cross-pollination.

Question 3. What is double fertilization?
Answer:

Double fertilization

The process of double fertilization takes place in angiosperms where after the discharge of two male gametes into the embryo sac, the first male gamete fertilizes the egg to produce the diploid zygote (2n) while the second male gamete fertilizes the diploid fusion nucleus to produce the triploid endosperm mother nucleus (3n).

Wbbse Solutions Class 10 Life Science

Thus both the male gametes participate in fertilization, ie. fertilization takes place twice: true fertilization or syngamy and triple fusion. Hence it is known as Double fertilization.

Consequent to double fertilization, the zygote develops into the embryo and the endosperm nucleus into the endosperm which supplies nutrition to the embryo.

Question 4. What is porogamy?
Answer:

Porogamy

The entry of the pollen tube through the micropylar pore of the ovule during fertilization is called porogamy. It occurs in the majority of angiosperm plants.

Question 5. What is monogamy?
Answer:

Monogamy

The entry of the pollen tube through the integument of the ovule during fertilization is called misogamy, e.g. Cucurbita.

Question 6. What is chalazogamy ?
Answer:

Chalazogamy

The entry of the pollen tube through the chalaza during fertilization is called chalazogamy, e.g. Casuarina.

Question 7. What is a monoecious plant?
Answer:

Monoecious plant

The plant where the pollination occurs between the male and female flower of the same plant is called a monoecious plant, e.g. Gourd. These plants carry male and female flowers on the same plant. They are also called homothallic plants.

Question 8. What is the nature of the endosperms in gymnosperm? A gymnosperm plant has 24 chromosomes in the microspore mother cell. How many chromosomes are there in its endosperm?
Answer:

Nature of the endosperms in gymnosperm

The endosperm of gymnosperm is haploid and it is formed before fertilization. Since the diploid (2n) microspore mother cell of the gymnosperm has 24 chromosomes, both its haploid (n) microspore and endosperm (n) contain 12 chromosomes each.

Wbbse Solutions Class 10 Life Science

Question 9. Explain the construction embryo sac before double fertilization. In an angiosperm, there are 12 chromosomes in the microspore mother cell. How many chromosomes does it have in the endosperm?
Answer:

The female gametophyte or embryo sac consists of eight nuclei. Out of these eight nuclei four lie at one end of the embryo sac and the remaining four at the other.

One nucleus from each pole moves towards the centre and is known as the polar nucleus. Both polar nuclei fuse with each other to form a diploid nucleus known as the secondary nucleus (2n).

The remaining three nuclei at the chalazal end organize themselves to form the antipodal cells and the three nuclei towards the micropyler end constitute the egg apparatus.

The central cell of the egg apparatus constitutes the female gamete or the egg and the other two cells are called synergids. Since the diploid microspore mother cell (2n) of the angiosperm has 12 chromosomes, the triploid endosperm (3n) has 18 chromosomes.

Since the diploid microspore mother cell (2n) of the angiosperm has 12 chromosomes, the triploid endosperm (3n) has 18 chromosomes

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants angiosperm

Question 10. Mention the differences between self-pollination and cross-pollination.
Answer:

The differences between self-pollination and cross-pollination

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 2 Continuity Of Life Topic C Sexual Reproduction in Flowering Plants self and cross pollination

WBBSE Objective Type Questions Write True Or False

Question 1. Self-pollination or cross-pollination can be exercised in flowers of pea plants according to the need.
Answer: True

Question 2. The carpel of flowering plants collects pollen grains with the help of a hairy and sticky style.
Answer: False

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals – Nervous System

WBBSE Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Introduction To Nervous System

The system comprising of a complex network of nerves, cells, brain & spinal cord that receives a stimulus both external & internal), transmits it to other parts of the body for interpretation & command, and sends the corresponding motor output is known as the Nervous System.

The Nervous System Performs Three Basic Functions:

Receiving stimuli through sensory neurons from internal and external environments and passing them to the brain; interpretation and processing of the input stimuli in the brain and then feeding response back to the body parts through motor neurons.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals - Nervous System

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals-Nervous System Neural Control And Coordination

Our body exhibits a unique example of the division of labor among different cells, tissues, organs, and systems. Let us examine these with examples from daily life.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System nervous system

During running and exercise a person’s breathing and heart rate both increase. For the person to become more active his muscles will need to produce more energy.

They can do this by breaking down glucose from the consumed food, but to do this they need plenty of oxygen.

The brain then sends signals to the muscles that control breathing (the diaphragm and the intercostal muscles between the ribs) so that they shorten and relax more often.

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

This causes the person to take more breaths. As a result, more oxygen will be absorbed in the lungs and carried to the muscles that are being used to exercise the muscles belonging to the arms and legs.

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life Science

The heart rate increases to increase the cardiac output to cater to the enhanced need for blood supply to the effector’s muscles.

So, during these activities, the muscular system, respiratory system, circulatory system, nervous system, etc. get involved in a coordinated manner.

Here, in this example, the stimulus is of internal origin. The brain interprets the signal and sends motor commands to effector organs of both the respiratory & circulatory systems as a part of neural coordination.

When you step out in bright sunlight, you partly close your eyes to keep out the bright light. You may start sweating as the temperature rises to maintain the body temperature through thermolysis (or, the mechanism of heat loss by the body).

These are coordinated responses to stimuli. The physical part of this response and coordination in animals involves the nervous system.

WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Geography And EnvironmentWBBSE Notes For Class 10 History And Environment
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Life ScienceWBBSE Class 10 Life Science Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 MathsWBBSE Class 10 Maths Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Notes For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

 

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals-Nervous System The Nervous Pathway To Respond To Stimuli

This indicates that the first event in this sequence is a “Stimulus” (“Stimuli” is the plural form). It may be internal or external.

In this context, a stimulus may be defined as a physiochemical change in the environment that the human sensory receptors can detect, e.g. sound, physical contact, taste, visual sensation, hunger, etc. Irritability or sensitivity is a characteristic feature of all living organisms.

The next stage in the pathway is the “Sensory Receptors” sensing the stimulus. These receptors are located all over the body but some types of receptors are in specific areas of the body (e.g. taste buds on the tongue in the mouth).

Sensory neuron(s) then transmit information from the sensory receptor(s) to the Central Nervous System (CNS i.e. the brain and spinal cord).

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

This happens because peripheral nerves are connected to the spinal cord via the network of nerves within the nervous system.

The information so received by the CNS is further transmitted by relay neuron(s).

Finally, an effector (muscle and gland) brings about a response.

This pathway may be explained by a common example of our response after hearing the doorbell.

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System sensory neuron

 

The ringing of the doorbell is the external stimulus. It generates sound waves that travel through the air.

The air-borne sound waves travel down through the ear canal and strike the tympanic membrane, causing it to vibrate. This vibration passes through the middle ear ossicles to the inner ear and finally stimulates the hair cells of the Organ of Corti.

The ear acts as the sensory photoreceptor for the sound stimulus. It is the movement of these hair cells which converts the vibrations into afferent nerve impulses,

The nerve impulses travel over the central auditory sensory pathways to the auditory cortex of the brain,

The brain or CNS interprets the impulses as sound and generates a response (in this case it is the action to open the door),

The response is achieved through motor nerves by our body movement to open the door.

Communication between receptors and effectors – Between the receptors and effectors are the conducting cells of the nervous system, termed neurons.

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

These are the basic structural and functional units of the nervous system. They are spread throughout the body of the organism forming a complex communication network. Neurons communicate through an electrochemical process.

Difference Between Mode Of Action Of Hormone And Nervous System:

Both nervous and endocrine systems are the basic systems that regulate the biological processes inside an organism but through different means of passing signals.

However, the basic differences between them, regarding mode of action-

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System nervous

WBBSE Chapter 1 Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Components Of Nervous System

The nervous system is made up of three basic elements nerve cells or neuron interstitial cells including neuroglia cells and connective tissue remains associated with the above elements.

Structure And Function Of Different Parts Of Neuron:

Neurons are the basic structural and functional units of the nervous system, which are readily excitable electrically to transmit information inside the bodies of animals.

The signaling or signal passing is carried out through both electrical and chemical means-

The human brain contains about 100 billion neurons.

Although the morphology of various types of neurons differ in some respects, they normally contain four distinct regions with different functions the cell body, the dendrites, the axon, and the axon terminals.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System neuron

WBBSE Chapter 1 Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Type Of Neurons

Neurons May Be Classified As Follows:

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System sensory neurons chart

According to function:

According To Function, Neurons Are Of Three Types.

1. Sensory neurons:

These run from the various types of stimulus receptors (e.g., touch, odor, taste, sound, vision, etc.) to the central nervous system (the brain and spinal cord).

2. Inter-neurons:

These are found exclusively within the spinal cord and brain. They are stimulated by signals reaching them from sensory neurons, other interneurons, or both. Interneurons are also called association neurons or adjustors.

3. Motor neurons:

These transmit impulses from the central nervous system to the muscles and glands that carry out the response.

According to structure:

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

According To Structure, Neurons Are Of Two Types.

1. Golgi I neuron:

A Golgy type I neuron has a long axon that begins in the grey matter of the central nervous system and may extend from there.

2. Golgi II neuron:

A Golgy type II neuron has a short axon or no axon at all.

According To The Number Of Processes:

Neurons are of four types

1. Apolar neuron:

An apolar neuron contains only the cell body and there is neither any dendron nor any axon.

2. Unipolar neuron:

A unipolar neuron has only one protoplasmic process originating from the cell body.

3. Bipolar neuron:

A neuron having one axon & one dendron originating from the opposite poles of the cell body is called a bipolar neuron.

4. Multipolar neuron:

A multipolar neuron has many dendrites and one axon arising from several poles of the cell body.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Nerve

Inter-relationship among, neurons, nerve fibers, and nerves.

A neuron or nerve cell is the fundamental unit of signal processing; an electrically excitable cell that processes and transmits information through electrical and chemical signals.

Dendrites are like antennae that receive information and pass it to the cell body. The cell body is a processor/integrator that decides to send action potential through the axon and at a certain frequency.

A bundle of several thousands of axons with associated connective tissue & blood vessels that lie outside the brain & spinal cord is called a nerve.

It may be myelinated (or medullated) or nonmyelinated (or non-medullated) nerve fiber. The diameter of a non-medullated nerve is less than that of the medullated one.

Class 10 Life Science Nervous System Solutions

Often the cell body sits somewhere and has its axon reaching several feet away. The axons are bundled together and go in a pipe sort of structure. It may either carry information to the brain (sensory) or from the brain (motor) or mixed.

Usually the term “nerve” is reserved for bundles of axons traveling outside the brain; inside the brain bundles of axons are called “fiber tracts” or “commissures.”

Each nerve is covered by three connective tissue layers, starting with the inner endoneurium, which covers the nerve fibers; the middle layer called the perineurium, and the outer layer over the perineurium, called the epineurium.

There are blood vessels within a nerve.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Types Of Nerve

Nerves Are Categorized Into Three Groups Based On The Direction In Which Signals Are Conducted:

1. Afferent or sensory nerves conduct signals from receptors to the central nervous system since these are made up of sensory neurons only. Example – 1st (Olfactory) and 2nd (Optic) cranial nerves

2. Efferent or motor nerves conduct signals from the central nervous system along motor neurons to the effector organs like target muscles and glands.

Example- 3rd (Oculomotor) and 4th (Trochlear) cranial nerves.

Mixed nerves contain both afferent and efferent axons and thus conduct both incoming sensory information and outgoing muscle commands in the same bundle. Example- 5th (Trigeminal) and 7th (Facial) cranial nerves, spinal nerves.

 

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Mixed Nerves

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Neuroglia

Neuroglia is commonly known as glial cells or glia.

These comprise the interstitial tissue of the central nervous system. All glial cells are much smaller but far more numerous than the neurons. The cells do not possess axons.

Glial Cells Are Of Six Types-

  1. Macroglia
  2. Microglia
  3. Astrocytes (star-shaped)
  4. Oligodendrocytes
  5. Schwann cells and
  6. Satellite cells.

Functions:

  1. Neuroglias provide mechanical support to neurons,
  2. These prevent neuronal impulses from spreading in unwanted directions,
  3. These cells can remove foreign materials by phagocytosis,
  4. Neuroglia maintains homeostasis.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Ganglia

Ganglia (singular = ganglion) are ovoid structures containing cell bodies of neurons and glial cells supported by connective tissue.

Ganglia function like relay stations-one nerve enters and another exits.

Formation:

In vertebrates, the ganglion is a cluster of neural bodies outside the central nervous system.

In the central nervous system, such collections of neurons are called nuclei. A spinal ganglion, for instance, is a cluster of nerve bodies positioned along the spinal cord at the dorsal and ventral roots of a spinal nerve.

Class 10 Life Science Nervous System Solutions

Function:

Ganglia provide relay points and intermediary connections between different neurological structures in the body, such as the peripheral and central nervous systems.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Synapse

In the nervous system, a synapse is a structure that permits the axon terminal of one neuron to pass an electrical or chemical signal to the dendrite or cell body of the consecutive neuron through a small gap separating the two neurons in one way (forward conduction) only.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Presynaptic

So it essentially consists of a presynaptic neuron, a post-synaptic neuron, and a synaptic gap.

Structure: The synapse consists of-

A presynaptic ending that contains neurotransmitters, mitochondria, and other cell organelles,

A post-synaptic ending that contains receptor sites for neurotransmitters, and

A synaptic cleft or space between the presynaptic and postsynaptic endings.

Function:

At the synaptic terminal (the presynaptic ending), an electrical impulse triggers the migration of vesicles containing neurotransmitters toward the presynaptic membrane.

The vesicle membrane fuses with the presynaptic membrane releasing the neurotransmitters into the synaptic cleft.

The neurotransmitter molecules then diffuse across the synaptic cleft where they can bind with receptor sites on the post-synaptic ending to generate the electrical response in the postsynaptic neuron.

Neurotransmitters are neurochemicals that are released into the synaptic cleft to transmit a nerve impulse from the presynaptic to the postsynaptic neurons. A few neurotransmitters are- acetylcholine, dopamine, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), serotonin, etc.

Types:

Structurally synapses may be of three types-axodendritic (formed by the axon terminal of

one neuron with the dendrite of another), axosomatic (formed by the axon terminal of one neuron with the cell body of another), and aquaponic (formed by axon terminals of both neurons).

Class 10 Life Science Nervous System Solutions

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Types Of Nervous System

The nervous system is divided into the central nervous system and the peripheral nervous system.

The Central Nervous System Is Divided Into Two Parts the brain and the spinal cord. The peripheral nervous system is divided into two major parts the somatic nervous system and the autonomic nervous system.

The somatic nervous system comprises the craniospinal nerves that we actively control, like jumping with our legs or moving our arms.

The autonomic nervous system comprises a set of nerves that work automatically. The brain controls its functioning for us; for example- automatic pumping of the heart, breathing, etc.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System types of nervous system

1. Central Nervous System:

The brain and the spinal cord which lie within the craniovertebral axis together make up the central nervous system.

The brain lies protected inside the skull and from there controls all the body functions by sending and receiving messages through nerves.

The average adult human brain weighs 1.3 to 1.4 kg. The brain contains about 100 billion nerve cells (neurons) and trillions of “support cells” called glia.

The spinal cord is about 44cm long in an adult person. The vertebral column that houses the spinal cord, is about 70 cm long. However, the sizes may vary according to the body size and sex. Therefore, the spinal cord is much shorter than the vertebral column.

2. Peripheral Nervous System:

The peripheral nervous system carries messages to and from the central nervous system.

Messages travel through the cranial nerves, which branch out from the brain through various openings of the bones of the cranium of the skull and go to many places such as the ears, eyes, face, heart, lungs, etc.

There are 12 pairs of cranial nerves. Out of these 2 pairs are sensory and the rest are mixed nerves in function.

Messages also travel through the spinal nerves, which branch out from the spinal cord through the intervertebral foramen and supply different parts of the body.

There are 31 pairs of spinal nerves – 8 cervical, 12 thoracics, 5 lumbar, 5 sacral, and 1 coccygeal. Functionally all spinal nerves are of mixed type.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous central nervous system

3. Autonomic nervous system:

Is a division of the peripheral nervous system that influences the function of internal organs without our will via motor neurons.

It regulates bodily functions such as the heart rate, digestion, respiratory rate, pupillary response, urination, and sexual arousal.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Brain And Spinal Cord

Together, the brain and spinal cord form the central nervous system.

This complex system controls the things we choose to do, like walking and talking, and the things our body does automatically, like breathing and digestion of food.

The central nervous system is also involved with our senses and memory.

The brain or Encephalon is a soft, spongy mass of nerve cells and supportive tissue that lies at the cephalic end of the spinal cord within the cranium.

Class 10 Life Science Nervous System Solutions

The brain is made of three main parts:

The forebrain, midbrain, and hindbrain. The forebrain consists of the cerebrum, thalamus, and hypothalamus. The midbrain consists of the tectum and tegmentum.

The hindbrain is made of the cerebellum, pons, and medulla. Often the midbrain, pons, and medulla are together referred to as the brain stem. The parts work together, but each has special functions.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System sensory neurons chart

The cerebrum, the largest part of the brain, fills most of the upper skull. It has two halves called the left and right cerebral hemispheres.

The cerebrum uses information from our senses to tell us what’s going on around us and tells our body how to respond. The brain is divided into two halves.

Since the nerves cross when they enter the brain, the left side of our brain controls the right half of our body and the right side controls the left.

Each half also controls specialized functions. The right and left sides of the cerebrum are connected by a thick band of nerve fibers called the corpus callosum.

The cerebral cortex (thin outer layer of tissue) is grey because nerves in this area lack the insulation that makes most other parts of the brain appear to be white.

The cortex covers the outer portion (1.5mm to 5mm) of the cerebrum and cerebellum. The portion of the cortex that covers the cerebrum is called the cerebral cortex.

The cerebral cortex consists of folded bulges called gyri (singular = gyrus) that create deep furrows or fissures called sulci (singular = sulcus).

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous brain

 

The folds in the brain add to its surface area and therefore increase the amount of grey matter and the quantity of information that can be processed.

Most of the actual information processing in the brain takes place in the cerebral cortex.

The cerebral cortex is divided into lobes each having a specific function. For example, there are specific areas involved in vision, hearing, touch, movement, and smell.

Other areas are critical for thinking and reasoning. Although many functions, such as touch, are found in both the right and left cerebral hemispheres, some functions are found in only one cerebral hemisphere.

For example, in most people, language abilities are found in the left hemisphere. The lobes of the cerebral cortex are –

(1) parietal Lobe – involved in the reception and processing of sensory information from the body,

(2) frontal Lobe – involved with decision-making, problem-solving, and planning,

(3) occipital Lobe – involved with vision, and

(4) temporal Lobe – involved with memory, emotion, hearing, and language.

The cerebellum is the area of the hindbrain that controls motor movement coordination, balance, equilibrium, and muscle tone.

Like the cerebral cortex, the cerebellum is comprised of white matter and a thin, outer layer of densely folded grey matter. The folded outer layer of the cerebellum (cerebellar cortex) has smaller and more compact folds than those of the cerebral cortex.

Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 Notes

The cerebellum contains hundreds of millions of neurons for processing data. It relays information between body muscles and areas of the cerebral cortex that are involved in motor control.

The brain stem connects the brain with the spinal cord. It controls hunger and thirst and some of the most basic body functions, such as body temperature, blood pressure, and breathing.

The spinal cord is made up of bundles of nerve fibers. It runs down from the brain through the vertebral canal in the center of the bones of the spine.

These bones protect the spinal cord. The spinal cord rapidly narrows below the lumbar region to form a cone-shaped structure called conus medullaris.

In the transverse section, the spinal cord consists of central grey matter, peripheral white matter, and a central canal. Grey matter is composed of nerve cells, nerve fibers, and neuroglial cells.

The central canal runs through the whole length of the spinal cord and is continuous above the fourth ventricle of the brain.

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System dorsal root

 

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Meninges And CSF

The brain is protected by the bones of the skull and by a covering of three thin membranes called meninges. The outer layer of the meninges is called the dura mater.

This protects the brain from movements that may stretch and break brain blood vessels. The middle layer of the meninges is called the arachnoid.

It is the protective membrane that covers the brain and spinal cord. The inner layer, the one closest to the brain, is called the pia mater.

It functions to cover and protect the CNS, to protect the blood vessels and enclose the venous sinuses near the CNS, to contain the cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), and to form partitions with the skull.

Under the dura mater, the fluid-filled space is known as subdural space and the space in between the arachnoid & the pia mater is called the subarachnoid space.

The brain is also cushioned and protected by cerebrospinal fluid (CSF). This is a watery, clear, colorless fluid flowing through the ventricles and in spaces between the meninges.

Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 Notes

CSF contains glucose, protein, lactic acid, various cations & anions, etc.

Cerebrospinal fluid brings nutrients from the blood to the brain and removes waste products from the brain. It acts as a cushion or buffer for the brain inside the skull.

Like the brain, the spinal cord is also covered by the meninges and cushioned by cerebrospinal fluid.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals’ Nervous System Reflex Action

When a receptor is stimulated, it sends a signal to the central nervous system, where the brain coordinates the response. But sometimes a very quick response is needed, one that does not need the involvement of the brain.

This is called a reflex action. Reflex actions are rapid and happen without the involvement of thinking. For example, you would pull your hand away from a hot flame without thinking about it.

Even coughing and sneezing are reflexes. They clear the airways of irritating things.

Reflex action is a spontaneous involuntary (automatic) motor response due to a sensory stimulus that either may be harmful or routine in nature.

Examples:

  1. Blinking of eyelids,
  2. Contraction of pupils when exposed to light,
  3. Withdrawal of hand when one touches a hot object,
  4. Sneeze reflex when the nose is irritated,
  5. Cough reflex when the throat is irritated,
  6. Lacrimal reflex as tears are produced to clear objects from the eye.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Types Of Reflex Action

Reflexes Are Of Two Types:

  1. Inborn or simple or unconditioned or natural reflex and
  2. Acquired or complex or conditioned reflex.

Inborn Or Simple Or Unconditioned Or Natural Reflex:

In this type of reflex, the brain is not involved. The receptor is stimulated which is conducted to the spinal cord by the effector.

The effector neuron from the spinal cord conducts a response to the muscle or the gland. This causes an immediate reaction. It does not involve any thinking or reasoning.

Unconditioned reflex is a natural response present since the birth of an individual and occurs even in newborn babies. For example, blinking of eyes when strong light falls on the eyes.

Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 WBBSE

The moving away of hand in response to pin-prick or heat is an example of this type.

Some other examples of unconditioned responses include gasping in pain after being stung by a bee, jerking your hand back after touching a hot plate on the oven, and jumping at the sound of a loud noise. In each of the above examples, the response occurs centers of the brain.

The reflexes that are not present since the birth of an individual but are acquired as a result of repeated practice and/or training are called conditioned or acquired reflex actions.

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous types of relaction

 

Example:

Swimming, cycling, writing, playing a musical instrument, etc.

The neural pathways in response to conditioned stimulus develop after practice. It is not transmitted through heredity. It may be lost if the conditioned stimulus is discontinued over a long period.

A series of experiments were conducted by Ivan Pavlov, a Russian biologist which demonstrated conditioned reflex. He found that when a bell was rung every time a dog was given food, the dog showed salivation only at the sound of the bell.

The ringing of the bell is called the conditioned stimulus. The dog had, thus, ‘learned’ to associate the sound of the bell to food and this made it salivate at the sound of the bell.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Components Of Relax Arc

The sequences of events in a simple reflex action are stimulus receptor sensory neuron relay neuron motor neuron effector.

An arc-like neural pathway formed by a chain of neurons between receptor & effector organs through which reflex action takes place is called the reflex arc.

A reflex arc consists of five components:

Receptor:

It is a specialized sensory ending that detects a stimulus (change in the environment),

Sensory Neuron:

It forms the afferent limb of the arc and sends a signal to the relay neuron;

The relay neuron at the nerve center:

It lies in the grey matter of the spinal cord, or the brain stem. It sends the signal to the motor neuron,

The motor neuron:

It sends a signal to the effector and forms the efferent limb of the arc.

The effector:

It produces a response (the hand is pulled away quickly in response to an open flame) according to the directives of the nerve center. It may be a muscle, gland, or visceral organ.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous cycle

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Importance Of Different Reflexes In Everyday Life

The speed of our reactions plays a large part in our everyday life.

We might duck in response to a loud sound, dodge if we see something coming towards us, retract if we touch something hot, or pull away if we stand on something sharp. A few common examples are-

1. Blinking Of the Eye:

Blinking is a semi-autonomic rapid closing of the eyelid. A single blink is determined by the forceful closing of the eyelid, not the full opening and closing.

Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 WBBSE

Purpose:

It is an essential function of the eye that helps to spread tears across and removes irritants from the surface of the cornea and conjunctiva.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System flow chart 1

Coughing:

The cough reflex has both sensory (afferent) mainly via the vagus nerve and motor (efferent) components.

Pulmonary irritant receptors (cough receptors) in the epithelium of the respiratory tract are sensitive to both mechanical and chemical stimuli.

The bronchi and trachea are so sensitive to light touch that slight amounts of foreign matter or other causes of irritation initiate the cough reflex.

Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 WBBSE

Purpose:

The cough reflex removes foreign material from the respiratory tract before it reaches the lungs.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System flow chart 2

Sneezing:

Sneezing is a protective reflex and is sometimes a sign of various medical conditions.

A sneeze is the expulsion of air from the lungs through the nose and mouth, most commonly caused by the irritation of the nasal mucosa.

Sneezing is a coordinated protective respiratory reflex that occurs due to stimulation of the upper respiratory tract, particularly the nasal cavity.

Purpose:

Sneezes protect our body by clearing the nose of bacteria & viruses. It expels mucus containing irritants and foreign particles to cleanse the nasal cavity.

The Components Of the reflex arc are:

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System flow chart 3

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals’ Nervous System Eyes And Coordination With Environment

In order to be able to learn about and/or solve problems presented to them by their environment, humans must be able to take in information from that environment;

process it quickly and accurately; decide when, how, and what action to take; and then perform or execute that action. To receive information from the environment we are equipped with sense organizer

A sense organ is a specialized bodily structure that receives or is sensitive to internal or external stimuli. It is composed of receptors. Human sense organs are the eyes, ears, tongue, skin, and nose.

The Eye As A Sense Organ-Its Location, Structure, And Function

The sense organ consisting of photosensitive receptors (the rod & cone cells) and which helps us in vision is known as the eye.

The two eyes are located in the deep cavities of the skull called orbits on the frontal part of the cranium.

The structure of different parts of the human eye and their corresponding functions are given below:

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous system retina

 

WBBSE Solutions Organisms Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System human eye

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Binocular Vision

We humans are largely binocular beings. Each eye alone gives us roughly a 130-degree field of vision. With two eyes, we can see nearly 180 degrees.

Because our eyes sit side by side, each eye captures a slightly different view. When signals from the two eyes reach the brain, they are superimposed and processed into a single picture with depth.

As a result, we get a 3D picture and can judge distances well. Binocular vision is vision using two eyes with overlapping fields of view and a good perception of depth to create a single visual image.

Advantages Of Binocular Vision:

Increased depth perception to clearly distinguish between nearness & farness.

Flexibility to focus on the image directly with one eye in case the other one is damaged or blinded.

Allows 3D vision.

Visibility beyond an obstacle.

Most birds and lizards have monocular vision their eyes are on each side of their head. This gives them a greater field of view, which is useful for spotting predators.

However, they have poor depth perception. Monocular vision is the vision in which both eyes are used separately to increase the field of view while the perception of depth becomes limited.

Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 WBBSE

Advantages Of Monocular Vision:

It enables the animal to see its surroundings and to detect the predators that might be ambushing from the sides.

It provides a wider range of vision.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals’ Nervous System Accommodation Viewing Near And Distant Objects

The accommodation is a reflex action of the eye, in response to focusing on a near object, then looking at a distant object (and vice versa), comprising coordinated changes in vergence, lens shape, and pupil size.

Mechanism of accommodation:

The lens is responsible for accommodation, i.e., the adjustment of the eye for observing near or far objects. It does this by changing its shape.

This changes the focal length of the lens and permits it to focus the image formed on it by the cornea. The lens is suspended from the muscular ciliary body by a number of delicate zonule fibers attached to its equator.

In the normal relaxed condition (that is, with no tension placed on the fibers by contraction of the ciliary muscle) the lens’ shape is such as to refract rays from distant objects, and the eye is focused at infinity.

Accommodation for close vision requires tension to be exerted to deform the lens. Contraction of the muscles of the ciliary body tugs at the fibers and changes the shape of the lens. Thus, the eye adjusts the shape of the lens to keep objects in focus.

Looking at distant objects:

Ciliary muscles relaxed → lens becomes thin→ focal length of the lens increases.

Looking At Objects Closer To The Eye:

Ciliary muscles contract→ increases the curvature of the eye lens → lens becomes thick → focal length of the lens decreases.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System distance eye

The young human eye can change focus from distance (infinity) to as near as 6.5cm from the eye. The amplitude of accommodation declines with age.

Mammals, birds & reptiles vary their optical power by changing the form of the elastic lens using the ciliary body. Fish & amphibians vary their power by changing the distance between the rigid lens and the retina with muscles.

An example of accommodation can be cited from daily life situations. Good vision for drivers is a crucial factor in road safety, both for the pedestrians and passengers of the car.

This is required to avoid road accidents by taking note of obstacles, traffic signals, and road directions. Distance acuity is probably the most important visual skill for driving.

WBBSE Life Science Class 10 Chapter 1 Questions And Answers

Distance acuity is the ability to focus and see clearly at far distances. Even the simplest reactions in driving take at least 0.4 seconds.

A driver has to change focus quickly and easily from the road to the dashboard and back again. Being able to see color is also pretty important in car driving.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Defects Of Visions And Corrective Measures

A person with normal eyes can, by accommodation, see all objects that are at a distance greater than about 25 cm from the eye.

If due to certain abnormalities the eye is unable to accommodate itself to various distances, then the eye is said to be defective.

Some common defects of the eye are—

1. Myopia:

Near-sightedness, also called myopia is the common name for impaired vision in which a person sees near objects clearly while distant objects appear blurred.

In such a defective eye, the image of a distant object is formed in front of the retina and not at the retina itself. Consequently, a nearsighted person cannot focus clearly on an object farther away than the far point of the defective eye.

Causes:

This defect arises because the power of the eye is too great due to the decrease in the focal length of the crystalline lens.

This may arise due to either-

Excessive curvature of the cornea, or

Elongation of the eyeball.

Correction:

This defect can be corrected by using a concave (diverging) lens. A concave lens of appropriate minus (-) power or focal length can bring the image of the object back to the retina itself.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System conacave convex

2. Hyperopia or hypermetropia:

Far-sightedness, also called hyperopia or hypermetropia, is the common name for a defect in vision in which a person sees near objects with blurred vision, while distant objects appear in sharp focus.

In this case, the image is formed behind the retina.

Causes:

This defect arises because either

the focal length of the eye lens is too great, or

the eyeball becomes too short so that light rays from the nearby object cannot be brought to focus on the retina to give a distinct image.

Correction:

This defect can be corrected by using a convex (converging) lens of appropriate focal length. Eyeglasses with converging lenses supply the additional focusing plus (+) power required for forming the image on the retina.

3. Presbyopia:

Presbyopia is a progressive form of farsightedness that affects most people by their early 40s. The power of accommodation of the eye decreases with aging.

Most people find that the near point gradually recedes.

WBBSE Life Science Class 10 Chapter 1 Questions And Answers

Causes:

It arises due to the gradual weakening of the ciliary muscles and diminishing flexibility of the crystalline lens.

Correction:

Simple reading eyeglasses with convex lenses correct most cases of presbyopia.

Sometimes, a person may suffer from both myopia and hypermetropia. Such people often require bifocal lenses.

In the bifocal lens, the upper portion of the bifocal lens is a concave lens, used for distant vision. The lower part of the bi-focal lens is a convex lens, used for reading purposes.

Cataract:

Generally, this defect can be found in aged or old people. Persons with this defect get blurred vision which sometimes even leads to total blindness.

The reason for this defect is that the lens loses its transparency and becomes opaque due to the deposition of protein material and calcium minerals in the lens.

This opaque condition of the lens does not allow the light rays from an object to pass through the lens. This defect can be rectified by surgically removing the lens and it has to be replaced by a highly convex lens.

Before intraocular lenses (lOLs) were developed, people had to wear very thick eyeglasses or special contact lenses to be able to see after cataract surgery.

Now, with cataract lens replacement by phacoemulsification or phaco surgery, several types of IOL implants are available to help people enjoy improved vision.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. Between the receptors and effectors are the conducting cells of the nervous system, termed______________
Answer: Neurons

Question 2. ______________are specialized for the conduction of a particular type of electric impulse, called an action potential, outward, away from the cell body toward the axon terminus.
Answer: Axons

Question 3. ______________is a dense group of nerve cell bodies present in most animals.
Answer: Ganglion

Question 4. The central nervous system is divided into two parts: the brain and the______________.
Answer: Spinal cord

Question 5. In human there are______________ pairs of cranial nerves.
Answer: 12

Question 6. The forebrain consists of the______________ , thalamus, and hypothalamus.
Answer: Cerebrum

WBBSE Life Science Class 10 Chapter 1 Questions And Answers

Question 7. ______________is associated with vision, hearing, motor control, sleep/wake, arousal and temperature regulation.
Answer: Mid-brain

Question 8. The funnel-shaped structure of the cell body from where the axon arises is known as the______________.
Answer: Axon Hillock

Question 9. Salivation on smelling one’s favorite food is an example of reflex.
Answer: Control

Question 10. The______________ is the thin, transparent tissue that covers the outer surface of the eye.
Answer: Conjunctive

Question11. The______________ is the area of the eye that contains the pigment which gives the eye its color.
Answer: Iris

Question 12. Near-sightedness, also called______________ is the common name for impaired vision in which a person sees near objects clearly while distant objects appear blurred.
Answer: Myopia

Question 13. The middle layer of covering of a nerve is known as the______________.
Answer: Perineurium

Question 14. An axosomatic type of synapse is formed between the axon terminal of one neuron with the______________ of another.
Answer: Cell body

Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 WBBSE

Question 15. Cycling is an example of______________ reflex action.
Answer: Acquired

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Write True Or False

Question 1. Unconditioned reflex action occurs in newborn babies also.
Answer: True

Question 2. The nervous system is made up of two major types of cells known as neurons and neuroglia.
Answer: True

Question 3. Almost every neuron has multiple axons.
Answer: False

Question 4. Gaps that occur at regular intervals in the myelin sheath of medullated nerve fibers, between adjacent Schwann cells are known as nodes of Ranvier.
Answer: False

Question 5. Sensory neurons are found exclusively within the spinal cord and brain.
Answer: False

Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 WBBSE

Question 6. Information from one neuron flows to another neuron across a synapse.
Answer: True

Question 7. The nervous system is divided into the central nervous system and the autonomic nervous system.
Answer: False

Question 8. The autonomic nervous system is voluntarily controlled.
Answer: False

Question 9. The right and left sides of the cerebral cortex are connected by a thick band of nerve fibers called the cerebral hemispheres.
Answer: False

Question 10. The pons is a portion of the hindbrain that connects the cerebral cortex with the medulla oblongata.
Answer: True

Question 11. The brain is protected by the bones of the skull and by a covering of three thin membranes called meninges.
Answer: True

Question 12. Pavlov, a Russian biologist demonstrated conditioned reflexes.
Answer: True

Question 13. No perception of vision is there in the fovea centralis.
Answer: False

Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Class 10 WBBSE

Question 14. In cataracts, the eye lens loses its transparency & becomes opaque.
Answer: True

Question 15. In nervous coordination, the signal transmission is slow and the functions are long-lasting.
Answer: False

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Match The Columns

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous match the column
Answer: 1-A,2-C,3-B,4-A

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous match the column 2
Answer: 1-D,2-E,3-B,4-A

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous match the column 3
Answer: 1-D,2-C,3-B,4-E

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Which neurons transmit information from the sensory receptor(s) to the central nervous system?
Answer: Sensory neurons.

Question 2. What is a nerve?
Answer: A nerve is an enclosed, cable-like bundle of axons with associated connective tissue & blood vessels in the peripheral nervous system.

Question 3. What is the nature of the 5th (trigeminal) cranial nerve?
Answer: It is a mixed nerve.

Question 4. What is the corpus callosum?
Answer: The right and left sides of the cerebral cortex are connected by a thick band of nerve fibers called the corpus callosum.

Question 5. What is the cerebral cortex?
Answer: The cerebral cortex is the outer layer of the cerebrum section of the brain.

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

Question 6. What are meninges?
Answer: The brain is protected by the bones of the skull and by a covering of three thin membranes called meninges.

Question 7. In which type of reflex, the brain is not directly involved?
Answer: Inborn or simple or unconditioned reflex.

Question 8. Why the blind spot of the eye is not sensitive to light?
Answer: This is not sensitive to light because there are no rods or cones there.

Question 9. How myopia can be corrected?
Answer: This defect can be corrected by using a concave lens. (‘—’ power).

Question 10. What is presbyopia?
Answer: Presbyopia is a progressive form of farsightedness that affects most people by their early 40s.

Question 11. Why does the flow of signals in a synapse occur from the axonal end of one neuron to the dendritic end of another neuron but not the reverse?
Answer: When a nerve impulse arrives at the synaptic knob of a presynaptic axon terminal of a neuron, it triggers exocytosis of synaptic vesicles to release neurotransmitter molecules.

Neurotransmitters diffuse across the synaptic cleft and bind to the neurotransmitter receptors to generate electrical impulses for onward transmission.

Hence, an electrical signal is first converted to a chemical signal at the axonal end, and then again it is reconverted to an electrical signal.

Since the neurotransmitter molecules are absent at the dendrite end of the neuron, hence a dendrite cannot convert an electrical impulse to a chemical signal.

Question 12. Why nerve cells do not divide?
Answer: Though a fully developed nerve cell body contains centrosomes, the cell body cannot divide. The role of the centrosome is not yet known. Therefore in an animal body, the number of neurons present in a newborn baby is the same as that present in an adult, i.e. the number remains unchanged, only the size increases.

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

Question 13. State the location and functions of its granules.
Answer: Nissl granules are present in the cytoplasm of the cell body of a neuron. These help in the transmission of nerve impulses.

Question 14. What are collaterals?
Answer: Axons may form lateral branches called collaterals.

Question 15. Which type of photoreceptor cells are more sensitive to light and why?
Answer: Rod cell receptors are stimulated in low light intensity whereas to simulate cone cell receptors more intensity of light is required. Hence rod cells are more sensitive to light than cone cells

Question 16. Mention the size and weight of an adult brain.
Answer: Size: About 1500 cc.
Weight: About 1200-1400g (nearly 2% of total body weight)

Question 17. What are filum terminale ?
Answer: From the tip or conus medullaris of the spinal cord, the non-nervous fibrous tissue filaments called filum terminale pass downwards.

Question 18. Which one is the largest cranial nerve?
Answer: Trigeminal (5th cranial nerve).

Question 19. Which areas act as the highest centers for the Autonomic Nervous system?
Answer: Hypothalamus and extrapyramidal area of the cerebral cortex.

Question 20. Mention the refractive indices of the components of refractory media of the human eye.
Answer:

Cornea → 1.37 (nearly)
Aqueous humor → 1.33 (nearly)
Lens → 1.40 to 1.42 Vitreous humor → 1.34 (nearly)

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

Question 21. A pair of related terms is given below. Based on the relationship in the first pair, write the suitable word in the gap of the second pair:
Answer:

Sneezing: Inborn reflex action:: Cycling Acquired reflex action _______________
__________: 12 pairs:: Spinal nerves: 31 pairs Cranial nerves
Optic nerve : sensory:: Trochlear:________________Motor

Question 22. Among the following four terms, one includes the other three. Find out that term and write it:

  1. Dopamine, neurotransmitters, serotonin, acetylcholine neurotransmitters
  2. Refractory media, cornea, aqueous humor, vitreous humor refractory media.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Show the pathway of nerve impulse transmission in a word diagram.
Answer:

The pathway of nerve impulse transmission in a word diagram

Stimuli → Sensory receptors → Sensory neuron→ CNS (spinal cord) → Relay neuron → Brain or simple reflex arc → Motor neuron Effector (muscle or gland).

Question 2. Mention any two functions of the nervous system
Answer:

Any two functions of the nervous system

It perceives the changes around us by receiving stimuli through sensory neurons intensity (i.e. dim light),

whereas to stimulate cone cell receptors more intensity of light is required (i.e. bright light). Hence rod cells are more sensitive to light than cone cells.

It controls and coordinates all the activities of the effectors (muscles, glands, or visceral organs) in response to outside changes.

Question 3. What is neuroglia?
Answer:

Neuroglia

Neuroglia are commonly known as glial cells or sometimes as glia. These non-neuron cells of the nervous system are important to maintain homeostasis as well as to form myelin.

Neuroglia are also important for the protection of neurons in the brain, and there are almost the same number of neuroglia cells as the number of neuron cells in the human brain.

The structure of this cell is like a spider or an octopus, but there is no axon as in neurons.

Question 4. What are interneurons?
Answer:

Interneurons

These are found exclusively within the spinal cord and brain. They are stimulated by signals reaching them from sensory neurons, other interneurons, or both.

Interneurons are also called association neurons or adjustors. It is estimated that the human brain contains 100 billion (1011) interneurons averaging 1000 synapses on each; that is, some 1014 connections.

Question 6. What are ganglia?
Answer:

Ganglion

Ganglion (plural ganglia) is a dense group of nerve-cell bodies present in most higher animals. In vertebrates, the ganglion is a cluster of neural bodies outside the central nervous system.

In the central nervous system, such collections of neurons are called nuclei. A spinal ganglion, for instance, is a cluster of nerve bodies positioned along the spinal cord at the dorsal and ventral roots of a spinal nerve.

The dorsal root ganglia contain the cell bodies of afferent nerve fibers. Efferent neurons are present in the ventral root ganglia.

Ganglia provide relay points and intermediary connections between different neurological structures in the body, such as the peripheral and central nervous systems.

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

Question 7. Classify the following as conditioned or unconditioned reflex actions:

  1. Applying the brake of a car at a red signal.
  2. Sweating
  3. opening the door on hearing the doorbell
  4. looking left or right before crossing the road
  5. knee jerk.

Mention the differences between conditioned and unconditioned reflex actions.

  1. Conditioned reflex action
  2. Unconditioned reflex action

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous Conditioned and unconditioned reflex

 

Question 8. How many types of reflex arcs are there?
Answer:

Asynaptic Reflex Arc:

This type of reflex arc does not contain any synapse and a single neuron acts both as sensory & motor components.

Monosynaptic Reflex Arc:

It is made up of one sensory & one motor fiber with one synapse in between.

Disynaptic reflex arc:

It consists of two synapses between three neurons.

Polysynaptic reflex arc:

There are many synapses in this type of arc.

Complex reflex arc:

It involves several reflex arcs spanning several spinal segments.

WBBSE Class 10 Life Science Chapter 1 Solutions

Question 9. Name a neuron that possesses an axon only. Differentiate between axon & dendron. The amacrine cell of the retina of the human eye Possesses an axon only.
Answer:

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous Axon And Dendron

Question 10. Mention one similarity and one dissimilarity between the nervous system and the endocrine system.

Similarity:

Both the nervous system and the endocrine system coordinate, regulate and integrate all the physiological functions in the animal body.

While the mode of coordination is chemical in nature for the endocrine system, it is electrochemical in nature in the case of the nervous system.

Dissimilarity:

Nervous control is rapid with a short-lived effect. Endocrinal control is slow but with long-lasting effects.

Question 11. What are the lobes of the cerebral cortex?
Answer:

The lobes of the cerebral cortex

The cerebral cortex is divided into several lobes, as- parietal lobe— is involved in the reception and processing of sensory information from the body;

frontal lobe- involved with decision-making, problem-solving, and planning; occipital lobe- involved with vision; and temporal lobe — involved with memory, emotion, hearing, and language.

Question 12. What are the functions of the cerebellum?
Answer:

The functions of the cerebellum

The cerebellum receives information from the sensory systems, the spinal cord, and other parts of the brain and then regulates motor movements.

The cerebellum coordinates voluntary movements such as posture, balance, coordination, and speech, resulting in smooth and balanced muscular activity. It is also important for learning motor behaviors.

Question 13. State the location of the medulla oblongata.
Answer:

The location of the medulla oblongata

Medulla oblongata, also called medulla, is the lowest part of the brain and the lowest portion of the brainstem.

The medulla oblongata is connected by the pons to the midbrain and is continuous posteriorly with the spinal cord, with which it merges at the opening (foramen magnum) at the base of the skull.

Question 14. What are the components of the reflex arc?
Answer:

A reflex arc consists of five components of receptors:

  1. Detects a stimulus (change in the environment),
  2. A sensory neuron sends a signal to the relay neuron,
  3. The relay neuron at the nerve center sends the signal to the motor neuron,
  4. The motor neuron: sends a signal to the effector and
  5. The effector produces a response (a muscle or gland or visceral organ).

Question 15. What is the importance of blinking of eyes?
Answer:

The importance of blinking of eyes

Blinking is a semi-autonomic rapid closing of the eyelid. A single blink is determined by the forceful closing of the eyelid, not the full opening and closing.

It is an essential function of the eye that helps to spread tears across and removes irritants from the surface of the cornea and conjunctiva.

Class 10 Life Science Nervous System Solutions

Question 16. Distinguish between sensory, motor, and mixed nerve.
Answer:

Difference between sensory, motor, and mixed nerve

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous sensory nerve

 

Question 17. What is a photoreceptor? Give examples. Enumerate The difference Between rod and cone cells.
Answer:

Photoreceptor

A photoreceptor is a specialized structure or cell (enterocele receptor) that is sensitive to light falling on it and can convert the light impulse into a nerve impulse.

There are three known photoreceptor cells in mammalian eyes:

Rods, Cones, And Photosensitive Retinal Ganglion Cells.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous rod and cone cells

 

Question 18. Distinguish between cerebrum & cerebellum.
Answer:

Difference between cerebrum & cerebellum

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous Cerebrum

Question 19. What are the causes of hypermetropia?
Answer:

The causes of hypermetropia

Hypermetropia arises because either the focal length of the eye lens is too great, or The eyeball becomes too short so that light rays from the nearby object cannot be brought to focus on the retina to give a distinct image.

Question 20. What is a cataract?
Answer:

Cataract

Generally cataracts can be found in old age people. Persons with this defect get blurred vision and it sometimes even leads to total blindness.

The reason for this defect is that the lens loses its transparency and become opaque due to the deposition of protein material and calcium mineral in the lens.

This opaque condition of the lens does not allow the light rays from an object to pass through the lens.

Question 21. How cataract can be rectified?
Answer:

Cataracts can be rectified by surgically removing the lens and it has to be replaced by a highly convex lens. Before intraocular lenses (lOLs) were developed,

people had to wear very thick eyeglasses or special contact lenses to be able to see after cataract surgery.

Now, with cataract lens replacement by phacoemulsification or phaco surgery, several types of IOL implants are available to help people enjoy improved vision.

Question 22. What are aqueous humor & vitreous humor? Mention their functions.
Answer:

Aqueous humor

Aqueous humor is a transparent, watery extracellular fluid that fills up the chamber in front of the eye lens. It is secreted from the ciliary epithelium.

Functions:

  1. Maintains intraocular pressure & inflates the globe of the eye.
  2. Provides nutrition to the posterior cornea, lens, etc.
  3. Acts as a refracting medium.
  4. Contains immunoglobulins that defend against pathogens.
  5. The vitreous humor is a transparent, colorless, gelatinous mass that fills the space in the eye between the lens and the retina.

Functions:

  1. It maintains the shape & pressure of the eye.
  2. Acts as a refractive medium.
  3. It contains phagocytes which keep the visual axis clear most of the time.

Chapter 1 Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Show the nervous pathway with the help of a word diagram. Briefly explain the functioning of the pathway with the help of the doorbell reflex.
Answer:

The Nervous Pathway To Respond To Stimuli

This indicates that the first event in this sequence is a “Stimulus” (“Stimuli” is the plural form). It may be internal or external.

In this context, a stimulus may be defined as a physiochemical change in the environment that the human sensory receptors can detect, e.g. sound, physical contact, taste, visual sensation, hunger, etc. Irritability or sensitivity is a characteristic feature of all living organisms.

The next stage in the pathway is the “Sensory Receptors” sensing the stimulus. These receptors are located all over the body but some types of receptors are in specific areas of the body (e.g. taste buds on the tongue in the mouth).

Sensory neuron(s) then transmit information from the sensory receptor(s) to the Central Nervous System (CNS i.e. the brain and spinal cord).

This happens because peripheral nerves are connected to the spinal cord via the network of nerves within the nervous system.

The information so received by the CNS is further transmitted by relay neuron(s).

Finally, an effector (muscle and gland) brings about a response.

This pathway may be explained by a common example of our response after hearing of the doorbell.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System sensory neuron

The ringing of the doorbell is the external stimulus. It generates sound waves that travel through the air.

The air-borne sound waves travel down through the ear canal and strike the tympanic membrane, causing it to vibrate. This vibration passes through the middle ear ossicles to the inner ear and finally stimulates the hair cells of the Organ of Corti.

The ear acts as the sensory photoreceptor for the sound stimulus. It is the movement of these hair cells which converts the vibrations into afferent nerve impulses,

The nerve impulses travel over the central auditory sensory pathways to the auditory cortex of the brain,

The brain or CNS interprets the impulses as sound and generates a response (in this case it is the action to open the door),

The response is achieved through motor nerves by our body movement to open the door.

Class 10 Life Science Nervous System Solutions

Communication between receptors and effectors – Between the receptors and effectors are the conducting cells of the nervous system, termed neurons.

These are the basic structural and functional units of the nervous system. They are spread throughout the body of the organism forming a complex communication network. Neurons communicate through an electrochemical process.

Difference Between Mode Of Action Of Hormone And Nervous System:

Both nervous and endocrine systems are the basic systems that regulate the biological processes inside an organism but through different means of passing signals.

However, the basic differences between them, regarding mode of action is-

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System nervous

Question 3. Draw a labeled diagram of the human eye.
Answer: Diagram of the human eye:

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous system retina

Question 8. Mention the location of the following

  1. sulcus & gyrus
  2. inspiratory & expiratory centers
  3. conus medullaris Enumerate the differences between the brain & spinal cord.

Answer:

  1. sulcus & gyrus → cerebral cortex in the forebrain
  2. inspiratory & expiratory centres → pons in hindbrain
  3. conus medullaris → spinal cord

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Spinal Cord

Question 9. Which part of the eye-

  1. Acts as the diaphragm of a camera
  2. Prevents the reflection of extra light within it.
  3. Give the differences between blind spots and yellow spots.

Answer:

  1. Iris
  2. Choroid

Question 9. Which part of the eye

  1. Acts As a Diaphram of the camera
  2. prevents reflections Of extra light within it.

Give the differences between blind spots and yellow spots.
Answer:

  1. It is
  2. Choroid

Class 10 Life Science Nervous System Solutions

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous blind and yellow spot

 

Question 10. Identify the animals having monocular & binocular vision:

Eagles, lizards, lions, owls, fish, snakes & cows. Give the differences between monocular & binocular vision. What is the normal field of view of human beings?
Answer:

Monocular vision: lizards, cows, fish Binocular vision: eagles, lions, snakes, owls. The field of view of human Beings is 190º for binocular vision.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous Monocular vision

 

Example 11. Explain with a diagram how myopia can be corrected. What type of lens is needed to correct presbyopia?
Which defect of the eye cannot be cured by any type of spectacle lens?
Answer:

Defects Of Visions And Corrective Measures

A person with normal eyes can, by virtue of accommodation, see clearly all objects that are at a distance greater than about 25 cm from the eye.

If due to certain abnormalities the eye is unable to accommodate itself to various distances, then the eye is said to be defective.

Some common defects of the eye are—

1. Myopia:

Near-sightedness, also called myopia is the common name for impaired vision in which a person sees near objects clearly while distant objects appear blurred.

In such a defective eye, the image of a distant object is formed in front of the retina and not at the retina itself. Consequently, a nearsighted person cannot focus clearly on an object farther away than the far point of the defective eye.

Causes:

This defect arises because the power of the eye is too great due to the decrease in the focal length of the crystalline lens.

This may arise due to either-

Excessive curvature of the cornea, or

Elongation of the eyeball.

Correction:

This defect can be corrected by using a concave (diverging) lens. A concave lens of appropriate minus (-) power or focal length is able to bring the image of the object back to the retina itself.

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System conacave convex

2. Hyperopia or hypermetropia:

Far-sightedness, also called hyperopia or hypermetropia, is the common name for a defect in vision in which a person sees near objects with blurred vision, while distant objects appear in sharp focus.

In this case, the image is formed behind the retina.

Causes:

This defect arises because either

the focal length of the eye lens is too great, or

the eyeball becomes too short so that light rays from the nearby object cannot be brought to focus on the retina to give a distinct image.

Correction:

This defect can be corrected by using a convex (converging) lens of appropriate focal length. Eyeglasses with converging lenses supply the additional focusing plus (+) power required for forming the image on the retina.

3. Presbyopia:

Presbyopia is a progressive form of farsightedness that affects most people by their early 40s. The power of accommodation of the eye decreases with aging.

Most people find that the near point gradually recedes.

Causes:

It arises due to the gradual weakening of the ciliary muscles and diminishing flexibility of the crystalline lens.

Correction:

Simple reading eyeglasses with convex lenses correct most cases of presbyopia.

Sometimes, a person may suffer from both myopia and hypermetropia. Such people often require bifocal lenses.

In the bifocal lens, the upper portion of the bifocal lens is a concave lens, used for distant vision. The lower part of the bi-focal lens is a convex lens, used for reading purposes.

Cataract:

Generally, this defect can be found in aged or old people. Persons with this defect get blurred vision which sometimes even lead to total blindness.

The reason for this defect is that the lens loses its transparency and become opaque due to the deposition of protein material and calcium mineral in the lens.

This opaque condition of the lens does not allow the light rays from an object to pass through the lens. This defect can be rectified by surgically removing the lens and it has to be replaced by a highly convex lens.

Before intraocular lenses (lOLs) were developed, people had to wear very thick eyeglasses or special contact lenses to be able to see after cataract surgery.

Now, with cataract lens replacement by phacoemulsification or phaco surgery, several types of IOL implants are available to help people enjoy improved vision.

Bi-focal lenses are needed to correct presbyopia.

Cataracts can not be corrected by using spectacle lenses.

Question 12. Give a brief description of the event rides of the brain. Mention the functions of CSF.
Answer:

There are four communicating cavities or ventricles within the brain.

Two lateral ventricles are The field of view of human beings is 190° for binocular vision. present within the cerebral hemisphere.

 

WBBSE Solutions Chapter 1 Control And Coordination In Living Organisms Topic D Response And Physical Coordination In Animals Nervous System CSF

The third ventricle is a median cavity that is bounded by the thalamus and hypothalamus. The first and second lateral ventricles communicate with the third ventricle through an aperture, called the interventricular foramen or foramen of Monro.

The fourth ventricle is the most inferior and communicates anteriorly with the third ventricle by plexus, located in the walls and roofs of the ventricles.

Protection: CSF acts as a soft cushion and shock absorber to both the brain & spinal cord & helps to prevent damage against mechanical blows.

Supply of nutrition & O2: It supplies nutrition & O2 to nerve cells of CNS. It also distributes peptides, neuroendocrine factors & other nutrients.

Excretion: CSF drains out metabolites from the nerve tissues of the CNS.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The process of necessary adjustment of the focal length of the lens in the human eye is called
Answer: Accommodation.

WBBSE Chapter 1 Write True Or False

Question 1. The hypothalamus helps to maintain body balance in humans.
Answer: False

Question 2. Acetylcholine and adrenaline are neurotransmitters.
Answer: True

WBBSE Chapter 1 Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 3. Choose the odd one and write it:
Answer: Glossopharyngeal, Occulomotor, Trigeminal, Oxytocin, since it is a hormone produced by the hypothalamus while the other three are cranial nerves.

Question 4. What is the function of the fluid present in the intermediate chamber between the lens and retina of the eyeball?
Answer:

Aqueous humor is a transparent, watery extracellular fluid that fills up the chamber in front of the eye lens. It is secreted from the ciliary epithelium.

Functions:

  1. Maintains intraocular pressure & inflates the globe of the eye.
  2. Provides nutrition to the posterior cornea, lens, etc.
  3. Acts as a refracting medium.
  4. Contains immunoglobulins that defend against pathogens.
  5. The vitreous humor is a transparent, colorless, gelatinous mass that fills the space in the eye between the lens and the retina.

Functions:

  1. It maintains the shape & pressure of the eye.
  2. Acts as a refractive medium.
  3. It contains phagocytes which keep the visual axis clear most of the time.